JP7248089B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine such as a pachinko machine.

There is a pachinko machine as a kind of game machine. In a pachinko machine, when a game ball launched by a shooting means enters a starting ball entry means provided on a game board, a lottery is conducted as to whether or not a winning state is generated, and the lottery is determined by the variable display means. A variable display is provided to teach the result (see Patent Document 1, for example).

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-271480

By the way, it is required to suppress monotony in games .

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing monotony .

The gaming machine of the present invention is
a first control means for performing a lottery as to whether or not to generate a special game state advantageous to a player based on a predetermined opportunity, and generating the special game state based on the result of the lottery;
result display means for variably displaying the identification information based on the predetermined opportunity and statically displaying the identification information based on the result of the lottery;
effect display means capable of deriving a effect display that starts when the identification information starts to fluctuate and ends when the identification information stops displaying;
a second control means for controlling the effect display means based on information from the first control means;
The second control means is
production means for generating a specific state in which the probability of occurrence of the specific production in the production display means is increased;
Pattern random number generation means used for pattern lottery for determining the pattern of the specific effect;
pattern storage means for storing a correspondence relationship between a value that can be generated by the pattern random number generation means and the pattern of the specific effect;
The pattern storage means is
a first pattern storage means in which the pattern of the predetermined specific effect is not selected or is difficult to be selected;
a second pattern storage means in which the pattern of the predetermined specific effect is more likely to be selected than the first pattern storage means ;
In the specific state,
a first pattern selection state in which the first pattern storage means is referred to or is likely to be referred to, and the second pattern storage means is not referred to or is difficult to be referred to;
a second pattern selection state in which the second pattern storage means is referenced or is easily referenced and the first pattern storage means is not referenced or is difficult to be referenced;
There is a first probability state in which the special game state is won in the lottery with a predetermined probability, and a second probability state in which the special game state is won in the lottery with a higher probability than the first probability state,
The first pattern selection state is shifted to the first pattern selection state when the variable display is performed a predetermined first plurality of times without interposing the special game state at least in the first probability state. When the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times in , or when the special game state occurs, the configuration includes a state that ends,
means for executing display corresponding to the number of times of variation of said variable display until said first pattern selection state is started; and display corresponding to said number of times of variation of said variable display until said first pattern selection state is terminated. and means capable of
means for executing a lottery as to whether or not the first pattern selection state should be set based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
Means for determining whether or not to enter the first pattern selection state after the end of the special game state according to the type of the special game state
It is characterized by comprising at least one of

According to the present invention, the feeling of monotony can be suppressed .

It is a front view showing the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a perspective view showing a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which shows the state which opened the inner frame and the front frame set. It is a front view showing the configuration of the inner frame, the game board, and the like. It is a rear view showing the configuration of the pachinko machine. It is a perspective view showing a state in which the inner frame, the back pack unit and the like are opened. It is a block diagram showing the main electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline|summary of the various counters used for game control. 4 is a flowchart showing main processing by a main controller; 4 is a flowchart showing normal processing by a main controller; 4 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing; 4 is a flowchart showing NMI interrupt processing; It is a flow chart which shows starting prize-winning processing. It is a flow chart which shows right or wrong judging processing. 9 is a flowchart showing first type determination processing; 9 is a flowchart showing second type determination processing; It is a flowchart which shows a reach determination process. 4 is a flowchart showing through gate passage processing; It is a flow chart which shows special display control processing. 10 is a flowchart showing variable display setting processing; It is a flowchart which shows a discrimination|determination information setting process. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st variable prize winning device control processing. 9 is a flowchart showing end setting processing; 8 is a flowchart showing normal display control processing; It is a flow chart which shows normal figure fluctuation setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows normal figure discrimination|determination information setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows a start winning a prize device control processing. 4 is a flowchart showing reception interrupt processing; It is a flow chart which shows the main processing of a payout control device. 4 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing; 4 is a flowchart showing command determination processing; 4 is a flowchart showing normal processing of a sub-controller; It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline|summary of various counters used for determination of a decorative design. 10 is a flowchart showing counter update processing; It is a flowchart which shows a pending|holding information storage process. It is a flow chart which shows suspension processing. It is a flow chart which shows hit display processing. It is an explanatory view showing an outline of a game system. 7 is a flowchart showing menu display processing; (a) is an explanatory diagram showing a menu screen, (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a password input screen, and (c) is an explanatory diagram showing a code issuing screen. It is a flowchart which shows a password input process. 4 is a flowchart showing code issuing processing; 8 is a flowchart showing access handling processing; It is a flowchart which shows a password issuing process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display mode in a decorative pattern display apparatus. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an unfinished vehicle displayed in the tuning area of the decorative pattern display device; It is an explanatory view showing a pending icon (item pending icon) displayed in the pending display area of the decorative pattern display device. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display mode (parts selection screen) in a decorative design display apparatus. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display mode in a decorative pattern display apparatus. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display mode (finished vehicle selection screen) in a decorative design display apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows a pending|holding icon setting process. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a customized winning value storage table; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing customization pattern determination processing; FIG. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a corresponding pattern storage table; 10 is a flowchart showing customization change processing. 4 is a flowchart showing part selection processing; 9 is a flowchart showing reflection processing; It is a flowchart which shows a finished vehicle selection process. 10 is a flowchart showing car effect setting processing; 10 is a flowchart showing normal car effect processing; 10 is a flowchart showing normal car effect processing; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of a car presentation table; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram of a vehicle model correspondence table; 10 is a flow chart showing a car effect execution process; It is explanatory drawing which shows the display mode of the decorative design display apparatus in another embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display mode of the decorative design display apparatus in another embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display mode of the decorative design display apparatus in another embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display mode of the decorative design display apparatus in another embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display mode of the decorative design display apparatus in another embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display mode of the decorative design display apparatus in another embodiment.

An embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. As shown in FIG. 3, etc., the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 as a fixed frame that constitutes the outer shell of the pachinko machine 10. On one side of the outer frame 11, an inner frame as a game board attachment frame is provided. A frame 12 is supported so that it can be opened and closed. For the sake of convenience, FIG. 3 omits the game members (nails, accessories, etc.) provided on the game board 30 and the glass unit 137 attached to the front frame set 14 as the front frame.

As shown in FIG. 6 and the like, the outer frame 11 has an upper frame-constituting portion 11a and a lower frame-constituting portion 11b made of wooden plate material, and a left frame-constituting portion 11c and a right side frame-constituting portion 11d made of aluminum alloy by extrusion molding. These frame-constituting parts 11a to 11d are assembled into a rectangular frame as a whole by detachable fasteners such as screws.

An upper hinge 81 and a lower hinge 82 are attached to the upper and lower ends of the left side frame-constituting portion 11c (see FIG. 1). The upper and lower parts of the inner frame 12 are rotatably supported by the upper hinge 81 and the lower hinge 82, so that the inner frame 12 can be opened and closed. A space formed inside the outer frame 11 accommodates the inner frame 12 and the like.

An extension wall portion 83 that protrudes toward the inner side of the outer frame 11 from the vicinity of the rear end in the width direction is formed on the right side frame-constituting portion 11d. The extending wall portion 83 covers the entire upper and lower sections corresponding to the locking device 600 (see FIG. 6) provided on the back side of the right side portion of the inner frame 12 from the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 5). In addition, as shown in FIG. 3 , a pair of upper and lower receiving portions 84 and 85 to which the locking member of the locking device 600 is locked is provided on the front side of the extending wall portion 83 . A pressing portion 86 that abuts on an inner frame open detection switch 92 (to be described later) protrudes toward the inside of the outer frame 11 from the lower receiving portion 85 .

Further, a resin-made curtain plate decoration 87 is attached to the lower side frame-constituting portion 11b. A rib 88 protruding upward is integrally formed in the inner part of the upper surface of the curtain plate decoration 87 . This makes it difficult for a gap to be formed with the inner frame 12 .

As shown in FIG. 3, the opening/closing axis of the inner frame 12 is set vertically along the left side of the pachinko machine 10 when viewed from the front, and the inner frame 12 can be opened forward with this opening/closing axis as the axis. It has become. The inner frame 12 is mainly composed of a resin base 38 having a rectangular outer shape, and a substantially elliptical window hole 39 is formed in the central portion of the resin base 38 .

A front frame set 14 is attached to the front side of the inner frame 12 so that it can be opened and closed. As with the inner frame 12, the front frame set 14 can be opened forward with an opening/closing axis set along the top and bottom on the left side of the pachinko machine 10 as viewed from the front. Note that the front frame set 14 may be configured to be directly supported by the outer frame 11 instead of via the inner frame 12 so as to be openable.

The front frame set 14 has a rectangular outer shape like the inner frame 12, and covers substantially the entire front side of the inner frame 12 in the closed state. A substantially elliptical window portion 101 is formed in the central portion of the front frame set 14 . Thereby, the game board 30 (game area) attached to the rear surface of the inner frame 12 can be visually recognized from the outside through the window portion 101 of the front frame set 14 and the window hole 39 of the inner frame 12 . A detailed configuration of the game board 30 will be described later.

As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, on the front side of the front frame set 14, a lower tray 15 is provided as a ball receiving tray at the center of the lower portion thereof. can be stored inside. Further, on the front side of the lower tray 15, a ball extracting lever 25 for ejecting game balls from the inside of the lower tray 15 is provided.

A game ball shooting handle (hereinafter referred to as "handle 18") is provided on the right side of the lower plate 15 and protrudes forward. The handle 18 is provided with a touch sensor (not shown) and an operation amount detection means (variable resistor) (not shown) for detecting an operation amount of an operation portion of the handle 18 . Then, when the handle 18 is rotated clockwise, a game ball is shot by a shooting device 60 as a shooting means, which will be described later, with a force corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. Also, the handle 18 is provided with a firing prohibition button 18a that can be pressed with the thumb of the right hand holding the handle 18. As shown in FIG. When the shooting prohibition button 18a is pressed, shooting of game balls by the shooting device 60 is prohibited even if the handle 18 is gripped. Therefore, it is possible to rotate the handle 18 while prohibiting the shooting of the game ball, or temporarily stop shooting the game ball while gripping the handle 18.例文帳に追加

An upper plate 19 is provided above the lower plate 15 . The upper plate 19 is a ball receiver that temporarily stores game balls and guides them toward a launching device 60 to be described later while aligning them in a row. When the upper tray 19 is filled with game balls, the game balls to be paid out are guided to the lower tray 15 via a lower tray communication passage 71 and a discharge port 16, which will be described later.

A ball lending button 121 and a returning button 122 are provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 19. - 特許庁As a result, when the ball lending button 121 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10 in a game hall or the like, the ball lending button 121 is operated. A rented ball is supplied to the upper tray 19 . On the other hand, the return button 122 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. However, the ball lending button 121 and return button 122 are unnecessary in a pachinko machine in which game balls are directly lent to the upper tray 19 from a ball lending device or the like without going through the card unit, that is, a so-called cash machine.

Furthermore, a ball removal button 123 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 19 . By pressing the ball removal button 123, a communication hole (not shown) provided on the downstream side of the ball guide path of the upper tray 19 and communicating with the lower tray 15 is opened and stored in the upper tray 19. The game ball is guided (dropped) to the lower tray 15. - 特許庁That is, the player can move the game ball on the upper tray 19 to the lower tray 15 at any time by operating the ball removal button 123 .

In addition, a production button 125 with a built-in LED and a cross button 126 are provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 19, and by pressing the production button 125 and the cross button 126, a decorative pattern display device 42, etc., which will be described later, are displayed. , the corresponding production is performed, or the content of the production is changed.

Further, the front face of the front frame set 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around it. These light emitting means play a role of increasing the performance effect during the game by changing and controlling the light emitting mode in accordance with the change of the game state or the like. For example, on the periphery of the window portion 101, an annular illumination portion 102 containing light emitting means such as an LED is provided. In addition, error display lamps 104 are provided on both sides of the ring-shaped decorative portion 102 to light up in the event of a predetermined error. A large number of fine through-holes are formed in the annular illumination portion 102 above each error display lamp 104 corresponding to the speaker SP (see FIG. 3) provided on the back surface of the front frame set 14. .

A glass unit 137 is attached to the rear side of the front frame set 14 . The glass unit 137 is not a conventional front and rear pair of rectangular plate glasses that are attached separately as a front and rear pair, but is formed in a round shape as a whole and attached after being assembled.

Next, the inner frame 12 will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the game board 30 is attached to the inner frame 12 in contact with the back side of the resin base 38 on the rear side of the window hole 39 . Therefore, a substantially central portion of the front surface of the game board 30 is exposed to the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window hole 39 .

In addition, a launching device 60 and a launching rail 61 for guiding game balls immediately after being launched by the launching device 60 are attached to the lower front portion of the inner frame 12 (resin base 38), that is, below the window hole 39. there is In this embodiment, a solenoid type launcher is adopted as the launcher 60 . Furthermore, above the shooting device 60, a ball feeding device guides the game balls guided from the upper tray 19 one by one to the shooting position of the shooting device 60 by driving a built-in drive means (eg, solenoid). 63 are provided.

Next, the configuration of the game board 30 (game area) will be described with reference to FIG. The game board 30 includes a general winning port 31, a first variable winning device 32a, a second variable winning device 32b, a first starting winning device 33a, a second starting winning device 33b, a through gate 34, a variable display unit 35, a variable A first special display device 43L and a second special display device 43R as display means, a change specific lamp 40, and the like are provided. As is well known, when a game ball enters (wins a prize) in various winning openings such as the general winning opening 31, variable winning devices 32a, 32b, starting winning devices 33a, 33b, it is detected by various detection switches, and is detected by the upper tray 19 or the lower tray. A predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the plate 15.例文帳に追加

In this embodiment, 10 balls enter the general winning hole 31, 14 balls enter the first variable winning device 32a, and 14 balls enter the second variable winning device 32b. 13 if there are balls, 2 if there is a ball entering the first starting prize winning device 33a, and 1 if there is a ball entering the second starting prize winning device 33b. is configured to be paid out. In addition, even if a game ball passes through a through gate 34 through which the game ball does not enter (it is not discharged to the back side of the game board 30), the game ball is not paid out.

In addition, the game board 30 is provided with an out port 36 corresponding to the lowest part of the game area, and game balls that do not win various prize winning ports such as the general winning port 31 exit this out port 36. It passes through and is discharged outside the game area. The game board 30 is also provided with a large number of nails for appropriately distributing and adjusting the falling direction of game balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills.

A variable display device unit 35 is arranged in substantially the center of the game area. A center frame 47 is arranged in the variable display device unit 35 so as to surround a decorative design display device 42 which will be described later.

A ball entrance 151 is provided on the left side of the center frame 47, and a game ball that enters the ball entrance 151 passes through a warp flow path 152 formed inside the center frame 47 and passes through a decorative pattern. It is guided onto a stage 153 formed below the display device 42 . The game ball guided onto the stage 153 rolls on the stage 153, and falls from the stage 153 to the front game area, or extends back and forth formed in the center of the stage 153 and hits the game ball. It may drop into the lead-out groove 154 that guides forward.

Below the variable display device unit 35, a first starting winning device 33a is arranged. The first starting prize winning device 33a protrudes forward from the front portion of the game board 30, and has a prize winning port open above which game balls can always win prizes. In particular, the game ball guided to the lead-out groove 154 of the stage 153 is configured to enter the first start winning device 33a with a relatively high probability. The first start-up winning device 33a of the present embodiment is not provided with an opening/closing member that changes the ease with which a game ball enters the first start-up winning device 33a.

A first variable winning device 32a is arranged below the first start-up winning device 33a. The first variable winning device 32a is normally in a closed state in which a game ball cannot win a prize, and is in an open state in which a game ball can win a prize in the event of a jackpot state of the corresponding type. Although not shown, the first variable winning device 32a includes a big winning opening leading to the rear of the game board 30, a big winning shutter for opening and closing the big winning opening, and a big winning shutter for operating the big winning shutter. Equipped with an opening solenoid and a first count switch 223a for detecting a game ball entering the big winning opening, the first variable winning device controls driving of the big winning opening solenoid to open and close the big winning shutter. 32a (big prize winning opening) is switched between a closed state and an open state.

Hereinafter, for convenience, the area located on the left side of the variable display unit 35 will be referred to as the "left area", and the area located on the right side of the variable display unit 35 will be referred to as the "right area".

In the lower portion of the left side area, a general prize winning opening 31 is arranged along the peripheral edge of the game area (the inner rail forming portion 51). The general prize winning port 31 protrudes forward from the front surface of the game board 30, and a winning port in which game balls can always win is opened on the upper side thereof.

A through gate 34 is arranged in the right region. The through gate 34 is configured so that game balls flowing down the game area can pass one by one. The through gate 34 has a through gate switch 225 capable of detecting a game ball passing through the through gate 34, which will be described later in detail.

Furthermore, a second starting winning device 33b is arranged downstream of the through gate 34 in the right side area. The second starting prize winning device 33b is provided with a pair of rotatably displaceable blade members 37 adjacent to the left and right sides of the winning opening (start winning opening) of the second starting prize winning device 33b into which game balls can enter. there is

In addition, when the game ball is detected by the through gate switch 225, the entry ball support lottery is performed as to whether or not the second start winning device 33b is opened, and the normal symbol display device 41 enters the entry. A variable display is provided to teach the result of the ball support lottery. Then, when winning the ball-entering support lottery, the second starting prize-winning device 33b is opened for a specified time after the end of the variable display.

Incidentally, in this embodiment, the game nail is arranged at a position directly above the starting winning opening of the second starting winning device 33b, and when the blade member 37 is in a closed posture extending vertically, the game There is no room for the game ball to pass between the nail and the blade member 37, and the second start winning device 33b is in a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter the start winning opening. On the other hand, when the blade member 37 changes to the open posture in which it opens outward, the second start winning device 33b becomes an open state in which the game ball can enter the start winning opening.

Further, a second variable winning device 32b is arranged downstream of the second start-up winning device 33b. The second variable winning device 32b is normally in a closed state in which a game ball cannot win a prize, and is in an open state in which a game ball can win a prize in the case of a jackpot state of the corresponding type. Although not shown, the second variable winning device 32b includes a big winning opening leading to the rear of the game board 30, a big winning shutter for opening and closing the big winning opening, and a big winning shutter for operating the big winning shutter. Equipped with an opening solenoid and a second count switch 223b for detecting a game ball entering the big winning opening, the second variable winning device controls driving of the big winning opening solenoid and opens and closes the big winning shutter. 32b (large prize winning opening) is switched between a closed state and an open state.

The first and second variable prize winning devices 32a and 32b of the present embodiment are pivotally supported along the lower edge of the big winning opening so that the lower edge of the big winning shutter is rotatable along the lower edge of the big winning opening. , When the first and second variable winning devices 32a and 32b are closed, the big winning shutter extends vertically to close the big winning opening, and a game ball can pass in front of the big winning shutter. On the other hand, when the first and second variable prize winning devices 32a and 32b are open, the big prize winning shutter rotates forward and extends back and forth (the upper surface is slightly downwardly slanted toward the rear), opening the big prize winning opening. A game ball flowing forward is received by the rear surface (upper surface) of the big winning shutter and guided to the big winning opening.

In addition, directly above the second start-up winning device 33b of the present embodiment, an assist winning opening 48 into which a game ball moving in the game area can enter is provided. When a game ball is detected by an assist winning detection switch 227 that counts the game balls entering the assist winning opening 48, three game balls are paid out to the upper tray 19 or the lower tray 15.例文帳に追加

Although details will be described later, the first start-up winning device 33a and the second start-up winning device 33b include a first start-up winning switch 224a and a second start-up winning switch 224a as condition establishment detection means for detecting a winning game ball, respectively. 224b is provided, and when a game ball is detected by the start winning switch 224a, 224b, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to generate a big hit state, etc., and a special display device 43L, which will be described later, 43R (and the decorative pattern display device 42) is configured to perform a variable display. Then, when winning the lottery, a big hit state or the like in which the first variable prize winning device 32a or the second variable prize winning device 32b is opened is provided.

In the present embodiment, there are a "low probability state" in which a jackpot is won with a predetermined probability in a lottery, and a "high probability state" in which a jackpot is won with a higher probability than the low probability state in the lottery. Furthermore, the blade member 37 of the second start-up winning device 33b is opened relatively frequently, making it easier to enter the game ball into the second start-up winning device 33b. There is a "low ball entry state" in which it is difficult to enter the game ball into the second start prize winning device 33b. Hereinafter, the state of low probability and low ball entry state will be referred to as "normal mode", and the state of low probability and high ball entry state will be referred to as "time reduction mode". A certain state is called "probability variable mode", and a state of high probability and low ball entry state is called "potential probability mode".

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the normal mode, the variable probability mode, and the latent probability mode are continued until the jackpot state occurs, whereas the time reduction mode is the special display device 43L, even if the jackpot state does not occur. 43R and the decorative pattern display device 42 are configured to end when the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times, and shift to the normal mode.

In the probability variable mode and the time reduction mode, the blade member 37 of the second start-up winning device 33b is opened relatively frequently to make it easier to enter, while the first start-up winning device 33a does not enter. Since it does not become easier, the player shoots the game ball toward the right side area (so-called “right hitting”) when the variable probability mode or the time shortening mode is entered. In addition, at the timing of right-handed hitting, an announcement prompting right-handed hitting is made on the decorative symbol display device 42 or the like.

In the present embodiment, the first starting winning device 33a (so-called "navel") is won in the winning lottery performed when the game ball enters, and the second starting winning device 33b (so-called "electronic tulip , Electric Chew"), the type of hit given changes depending on whether it is won in the winning lottery that is held when the game ball enters different tables).

More specifically, the types of jackpots in the case of winning the jackpot state based on the ball entering the first start prize winning device 33a are 16 rounds variable jackpot (hereinafter referred to as "16RS") and 8 rounds variable jackpot ( hereinafter referred to as "8RS"), an 8-round normal jackpot (hereinafter referred to as "8RN"), and a 2-round probability variable jackpot (hereinafter referred to as "2RS"). Regarding "16RS", "8RS", and "8RN", the first variable prize winning device 32a is opened for 30 seconds, or the first variable prize winning device 32a is opened and the first variable prize winning device 32a has 8 Assuming that a game ball enters as one round, ``16RS'' is repeated 16 times, and ``8RS'' and ``8RN'' are repeated 8 times, after which the jackpot state ends. . On the other hand, with respect to "2RS", one round consists of opening the first variable prize winning device 32a for 0.4 seconds, and after this is repeated twice, the jackpot state ends. That is, although "16RS", "8RS", and "8RN" are jackpots in which a large increase in the number of game balls can be expected during the jackpot state (so-called "jackpot with ball output"), "2RS" is a game ball. It is a jackpot (so-called “no ball jackpot”) that cannot be expected to increase significantly.

In addition, after the jackpot state of ``16RS'' and ``8RS'' ends, a ``probability variable mode'' is given, after the jackpot state of ``2RS'' ends, a ``potential probability mode'' is given, and after the jackpot state of ``8RN'' ends. A "time reduction mode" (in this example, 90 times of variable display) is provided. In other words, after the jackpot state of "16RS", "8RS", and "8RN" is completed, the second starting prize winning device 33b is likely to be in the open state, so that the player moves toward the right side area and plays the game. A ball will be launched. In the present embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the winning lottery based on the ball entering the first starting prize winning device 33a, the rate is "16RS" at a rate of 5%, "8RS" at a rate of 55%, and "8RS" at a rate of 30%. becomes "8RN" at a rate of 10%, and becomes "2RS" at a rate of 10%.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, there is a case where a "small win" is won in a winning lottery based on the ball entering the first starting prize winning device 33a. In the winning lottery based on the ball entering the first starting prize winning device 33a, when a small hit is made, the first variable prize winning device 32a is opened for 0.4 seconds as one round, which is repeated twice. , the small winning state ends. That is, regarding the first variable winning device 32a, the appearance is the same as "2RS". However, the game mode does not change between before and after the occurrence of the small winning state. In other words, when "2RS" is won in the normal mode, the mode shifts to the probability mode, but even if a small win is won, the normal mode is continued. As a result, in the lottery based on the ball entering the first starting prize winning device 33a, the first variable prize winning is not performed such that a two-round jackpot (two-round normal jackpot) to which a high probability state is not awarded is won. It is possible to avoid a situation in which the apparatus 32a is opened twice in a short period of time, inevitably resulting in a transition to a high-probability state.

On the other hand, the types of jackpots in the case of winning the jackpot state based on the ball entering the second start prize winning device 33b are: 16-round variable variable jackpot, 8-round variable variable jackpot, and 2-round normal jackpot (hereinafter “2RN”). say). In addition, in the case of winning the winning lottery based on the ball entering the second starting prize winning device 33b, the second variable prize winning device 32b is opened instead of the first variable prize winning device 32a (in this example, the round ends). Although the conditions are the same, the number of payouts (14 and 13) when game balls enter the variable winning devices 32a and 32b are different), but for convenience of explanation, the second starting winning device 33b For convenience, the same names (“16RS” and “8RS”) will be used for the types of jackpots in the case of winning a lottery based on the number of balls entered. In addition, in the present embodiment, the condition for ending the round in the jackpot state in which the first variable prize winning device 32a is open is the same as the round end condition in the jackpot state in which the second variable prize winning device 32b is in the open state. There is one (eight wins, or one round after 30 seconds have passed), but it may be different (for example, the upper limit of wins for game balls during a round is 8 and 9).

In addition, regarding "2RS", one round is defined as opening the second variable winning device 32b for 0.4 seconds, and after that is repeated twice, the jackpot state ends. In other words, with respect to "16RS" and "8RS", a large increase in the number of game balls can be expected during the big win state, but "2RN" is a big win in which a large increase in the number of game balls cannot be expected.

Also, after the end of the "2RN" jackpot state, a "time reduction mode" is provided. In this example, "2RN" is also divided into three, "2RN30" to which the time reduction mode for 30 variable displays is provided, "2RN60" to which the time reduction mode for 60 variable displays is provided, and variable There is "2RN90" which gives a time reduction mode for 90 displays. In the present embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the winning lottery based on the ball entering the second starting prize winning device 33b, the rate is "16RS" at a rate of 35%, "8RS" at a rate of 35%, and "8RS" at a rate of 20%. becomes "2RN30" at a rate of 5%, "2RN60" at a rate of 5%, and "2RN90" at a rate of 5%.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, there is a case where a small win is won in a winning lottery based on the ball entering the second starting prize winning device 33b. In the winning lottery based on the ball entering the second starting prize winning device 33b, when a small hit is made, the second variable prize winning device 32b is opened for 0.4 seconds as one round, which is repeated twice. , the small winning state ends. That is, regarding the second variable winning device 32b, the appearance is the same as "2RN". However, the game mode does not change between before and after the occurrence of the small winning state. That is, high-probability state such as probability mode basically shifts to a low-probability state (time reduction mode, etc.) by winning "2RN", but even if you win a small hit in probability mode, Mode continues. As a result, the second variable winning device 32b is opened twice for a short period of time without performing a sorting to win the 2nd round probability variable jackpot "2RS" in the lottery based on the ball entering the second starting prize winning device 33b. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which it is known that the state has shifted to the low probability state without fail.

In addition, the first special display device 43L that teaches the result of the winning lottery based on the ball entering the first starting winning device 33a, and the second teaching the result of the winning lottery based on the ball entering the second starting winning device 33b The 2 special display devices 43R are composed of two segment display devices, respectively, and are configured to be able to display symbols, characters, numbers, and the like as special symbols. The special display devices 43L and 43R are installed at positions visible to the player (in this example, positions at the bottom left of the game area where game balls cannot pass).

Then, when the game ball enters the first starting prize winning device 33a, the first special display device 43L performs switching display (variable display) of the special symbol, and the game ball enters the second starting prize winning device 33b. Triggered by the entry of a ball, the second special display device 43R is configured to perform switching display (variable display) of special symbols. The display contents of the special display devices 43L and 43R are directly controlled by a main control device 261 as main control means, which will be described later.

In addition, after the variable display of the special symbols is performed on the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R, the result of the lottery, that is, "jackpot", " It is definitely displayed that it is a "minor win" or "loss". For example, when a game ball enters the first starting prize winning device 33a, the special pattern (combination of segments to be lit) is switched at high speed (for example, every 4 msec) on the corresponding first special display device 43L (variable display). ), and when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, one of the special symbols is stopped and displayed (for example, stopped for several seconds). Then, for example, when a "big win" is won in the winning lottery, the corresponding special symbols are displayed when the variation is stopped, and a big win state occurs.

Furthermore, in the special display devices 43L and 43R, the type of the jackpot, that is, any of "16RS", "8RS", "8RN", "2RS" and "2RN" is taught by the special symbols to be stopped. be. Moreover, there are not one but a plurality of stopping modes of the special display devices 43L and 43R for teaching one jackpot type, and one of them is selected and stopped. In addition, when either the first special display device 43L or the second special display device 43R performs the variable display or the determined display, the other is turned off ("-" is displayed). may be set), and if neither the variable display nor the fixed display is performed, "-" is displayed in both.

In addition, the variable display device unit 35 includes a normal symbol display device 41 (located above the stage 153 of the center frame 47) that variably displays when the through gate 34 is passed, and first and second special display devices 43L and 43R. A decorative pattern display device 42 is provided for performing variable display in accordance with the variable display.

The decorative pattern display device 42 is composed of a liquid crystal display device, and is configured to be able to variably display decorative patterns as identification information. The display contents of the decorative pattern display device 42 are controlled by a sub-control device 262 and a display control device 45, which will be described later. That is, in the decorative pattern display device 42, based on the command from the main control device 261, the sub-control device 262 assists so as to correspond to the results displayed on the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R. Display content is determined, and display is performed by the display control device 45 based on the determination.

The decorative pattern display device 42 is provided with, for example, three left, middle, and right pattern display regions (left pattern display region 401, middle pattern display region 402, right pattern display region 403; see FIG. 45). In the display areas 401, 402, 403, a plurality of types of decorative patterns (for example, numerical patterns with numbers 1 to 9) are sequentially displayed (variably displayed), and then sequentially (for example, left The decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the order of symbol display area 401→right symbol display area 403→middle symbol display area 402). For example, when the main controller 261 confirms the occurrence of the big win, the first or second special display devices 43L and 43R display corresponding to the big win, and the decorative pattern display device 42 shows the big win. (for example, the left symbol display area 401, the middle symbol display area 402, and the right symbol display area 403 are stopped and displayed so that the same decorative symbols are lined up), and the jackpot state is started. be. Of the left symbol display area, the middle symbol display area, and the right symbol display area, basically, the left symbol display area in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed first is referred to as the "first symbol display area." , the right symbol display area in which the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed is also called a "second symbol display area", and the middle symbol display area in which the last decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. is also referred to as a "third symbol display area".

In addition, when the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination corresponding to the big win, as a preliminary step, for example, the same decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 401 and the right symbol display area 403. Become. The state in which the same symbol is stopped and displayed on a predetermined effective line in the left symbol display area 401 and the right symbol display area 403 and the variable display is still performed in the middle symbol display area 402 is the ready-to-win state. be. Of course, the occurrence of the reach state does not necessarily mean that the jackpot will be won, and there are cases where the win is lost.

In this embodiment, after the ready-to-win state occurs, in the middle symbol display area 402, the same decorative symbol (ready-to-win symbol) stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 401 and the right symbol display area 403 is displayed on the same effective line. When it is stopped (when Zoro is stopped), a jackpot state is given. In addition, in the case of an odd number of cohorts, "16RS" or "8RS" is generated, and in the case of an even number of cohorts, either "16RS", "8RS" or "8RN" is generated.

The combination of decorative patterns other than doublet basically teaches "missing", but in this embodiment, even if the big hit is "2RS", "2RN", the decorative patterns are doublets. It is not stopped by the combination, but is stopped by the combination in which the ready-to-win symbols are not displayed. In addition, the "minor win" is also stop-displayed with a combination of the ready-to-win symbols but the missing symbols.

In addition, in this embodiment, a plurality of performance stages are prepared in the decorative pattern display device 42 as a performance for teaching or suggesting the game mode in which the player is staying. More specifically, a "variable stage" that confirms that you are staying in the variable mode, a "normal stage" that confirms that you are staying in the normal mode, and either the variable mode or the time reduction mode. There is a "pull-back stage" in which the player stays, and a "premonition stage" in which the player stays in either the normal mode or the latent mode.

For example, when "2RN" is won in the variable probability stage and the variable probability mode ends, or when "small win" is won, the variable probability stage ends and the pullback stage is displayed. Then, when "2RN" is won and the given period of time reduction mode ends, the pullback stage ends and the normal stage is displayed. Further, when the "small hit" is won, the game mode remains in the variable probability mode since there is no change in the game mode before and after the "small hit". Therefore, although it shifts to the pullback stage, it is easy to win big, and furthermore, when the period corresponding to the maximum of the time reduction mode (30 times, 60 times, or 90 times of variable display of special symbols) is exceeded, It is possible to grasp that it is a probability change mode.

In addition, in the case of winning a jackpot in the lottery performed based on the ball entering the second starting prize winning device 33b, only "16RS" and "8RS" are displayed as the jackpot types displayed on the decorative pattern display device 42. do not have. For this reason, basically (except when the variable display corresponding to the ball entered into the first start winning device 33a that has been withheld is extinguished), in the variable probability stage and the pullback stage, that is, in the variable probability mode and the time reduction mode , When a jackpot is instructed in the decorative symbol display device 42 with double eyes, the provision of the probability variable mode is confirmed, and after the jackpot state, the game shifts to the probability variable stage.

Further, for example, when "2RS" is won in the normal stage and the game shifts to the latent probability mode, or when the "small hit" is won, the normal stage ends and the sign stage is displayed. In this embodiment, when the "small hit" is the transition opportunity, that is, when staying in the normal mode, this sign stage is a period of about 10 to 50 times with a variable display of special symbols. After being derived in , it returns to the normal stage. On the other hand, when "2RS" is the transition opportunity, that is, when staying in the latent probability mode, basically it is a premonition stage until a big hit. In addition, a lottery may be conducted to determine whether to return to the normal stage from the omen stage, or after returning from the omen stage to the normal stage, a lottery may be drawn to determine whether to move to the omen stage again (in the case of latent mode, It is desirable to increase the probability of returning to the precursor stage, or to win only in the latent probability mode). In addition, when "8RN" is won in the winning lottery based on the ball entering the first starting prize winning device 33a, and "8RS" is won, the probability variable mode is given until the end of the jackpot state. If it is not taught, after the jackpot state ends, the stage shifts to the pullback stage.

In addition, as described above, when the correspondence between the special symbol stop mode in the special display devices 43L and 43R and the jackpot type is grasped, if the stop mode of the special symbol variation display is confirmed, It is possible to determine which type of jackpot has been won.

In addition, when a game ball newly enters the first or second start winning device 33a, 33b during the variable display of the first or second special display device 43L, 43R, the variable display for that It is configured to be performed after the end of the variable display that is being performed at the time. That is, the variable display is put on standby (suspended). The maximum number of times the variable display is suspended is determined for each pachinko machine model. Up to four variable displays (a total of eight variable displays) are reserved for each game ball.

Furthermore, the pending number of the variable display (hereinafter referred to as "first variable display") based on the entry of the game ball into the first start winning device 33a is arranged immediately above the first special display device 43L, The number of holdings of the variable display (hereinafter referred to as "second variable display") that is lit and displayed by the first holding lamp 46a that can emit blue light and is based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting prize winning device 33b is It is arranged directly above the second special display device 43R and is illuminated by a second reservation lamp 46b capable of emitting red light. The holding lamps 46a and 46b are provided with four each, which is the same as the maximum holding number of the first variable display and the second variable display. Light. Display contents of the holding lamps 46a and 46b are controlled by a sub-control device 262 as a sub-control means to be described later. In addition, when the game ball newly wins the starting winning devices 33a and 33b during the jackpot state, the variable display for that amount is also suspended.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the fact that the variable display performed based on the entry of the game ball into the starting winning devices 33a and 33b is suspended (that the right to execute the variable display is obtained) is the decorative symbol. The display device 42 is also designed to teach. As will be described later in detail, as shown in FIG. 45, a suspended icon 411 indicating that variable display is suspended is displayed in the lower left portion of the decorative design display device 42 (suspended display area 405). A maximum of four pending icons 411 are displayed, and the icons on the left are executed sequentially. In other words, with respect to the function of "holding the variable display", as described above, a total of eight variable displays can be held, four corresponding to each of the first start winning device 33a and the second start winning device 33b. However, in the decorative pattern display device 42, up to four pending icons 411 are displayed corresponding to the one to be digested first. It should be noted that the hold icon 411 does not have information as to whether the hold icon 411 corresponds to the first variable display or the second variable display. None.

It should be noted that the suspended variable displays are basically digested in the order they were suspended, but if both the first variable display and the second variable display are suspended (hold lamp 46b are lit by one or more), the second variable display is preferentially extinguished. That is, unless the second variable display triggered by the winning of the second starting prize-winning device 33b is completely extinguished, the first variable display triggered by the winning of the ball to the first starting prize-winning device 33a is performed. There is no configuration. For example, in a state in which one first holding lamp 46a is lit, when a game ball enters the second start winning device 33b and one second holding lamp 46b is lit, the first variable display is postponed and the second variable display is performed first.

Also, in the variable display device unit 35 of the present embodiment (in this example, the position above the stage 153 of the center frame 47), the variable display performed by the decorative pattern display device 42 is the first starting winning device 33a, and A variation specifying lamp 40 is provided to indicate which one of the second starting prize winning devices 33b corresponds to the winning ball (either the first variation display or the second variation display). The variation specific lamp 40 includes an LED whose emission color is blue and an LED whose emission color is red. It emits red light when displaying.

The normal symbol display device 41 is configured to be able to light up and display "○" or "X" as a normal symbol, and when the game ball passes through the through gate 34, for example, the normal symbol is changed from "○" to "X". →“○”→・・・and switch display (variation display) at high speed. Then, when the variable display stops for a few seconds at the "O" symbol (winning symbol), the second starting winning device 33b (wing member 37) is opened for a predetermined period of time. Display contents of the normal symbol display device 41 are directly controlled by a main control device 261 which will be described later.

Further, when a game ball newly passes through the through gate 34 during the variable display of the normal symbols on the normal symbol display device 41, the variable display for that amount is performed after the end of the variable display being performed at that time. It is configured to be done. That is, the variable display is put on standby (suspended). The maximum number of times of variable display of normal symbols to be suspended is determined for each pachinko machine model, but is suspended up to four times in this embodiment. In addition, the number of suspensions of variable display of normal symbols is arranged in the variable display device unit 35, and is illuminated by a suspension lamp 44 capable of emitting white light. The suspension lamps 44 are provided with four each, which is the same as the maximum number of suspensions of the variation display of normal symbols, and are lit by the same number as the number of suspension variation displays.

In addition, as a high ball entry state, for example, (1) a state in which the fluctuation display time in the normal symbol display device 41 is shorter than that in the low ball entry state, (2) a single opening time of the second start winning device 33b ( (3) a state in which the prescribed number of game balls that can be entered per opening of the second starting prize winning device 33b is greater than in the low ball entry state; (4) A state in which the number of times the second starting prize winning device 33b is opened per winning of the ball-entering support lottery is greater than in the low-ball-entering state; It is also possible to raise the level of The high ball entry state in this embodiment employs the configurations (1), (2), and (5) above. Of course, without being limited to this, any one of the configurations (1) to (5) or any combination of the configurations (1) to (5) may be adopted as the “high support mode”. As a result, the game balls are likely to frequently win prizes in the second starting prize winning device 33b, the number of times the winning lottery is executed increases, and the decrease in the number of balls possessed by the player is suppressed, resulting in a good ball holding state. .

In addition, the game board 30 is provided with a rail 50 which is composed of an inner rail forming part 51 and an outer rail forming part 52 and guides the game ball shot from the shooting device 60 to the upper part of the game board 30 . As a result, the game ball shot with the rotating operation of the handle 18 is guided into the game area formed between the game board 30 and the glass unit 137 through the shooting rails 61 and 50 .

A return ball preventing member 53 is attached to the tip portion (upper left portion in FIG. 4) of the inner rail constituting portion 51 . As a result, the game ball once guided from the rail 50 to the game area is prevented from returning into the rail 50 again. Further, a return rubber 54 is attached to substantially the tip portion (upper right portion in FIG. 4) of the outer rail constituting portion 52 . A game ball shot with a force greater than or equal to a predetermined amount hits the return rubber 54 and is returned to, for example, the substantially central portion side of the game board 30 .

Further, in the present embodiment, the outer rail forming part 52 ends at the upper right part of the game board 30 and the inner rail forming part 51 ends at the lower right part of the game board 30 . Therefore, the play area is defined by the rails 50 and the inner peripheral surfaces of the window holes 39 of the resin base 38 . However, since the game ball hit by the shooting device 60 may flow backward on the rail 50 until it passes the return ball prevention member 53, the parallel parts of the inner and outer rail constituent parts 51 and 52 are excluded from the game area. be killed.

As shown in FIG. 3 , a ball passage unit 70 is provided on the rear side of the front frame set 14 below the window portion 101 . The ball passage unit 70 includes a lower tray communication path 71 that connects the payout mechanism 352 to the outlet 16 of the lower tray 15 and an upper tray communication path 73 that connects the payout mechanism 352 to the upper tray 19 . In addition, there is a gap of a predetermined interval between the launch rail 61 provided on the front side of the inner frame 12 and the rail 50 (outer rail constituting portion 52), and the ball passage unit 70 of the front frame set 14 has the above-mentioned A foul ball passage 72 is formed to guide the game ball dropped from the gap to the lower tray 15.例文帳に追加As a result, if a game ball shot from the shooting device 60 does not reach the return-ball prevention member 53 and travels back along the rail 50 as a foul ball, the foul ball passes through the foul ball passage 72 to the lower tray 15. Ejected.

Reference numeral 67 in FIGS. 3 and 4 denotes a payout passage for guiding game balls paid out by a payout mechanism 352, which will be described later, to the front of the inner frame 12. The upper tray communication passage 73 (upper tray 19) and a passage leading to the lower tray communication passage 71 (lower tray 15). A shutter 68 is provided below the payout passage 67, and when the front frame set 14 is opened, the shutter 68 protrudes forward due to the biasing force of a spring or the like, and nearly closes the outlet of the payout passage 67. ing. Further, when the front frame set 14 is closed, the shutter 68 is pushed open by the inlet-side rear end of the lower tray communication passage 71 . The inlets (ball inlets) of the lower tray communicating path 71 and the upper tray communicating path 73 are adjacent to each other, and the inlets and the dispensing path 67 are separated by a predetermined distance when the front frame set 14 is closed, A game ball can pass through the gap between the two. Therefore, when the upper tray 19 and the upper tray communication path 73 are filled with game balls, the game balls to be paid out flow to the lower tray communication path 71 side (overflow to the entrance side of the lower tray communication path 71), and the lower tray connection It will be dispensed to the lower tray 15 through the passage 71 .

In addition, the ball passage unit 70 is provided with a full detection switch (not shown) for detecting game balls positioned in the lower tray communication passage 71 . Due to the presence of the full detection switch, it is grasped that the lower tray 15 is full of game balls (that the lower tray 15 is full of game balls and that the game balls are staying in the lower tray communication passage 71). be able to. In this embodiment, based on the detection of game balls continuously for a predetermined period of time by the full detection switch, an error notification is provided to teach that the lower tray 15 is full by using the display or sound on the decorative pattern display device 42. is controlled. In addition, when the retention of the game ball in the lower tray communication passage 71 is eliminated and the game ball is no longer detected by the full detection switch (when the game ball is no longer detected continuously for a predetermined time), the error notification state is canceled.

Next, the rear configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 and 6. FIG. On the back of the pachinko machine 10, various control boards are arranged vertically and horizontally, and some of them are arranged so as to be overlapped in the front and back, and a game ball supply device (payout mechanism) for supplying game balls. and a resin protective cover, etc. are attached. Since the dispensing mechanism and the protective cover are integrated as one unit, and the resin portion is generally called the back pack, the unit is called "back pack unit 203" here.

First, the rear configuration of the game board 30 will be described. As shown in FIG. 6, on the rear side of the variable display device unit 35 (see FIG. 4) disposed corresponding to the through hole in the center of the game board 30, a resin frame cover covering the center frame 47 from behind is provided. 213 is provided so as to protrude rearward. In addition, on the rear side of the frame cover 213, the decorative pattern display device 42, which is a liquid crystal display device facing forward from the opening of the frame cover 213, the display control device 45, and the sub-control device 262 can be attached and detached in a stacked state. attached to the

The decorative pattern display device 42 is housed in a storage box 42a having an opening for exposing the display portion (liquid crystal screen) of the decorative pattern display device 42 to the front side of the pachinko machine 10, and is attached to the rear surface of the frame cover 213. fixed on the side. The display control device 45 is housed in a substrate box 45a and fixed to the back side of the decorative pattern display device 42 (housing box 42a). The sub-controller 262 is accommodated in a substrate box 262a and fixed to the rear side of the display control device 45 (substrate box 45a). An LED control board or the like for driving the LED or the like built in the center frame 47 is arranged inside the frame cover 213 . The storage box 42a and the substrate boxes 45a and 262a are made of a transparent resin material or the like so that the inside can be visually recognized.

Below the frame cover 213, a back frame set 215 is attached to the game board 30 so as to cover the general winning port 31, the variable winning device 32, the starting winning device 33 and the like from behind. The back frame set 215 is provided with a ball recovery mechanism (not shown) for recovering game balls that have entered various winning slots. The game balls collected by this ball collecting mechanism are guided to a discharge passage portion 217 which will be described later, and discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 from a discharge chute of the discharge passage portion 217 .

Also, in this embodiment, the back frame set 215 functions as a mounting base for the main controller 261 . More specifically, a substrate box 263 in which a main controller 261 is mounted is rotatably pivoted to the back frame set 215 and can be opened rearward.

The main controller 261 is housed in a substrate box 263 made of transparent resin material or the like. The board box 263 includes a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and these box base and box cover are connected by a sealing member. The board box 263 connected by the sealing member is configured so that it cannot be opened unless a predetermined trace is left. As a result, it is possible to easily discover that the board box 263 has been illegally opened.

In addition, the game board 30 is provided with ball entry detection switches for detecting game balls that have entered the various prize winning openings corresponding to the various winning openings such as the general winning opening 31 and the like. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, a winning opening switch 221 is provided at a position corresponding to the general winning opening 31, and the first variable winning device 32a and the second variable winning device 32b have a first count switch. 223a and a second count switch 223b are provided, and an assist winning prize detecting switch 227 is provided in the assist winning opening 48. As shown in FIG. Further, the first start prize winning device 33a and the second start prize winning device 33b are provided with a first start prize winning switch 224a and a second start prize winning switch 224b. Furthermore, a through gate switch 225 is provided at a position corresponding to the through gate 34 .

Although not shown, the back frame set 215 includes a winning opening switch 221, a first counting switch 223a, a second counting switch 223b, an assist winning detection switch 227, a through gate switch 225, and a cable connector. A first board relay board is provided which is physically connected. This first board surface relay board relays the winning slot switch 221 and the like and the main controller 261, and is electrically connected to the main controller 261 via a cable connector. On the other hand, the first start-up prize switch 224a and the second start-up prize switch 224b are directly connected to the main controller 261 via a connector cable without passing through the relay board.

The detection results detected by the various incoming ball detection switches are taken into the main controller 261 . Then, a payout command (the number of game balls to be paid out) according to the winning situation of each time is transmitted from the main control device 261 to the payout control device 311, and based on the output signal from the payout control device 311, a predetermined number of game balls is sent. is paid out (except when detected by through gate switch 225).

In addition, although not shown, on the rear surface of the game board 30, a solenoid for opening a large winning opening is provided with a first variable winning device 32a and a second variable winning device 32b. A winning opening solenoid for opening and closing the blade member 37 is provided in the starting winning device 33b. The back frame set 215 is also provided with a second board relay board (not shown) that relays these solenoids and the main controller 261 .

Next, the configuration of the back pack unit 203 will be described. As shown in FIG. 5, the back pack unit 203 is formed by integrating a resin-molded back pack 351 and a game ball payout mechanism 352 . The back pack unit 203 is supported so as to be openable and closable with respect to the left side (the right side in FIG. 5) of the inner frame 12, and can be opened rearward about an opening/closing axis extending in the vertical direction. ing. In addition, an external terminal plate 240 is provided on the upper left portion of the back pack unit 203 (upper right portion in FIG. 5).

The external terminal board 240 is for relaying transmission of various kinds of information to a game hall computer or the like, and is provided with a plurality of external connection terminals. For the sake of convenience, no reference numerals are attached, but for example, a terminal for outputting information about the current game state (jackpot state, variable probability mode, etc.), the front frame set 14 and the inner frame detected by the open detection switches 91 and 92 described later A terminal for outputting information about the opening of 12, a terminal for outputting information about various error states such as ball entry error, lower tray full error, tank no ball error, payout error, prize paid out from payout control device 311 A terminal for outputting information about the number of balls is provided.

The back pack 351 is integrally formed of, for example, ABS resin, and has a protective cover portion 354 that protrudes rearward from the pachinko machine 10 and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. The protective cover portion 354 has a shape in which left and right side surfaces and an upper surface are closed and only a lower surface is opened, and has a size sufficient to cover at least the frame cover 213 . However, in this embodiment, the protective cover portion 354 is configured to cover the upper portion and the right portion (the left portion in FIG. 5) of the board box 263 as well. As a result, in the closed state of the back pack unit 203, the sealing member provided on the right side of the board box 263 and the terminal section (board side connector) provided along the upper edge of the main controller 261 are covered. It will happen.

The dispensing mechanism section 352 is arranged so as to bypass the protective cover section 354 . Namely, above the protective cover portion 354, a tank 355 which opens upward is provided, and the tank 355 is sequentially replenished with game balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall. Below the tank 355 is connected a tank rail 356 which has, for example, two rows of ball passages in the horizontal direction and is gently inclined toward the downstream side. Concatenated. A payout device 358 is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 357, and payout of the required number of game balls is appropriately performed by a predetermined electrical configuration such as a payout motor 358a. The game balls paid out from the payout device 358 are supplied to the upper tray 19 and the like.

In the payout mechanism section 352, a payout relay board 381 for relaying a payout command signal from the payout control device 311 to the payout device 358 is installed, and a power switch board 382 for taking in the main power supply from the outside is installed. there is The power switch board 382 is supplied with a main power supply of, for example, 24 V AC via a voltage converter, and is turned on or off by a switching operation of the power switch 382a.

Below the back pack unit 203 (board box 263), a lower frame set 251 that is pivotally supported by the left side (the right side in FIG. 5) of the inner frame 12 and that can be opened rearward is provided. As shown in FIG. 6, the lower frame set 251 is formed with a discharge passage portion 217 into which the game balls collected by the ball collection mechanism described above flow in. A discharge chute (not shown) for discharging the pachinko machine 10 to the outside is formed. In other words, the game balls that have won the prize-winning openings such as the general prize-winning opening 31 are collected via the ball recovery mechanism of the back frame set 215 and discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 through the discharge chute of the discharge passage portion 217 . Incidentally, the out port 36 is similarly connected to the discharge passage portion 217, and the game balls that do not win in any of the prize winning ports are also discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 through the discharge chute. In this embodiment, the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 are configured as separate bodies and can be opened and closed independently, but the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 are integrally formed. It is also possible to

In addition, as shown in FIG. 5, on the back side of the lower frame set 251, a payout control device 311, a firing control device 312, a power supply device 313, and a card unit connection board 314 are detachable in a state of being superimposed on each other. attached to the

The firing control device 312 and the power supply device 313 are housed in a board box 313 a and fixed to the back side of the lower frame set 251 . For the sake of convenience, the launch control device 312 and the power supply device 313 are described as independent control devices, but they are actually configured by one substrate (printed circuit board).

Also, the payout control device 311 is housed in the board box 311a and fixed to the back side of the board box 313a (the firing control device 312 and the power supply device 313). The board box 311a housing the payout control device 311 is provided with a sealing member in the same manner as the board box 263 housing the above-described main control device 261 so that a trace of the opening of the board box 311a remains. It's becoming

In addition, the card unit connection board 314 is housed in a board box 314a and fixed to the rear side of the board box 313a (the firing control device 312 and the power supply device 313). The board boxes 311a, 313a, and 314a are made of a transparent resin material or the like so that the inside can be visually recognized.

Also, the payout control device 311 is provided with a state return switch 321 projecting outward from the substrate box 311a. For example, when the state return switch 321 is pressed when a payout error such as a ball clogging occurs in the payout motor 358a, the payout motor 358a is rotated forward or reverse to clear the ball jam (return to the normal state).

Further, the power supply device 313 is provided with a RAM erase switch 323 projecting outward from the board box 313a. This pachinko machine 10 has a backup function, and even in the event of a power failure, it can retain the state at the time of the power failure, and can be restored to the state at the time of the power failure when recovering from the power failure (recovery of power). can. Therefore, when the power is turned off in a normal procedure (for example, when the game hall is closed), the state before the power is turned off is stored. to put in.

Further, as shown in FIG. 6, a locking device 600 is provided on the rear side of the right side portion of the inner frame 12 . The locking device 600 has a cylinder lock 700 (see FIG. 1, etc.) exposed on the front side of the front frame set 14. A key is inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder lock 700 and turned to one side to open the lock. The frame 12 can be unlocked, and the front frame set 14 can be unlocked by rotating it in the other direction. In this embodiment, inner frame 12 is locked to outer frame 11 and front frame set 14 is locked to inner frame 12 .

As described above, the right-side frame-constituting portion 11d of the outer frame 11 is formed with the extending wall portion 83 that covers the entire upper and lower sections corresponding to the locking device 600 from the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 5). reference). As a result, it becomes difficult to insert a wire or the like from the back side of the outer frame 11 and operate the locking device 600 with the wire or the like. As a result, the defense performance can be improved. Furthermore, the extending wall portion 83 is configured to cover the right end portion (the left end portion in FIG. 5) of the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 from the back side, and in the closed state of the inner frame 12, The rear pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 cannot be opened.

Further, as shown in FIG. 4, a front frame open detection switch 91 for detecting the opening of the front frame set 14 is provided at the lower right portion of the front side of the inner frame 12 (the right side of the launching device 60), and FIG. As shown in , an inner frame open detection switch 92 for detecting the opening of the inner frame 12 is provided on the lower right portion of the back side of the inner frame 12 (lower left in FIG. 5). The front frame open detection switch 91 and the inner frame open detection switch 92 each have a detection part that can appear and disappear with respect to the switch body, and the front frame open detection switch 91 is provided so that the detection part faces forward, The inner frame open detection switch 92 is provided so that the detection portion faces rearward. When the detector is in a state of protruding from the switch body, an ON signal is output to the main controller 261, and when the detector is pushed toward the switch body and retracted into the switch body, an OFF signal is output. It is configured to output to the main controller 261 . That is, when the front frame set 14 is closed, the detection part of the front frame open detection switch 91 is pressed by the back surface of the front frame set 14 and is turned off. It turns on. Similarly, when the inner frame 12 is closed, the inner frame open detection switch 92 is turned off by pressing the pressing portion 86 integrally formed with the receiving portion 85 of the outer frame 11. When the inner frame 12 is opened, the switch 92 is turned off. The part returns to the protruding state and is turned on.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. A main controller 261 (main substrate) as main control means is equipped with a CPU 501 as a one-chip microcomputer as an arithmetic device. The CPU 501 includes a ROM 502 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the CPU 501, and a RAM 503 that temporarily stores various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 502. Also, various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. However, the CPU, ROM, and RAM may not be integrated into one chip, but may be integrated into chips for each function.

The RAM 503 includes a stack area that stores the contents of the internal registers of the CPU 501 and the return address of the control program executed by the CPU 501, and a work area (work area) that stores various flags, counters, I/O values, and the like. ) and a backup area 503a.

The RAM 503 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 313 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off. All data stored in the

The backup area 503a is designed to restore the state of the pachinko machine 10 to the state before the power cut when the power is turned off when the power is turned off due to a power cut or the like. (similarly)) and the values of each register, I/O, etc. are stored. Writing to the backup area 503a is executed by the main processing when the power is turned off, and conversely, each value written to the backup area 503a is restored when the power is turned on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation; the same applies hereinafter). is executed in The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 501 is configured to receive a power failure signal SK1 output from a power failure monitoring circuit 542, which will be described later, when the power supply is interrupted due to a power failure or the like. Upon occurrence, power failure processing (NMI interrupt processing) is immediately executed.

If at least the data stored in the stack area and the backup area 503a are backed up, it is not necessary to back up the data stored in all areas. For example, the data stored in the stack area and the backup area 503a may be backed up, and the data stored in the work area may not be backed up.

An input/output port 505 is connected to the CPU 501 containing the ROM 502 and RAM 503 via a bus line 504 including an address bus, a data bus, and the like. Connected to the input/output port 505 are a RAM erasing switch circuit 543, payout control device 311, sub-control device 262, first and second special display devices 43L and 43R, normal symbol display device 41, etc., which will be described later. With this configuration, the special display devices 43L, 43R and the normal symbol display device 41 are directly controlled by the main control device 261. FIG. On the other hand, the decorative pattern display device 42 is controlled via the sub-control device 262 .

In addition, although illustration of various relay boards and the like is omitted for convenience, the input/output port 505 includes various switches such as the winning port switch 221, the count switches 223a and 223b, the start winning switches 224a and 224b, the through gate switch 225, and the handle 18. Various detection switches, various substrates, and various electric parts such as solenoids for opening and closing the variable winning device 32 are connected. In other words, the main controller 261 is provided with a plurality of terminal portions (board-side connectors) for connecting connectors of various cable connectors.

The sub-control device 262 (sub-control board) as a sub-control means includes a CPU 551 which is an arithmetic device, a ROM 552 storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 551, and a control program stored in the ROM 552. It includes a RAM 553, which is a memory for temporarily storing various data, etc., an input/output port 554, a bus line 555, and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit (not shown). It has The RAM 553 is a memory that temporarily stores work data and flags used when various programs are executed by the CPU 551 .

The input/output port 554 is connected to the CPU 551 , the ROM 552 and the RAM 553 via a bus line 555 and also to the display control device 45 . Further, the input/output port 554 is connected with the speaker SP, the hold lamps 46a and 46b, the production button 125, the cross button 126, various illumination parts and the lamps 102 and 104. FIG.

The CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 causes the display control device 45 to execute display control based on, for example, a command signal (for example, a variation pattern command) transmitted from the main control device 261, and causes the decorative pattern display device 42 to display. As described above, in the present embodiment, the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R controlled by the main controller 261 are adapted to display that the jackpot has been won. In the decorative design display device 42 controlled by , variable display of the decorative design is performed as effect display in accordance with the variable display of the special design in the special display devices 43L and 43R.

The payout control device 311 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 358 . A CPU 511, which is an arithmetic device, includes a ROM 512 storing control programs executed by the CPU 511, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 513 used as a work memory and the like.

Similar to the RAM 503 of the main controller 261, the RAM 513 of the payout control device 311 includes a stack area for storing the contents of the internal register of the CPU 511 and the return address of the control program executed by the CPU 511, various flags and counters, It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored, and a backup area 513a.

The RAM 513 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 313 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off. data is backed up. If at least the data stored in the stack area and the backup area 513a are backed up, it is not necessary to back up the data stored in all areas. For example, the data stored in the stack area and the backup area 513a may be backed up, and the data stored in the work area may not be backed up.

Backup area 513a, when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, in order to restore the state of the pachinko machine 10 to the state before the power cut when the power is turned on again, the stack pointer at the time of power cut, each register, This is an area for storing values such as I/O. Writing to the backup area 513a is executed by the main process when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written to the backup area 513a is executed by the main process when the power is turned on. As with the CPU 501 of the main controller 261, the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SK1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 when the power supply is interrupted due to a power failure or the like. When input to the CPU 511, NMI interrupt processing is immediately executed as power failure processing.

In the work area, a payout permission flag set to allow the payout of prize balls by the payout control device 311, a command reception flag set when a command transmitted from the main control device 261 is received, and a main control device 261 A command buffer is provided in which commands sent from are stored.

The payout permission flag is a flag for setting the payout permission of prize balls, and is turned on when a specific command permitting the payout of prize balls is transmitted from the main controller 261 and the specific command is received. or when it returns to the state before power-off. In this embodiment, the specific commands are a payout initialization command that instructs the initialization process of the RAM 513 of the payout control device 311, a prize ball command that instructs the payout of prize balls, and a There are three payout return commands sent in the case.

The command reception flag is a flag for confirming whether or not the payout control device 311 has received a command, and is turned on when any command is received. It is turned off when returning to the previous state, and is turned off when the received command is determined by the command determination process.

The command buffer consists of a ring buffer that temporarily stores commands sent from the main controller 261 . The ring buffer has a predetermined storage area, and commands are stored with regularity from the beginning to the end of the storage area. The return command is configured to be updated. Therefore, when a command is stored and read, the store pointer and read pointer in the command buffer are updated, and the command is stored and read based on each pointer.

An input/output port 515 is connected to the CPU 511 containing the ROM 512 and RAM 513 via a bus line 514 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 515 is connected to the RAM erasing switch circuit 543, the main controller 261, the firing controller 312, the dispensing device 358, and the like.

The card unit connection board 314 includes a ball rental operation unit (ball rental button 121 and return button 122) on the front of the pachinko machine 10, and a card unit (ball rental unit) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10 in a game hall or the like. and are electrically connected to each other, take in the command of the player's ball lending operation, and output it to the card unit. Note that the card unit connection board 314 may be omitted in a cash machine in which game balls are directly lent to the upper tray 19 from a ball lending device or the like without going through the card unit.

The shooting control device 312 permits or prohibits shooting of game balls by the shooting device 60, and the shooting device 60 is allowed to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, a firing permission signal is output from the payout control device 311, a sensor signal detects that the player is touching the handle 18, and a firing prohibition button 18a ( 1) is not operated, the shooting device 60 is driven, and game balls are shot with an intensity corresponding to the amount of operation of the handle 18. FIG.

The display control device 45 follows the instruction from the sub-controller 262 and executes the variable display of the decorative design in the decorative design display device 42 . The display control device 45 includes a CPU 521, a program ROM 522, a work RAM 523, a video RAM 524, a character ROM 525, a video display processor (VDP) 526, an input port 527, an output port 529, and bus lines 530, 531. and An input/output port 554 of the sub-controller 262 is connected to the input port 527 . Also, the CPU 521 , program ROM 522 , work RAM 523 and VDP 526 are connected to the input port 527 via the bus line 530 . An output port 529 is connected to the VDP 526 via a bus line 531, and the output port 529 is connected to the decorative pattern display device 42, which is a liquid crystal display device.

The CPU 521 of the display control device 45 receives the display command transmitted from the sub-control device 262 via the input port 527, analyzes the received command or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received command, and controls the VDP 526. (specifically, generation of an internal command for the VDP 526). Thereby, display control in the decorative pattern display device 42 is performed.

A program ROM 522 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 521, and a work RAM 523 is a memory for temporarily storing work data and flags used when various programs are executed by the CPU 521. is.

The video RAM 524 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the decorative design display device 42. By rewriting the content of the video RAM 524, the display content of the decorative design display device 42 is changed. The character ROM 525 is a memory for storing character data such as designs displayed on the decorative design display device 42 .

The VDP 526 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates the LCD driver (liquid crystal driving circuit) incorporated in the decorative pattern display device 42 . Since the VDP 526 is made into an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and its substance should be called a microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 526 adjusts the timing of each of the CPU 521, the video RAM 524, etc., and intervenes in the reading and writing of data.

In addition, the power supply device 313 includes a power supply unit 541 that supplies power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 542 that monitors power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM deletion switch circuit 543 that is connected to the RAM deletion switch 323. and

The power supply unit 541 supplies necessary operating power to each of the main control device 261, the payout control device 311 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 541 takes in an AC 24V power supply supplied from the outside, and generates +12V power supply for driving various switches and motors, +5V power supply for logic, backup power supply for RAM backup, etc. These +12V power supply, +5V power supply and backup power supply are supplied to the main control device 261, the payout control device 311 and the like. An operating power source (+12V power source, +5V power source, etc.) is supplied to the launch control device 312 via the payout control device 311 . Similarly, various switches, motors, and the like are supplied with operating power through the control device to which they are connected.

The power failure monitoring circuit 542 is a circuit that outputs a power failure signal SK1 to each NMI terminal of the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 and the CPU 511 of the payout controller 311 when the power is shut off due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 542 monitors a stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 541, and determines that a power failure (power failure) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. A power failure signal SK1 is output to the main controller 261 and the payout controller 311. By the output of this power failure signal SK1, the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 recognize the occurrence of power failure and execute power failure processing (NMI interrupt processing).

Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 541 normally outputs 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the power failure processing. configured to maintain value. Therefore, the main controller 261 and the payout controller 311 can normally execute and complete the power failure process.

The RAM erase switch circuit 543 is a circuit that takes in the switch signal of the RAM erase switch 323 and clears the backup data of the RAM 503 of the main controller 261 and the RAM 513 of the payout controller 311 according to the state of the switch 323 . When the RAM erasing switch 323 is pressed, the RAM erasing switch circuit 543 outputs a RAM erasing signal SK2 to the main controller 261 and the payout controller 311. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the RAM erasing switch 323 is pressed (including power-on due to power failure cancellation), the data in the RAMs 503 and 513 of the main controller 261 and the payout controller 311 are cleared. be.

Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be described. In this embodiment, the CPU 501 provided in the main control device 261 as main control means performs a lottery using various counter information during the game. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8, a success/failure random number counter C1 as a success/failure random number generation means used for a success/failure lottery to determine whether or not to generate a big win state, and a type used to determine the type of big win (type lottery). A determination counter C2, a variation selection counter C3 used to determine whether or not to generate a ready-to-win state in the decorative pattern display device 42, an initial value random number counter CINI used to set the initial value of the success or failure random number counter C1, and a first And the second special display device 43L, 43R (decorative pattern display device 42) first variation type counter CS1, second variation type counter CS2 used for determining the variation display time, etc., and the lottery of the normal design display device 41 (input A normal symbol random number counter C4 used for ball support lottery) is used. Note that the variation selection counter C3 is also used for lottery for the reach type when the decorative symbol display device 42 is deviated and varied. The variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are also used for variation pattern selection (effect pattern selection) of the decorative symbol display device . Specifically, according to the determined variation pattern, the variation time of the special display devices 43L and 43R is determined, and the variation mode and variation time in the decorative design display device 42, that is, the performance pattern is determined.

Each of the counters C1, C2, C3, CINI, CS1, CS2, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated, and returns to 0 as the lower limit after reaching the upper limit. Each counter is periodically updated, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 503 (except for the random number initial value counter CINI).

The RAM 503 stores the values of the success/failure random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, and the variation selection counter C3, as a special variation reservation area as a reservation storage area, and the normal pattern random number counter C4. A variable holding area is provided. The normal variable holding area comprises one execution area and four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area). In each holding area of the normal fluctuation holding area, the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 is stored chronologically according to the passage history of the game ball to the through gate 34.例文帳に追加By adopting this configuration, the variable display on the normal symbol display device 41 can be held up to four times.

In addition, the special variation reservation area includes a first special variation reservation area and a second special variation storage area each having four reservation areas (first reservation to fourth reservation area), and one execution area. In each reservation area of the first special variable reservation area, each value of the win/fail random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, and the variation selection counter C3 is set according to the winning history of the game ball to the first start winning device 33a. Stored sequentially. In each reservation area of the second special variable reservation area, each value of the winning random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, and the variation selection counter C3 is set according to the winning history of the game ball to the second start winning device 33b. Stored sequentially. By adopting this configuration, it is possible to suspend the variable display up to four times on each of the special display devices 43L and 43R.

To explain each counter in detail, the hit/fail random number counter C1 is, for example, incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 599. It is configured to return to Normally, when the success/failure random number counter C1 completes one cycle, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI at that time is read as the next initial value of the success/failure random number counter C1. The initial value random number counter CINI is a loop counter (value=0 to 599) similar to the success/failure random number counter C1, and is updated once for each timer interrupt and repeatedly updated within the remaining time of normal processing. On the other hand, the success/failure random number counter C1 is periodically updated (once per timer interrupt in this embodiment), and the value of the success/failure random number counter C1 is stored in the success/failure random number counter buffer. Then, at the timing when the game ball wins the first starting prize winning device 33a or the second starting prize winning device 33b, the value of the win/fail random number counter C1 stored in the win/fail random number counter buffer is stored in the special change holding area.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the number of values of the hit/fail random number counter C1 that becomes a big hit in the low probability state (normal mode, time reduction mode) is two, and the value is "7, 307", and the probability is high. In the state (probability variable mode, potential probability mode), the number of values of the hit/fail random number counter C1 that becomes a big hit is 20, and the values are "7 to 16, 307 to 316". In this embodiment, the ROM 502 is provided with two success/failure determination tables as winning value storage means that are referred to when determining whether the value of the success/failure random number counter C1 corresponds to a big win. 7, 307” as jackpot values, and a second win-or-fail judgment table that stores “8 to 16, 308 to 316” as jackpot values.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, a random number counter C1 is used to draw a lottery to determine whether or not a small win is won when a big win is not won. In the low probability state (normal mode, time reduction mode), the number of values of the small hit random number counter C1 is 1, the value is "404", and the high probability state (variable probability mode, latent probability mode) ), the value of the success/failure random number counter C1, which is a small win, is 10, and the value is "404 to 413". Incidentally, for the determination of whether or not the small win is successful, the first small win determination table storing "404" as the winning value and the second small winning determination table storing "405 to 413" as the winning value are referred to.

In addition, in the normal mode, the probability of winning a big hit in the winning lottery (big hit probability) is 1/300, the probability of winning a small hit (small hit probability) is 1/600, and the ball support lottery The variation time in the normal symbol display device 41 for teaching the result is 8 seconds, and when winning the entry support lottery, the second start winning device 33b is opened for 0.4 seconds.

In the variable probability mode, the probability of a big win is 1/30 and the probability of a small win is 1/60, making it easier to win than in the normal mode. In addition, in the variable probability mode, the variation time of the normal symbol display device 41 based on the entrance support lottery is 0.4 seconds, which is shorter than in the normal mode, and when winning the entrance support lottery, the second The starting prize winning device 33b is opened three times, and each opening time is 4 seconds (the opening of 4 seconds is repeated three times with a closing period of 0.4 seconds in between). That is, in the variable probability mode, compared to the normal mode, the fluctuation time in the normal symbol display device 41 is shortened, and the opening time of the second start winning device 33b per winning of the entrance support lottery is longer, and the number of times of opening is longer. will increase. As a result, the time zone in which the second starting prize winning device 33b is in the open state is lengthened, so that game balls frequently enter the second starting prize winning device 33b (become in a high ball winning state). , the winning lottery is continuously performed, and the state of keeping the ball is good. In addition, in the high ball entry state, the probability that the "○" symbol is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device 41 (the winning probability of the ball entry support lottery) may be set higher than in the normal mode.

In the time reduction mode, the big win probability is 1/300 and the small win probability is 1/600. In addition, in the time reduction mode, the variation time of the normal symbol display device 41 based on the entrance support lottery is 0.4 seconds, and when winning the entrance support lottery, the second start winning device 33b is opened three times. and each open time is 4 seconds. That is, in the time shortening mode, the jackpot probability is as low as in the normal mode, but if only the operation of the second starting prize winning device 33b is seen, it is the same as the variable probability mode. In this embodiment, after the jackpot state of "8RN" or "2RN" is completed, the total number of fluctuations is displayed on the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R (90 times after "8RN") Thus, the time reduction mode is set for "2RN" 30 times ("2RN30"), 60 times ("2RN60"), and 90 times ("2RN90"). Also, the time reduction mode ends when the special display devices 43L and 43R perform the variable display for the specified number of times even if the jackpot state does not occur, and then shifts to the normal mode.

In the latent probability mode, the probability of a big win is 1/30 and the probability of a small win is 1/60. Further, in the latent probability mode, the variation time of the normal symbol display device 41 is 8 seconds, and when winning the ball-entering support lottery, the second starting prize winning device 33b is opened only once for 0.4 seconds. That is, in the latent probability mode, although the probability of the jackpot is as high as in the variable probability mode, only the operation of the second starting prize winning device 33b is the same as in the normal mode. In this embodiment, after the end of the "2RS" jackpot state, the latent certainty mode is entered, and continues at least until the jackpot state occurs. Incidentally, in this embodiment, if a winning lottery based on the ball entering the first starting prize winning device 33a is won, there is no allocation to win "2RN", so the latent certainty mode ends quietly. Such a situation is avoided (continued until winning a jackpot with balls).

The type determining counter C2 is incremented by one within a range of 0 to 19, for example, and returns to 0, which is the lower limit, after reaching the upper limit (that is, 19). In addition, the ROM 502 includes a first type determination table (corresponding to the first start winning device 33a) that is referenced when determining which jackpot type the value of the type determination counter C2 corresponds to, a second type determination A table (corresponding to the second start winning device 33b) is provided. Then, when a big win is won in the lottery, the type of the type of the jackpot state to be given is determined based on the value of the type determination counter C2 (type lottery is performed), and the determined type of the jackpot state is determined. will be granted.

The type determination counter C2 is periodically updated (once per timer interrupt in this embodiment), and the value of the type determination counter C2 is stored in the type determination counter buffer. Then, at the timing when the game ball wins the first starting prize winning device 33a or the second starting prize winning device 33b, the value of the type determination counter C2 stored in the type determination counter buffer is stored in the special variation holding area of the RAM 503. .

The variable selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 238, for example, and return to 0 as the lower limit after reaching the upper limit (that is, 238). In this embodiment, after the ready-to-win state occurs with respect to the decorative pattern, the final stop pattern shifts by one before and after the ready-to-win pattern by the variation selection counter C3 and stops, and the same ready-to-win state occurs. A lottery is drawn for "reach other than front and rear out" in which the rear final stop symbol stops at a position other than the front and rear of the reach symbol and "complete out" in which the reach state does not occur. In this embodiment, a reach determination table is provided in the ROM 502 to store the correspondence between the value of the variation selection counter C3 and the reach type. The reach determination table stores a value of "0 to 238", C3 = 0, 1 corresponds to front and rear out reach, C3 = 2 to 21 corresponds to reach other than front and rear out, C3 = 22 to 238 is perfect It has a configuration that corresponds to the outside.

The variation selection counter C3 is periodically updated (once per timer interrupt in this embodiment), and the value of the variation selection counter C3 is stored in the variation selection counter buffer. Then, at the timing when the game ball wins the first starting prize winning device 33a or the second starting prize winning device 33b, the value of the fluctuation selection counter C3 stored in the fluctuation selection counter buffer is stored in the special fluctuation holding area of the RAM 503. .

Further, one of the two fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 59, for example, and reaches the upper limit (that is, 59), and then the lower limit. It is configured to return to 0, and the other fluctuation type counter CS2 is, for example, incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 37, and after reaching the upper limit (that is, 37), it returns to 0, which is the lower limit. It has become. For example, the first variation type counter CS1 determines the reach pattern of decorative symbols such as so-called normal reach, super reach, premium reach, and other rough pattern variation modes, and the second variation type counter CS2 determines the final stop symbol after the reach occurs. (In this example, the middle pattern), a more detailed pattern variation mode such as the elapsed time until the stop is determined. Therefore, by combining these fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2, it is possible to easily realize diversification of fluctuation patterns. Further, it is also possible to determine the symbol variation mode only by the first variation type counter CS1, or to determine the symbol variation mode by combining the first variation type counter CS1 and the stop symbol.

In addition, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated once each time the normal processing described later is executed, and are repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the normal processing. Buffer values of CS1 and CS2 are acquired when determining a variation pattern at the start of variation of the decorative design by the decorative design display device 42 .

Note that the size and range of each counter is merely an example and can be changed arbitrarily. However, it is desirable that the random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, the variation selection counter C3, and the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are all different prime numbers and are not synchronized in any case.

In addition, the normal symbol random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 99, for example, and returns to the lower limit value of 0 after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 99). The random number counter C4 is periodically updated (once per timer interrupt in this embodiment), and the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 is obtained when the game ball passes through either the left or right through gate 34. Low input. The number of winning random number values in the ball state is 1, and the range is 1. On the other hand, the number of random number values winning in the high ball entry state is 99. The range is "1 to 99".And, when the value of the winning normal symbol random number counter C4 is acquired, after the variable display is performed for a predetermined time in the normal symbol display device 41, the symbol corresponding to winning ("○" in this example) is stopped and displayed, and the second starting prize winning device 33b is opened in a pattern corresponding to the game mode at that time.

Next, each control process executed by the CPU 501 in the main controller 261 will be described with reference to flowcharts. The processing of the CPU 501 can be broadly classified into main processing that is started when the power is turned on, timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (with a cycle of 2 msec in this embodiment), and a stop signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt processing and the NMI interrupt processing will be explained first, and then the main processing will be explained.

FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing, which is executed by the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 every 2 msec, for example. First, in step S301, a process of reading various winning switches is executed. That is, it reads the states of various switches (except for the RAM erase switch 323) connected to the main controller 261, determines the states of the switches, and saves detection information (winning detection information). On the other hand, if there is no detection information, the process proceeds to the next process.

In addition, when there is detection information of various winning switches, the value of the corresponding winning ball counter is added. In addition, in the external output processing of the normal processing to be described later, a prize ball command based on the value of each prize ball counter is output to the payout control device 311, and prize balls are provided based on the prize ball command (game balls are paid out). ). Furthermore, when this prize ball command is output, the value of each prize ball counter is reset.

In step S302, random number initial value update processing is executed. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (599 in this example).

Also, in step S303, random number update processing is executed. Specifically, the success or failure random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, the variation selection counter C3, and the normal symbol random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (599, 19 in this embodiment, respectively). , 238, 99) are cleared to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the respective counters C1, C2, C3 and C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 503. FIG.

After that, in step S304, starting winning processing accompanying winning to the starting winning device 33 is executed, and in step S305, through gate passing processing accompanying passage of the game ball to the through gate 34 is executed. After that, the timer interrupt processing is temporarily terminated.

Here, the starting winning process of step S304 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In addition, the RAM 503 includes a first suspension counter Na for counting the number of suspensions of variable display triggered by winning a prize in the first start prize winning device 33a, and suspension of variable display triggered by winning a prize in the second start prize winning device 33b. A second pending counter Nb is provided for counting.

In addition, in the execution area and each reservation area of the special variation reservation area, the success/failure random number storage area that stores the value of the success/failure random number counter C1, the winning type random number storage area that stores the value of the type determination counter C2, and the variation selection counter C3 A reach random number storage area is provided for storing values. In this embodiment, the hit/fail random number storage area uses 2 bytes to store the value of the hit/fail random number counter C1. The winning type random number storage area and reach random number storage area each use 1 byte to store the value of the type determination counter C2 and the value of the variation selection counter C3.

Furthermore, in the execution area of the special variable reservation area, there is a variable display (first variable display) based on the ball entering the first starting prize winning device 33a, or based on the ball entering the second starting prize winning device 33b. A variation storage area is provided for storing information indicating whether the display is a variation display (second variation display). Hereinafter, ``storing information indicating that the variation storage area is the first variation display'' is also referred to as ``setting the first variation flag to ON'', and ``that the variation storage area is the second variation display''. "the information indicating is stored" is also referred to as "the second fluctuation flag is set to ON".

First, in step S501, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the second start prize winning device 33b based on the detection information of the second start prize winning switch 224b. If the determination in step S501 is affirmative, it is determined in step S502 whether or not the value of the second suspension counter Nb is less than the upper limit value ("4" in this embodiment). If a negative determination is made in step S501 or S502, the process proceeds to step S509. On the other hand, if the determination in step S502 is affirmative, the process proceeds to step S503, and the second suspension counter Nb is incremented by one.

In the following step S504, the values of the hit/fail random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, and the variation selection counter C3 updated in the random number update process of step S303 (the hit/fail random number counter buffer, the type determination counter buffer, and the variation selection counter buffer Each stored value) is stored in the first area (win/fail random number storage area, winning type random number storage area, reach random number storage area) of the vacant reservation areas of the special variation reservation area. After step S504, the process proceeds to step S505.

In step S505, the value of the hit/fail random number counter C1 newly stored in the special change reservation area is a value corresponding to a big hit or a small hit. In addition, the details of the success/failure determination process will be described later.

In the subsequent step S506, when it is determined in step S505 that the value of the hit/fail random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to the jackpot, the jackpot is determined based on the value of the type determination counter C2 newly stored in the special change holding area. A type determination process for determining the type of is performed. Details of the type determination process will be described later.

In the following step S507, if it is determined in step S505 that the value of the hit/fail random number counter C1 is not a value corresponding to the big hit, the value of the variation selection counter C3 newly stored in the special variation holding area Perform reach determination processing to determine the type of reach at the time of fluctuation. Details of the reach determination process will be described later.

Here, the details of the success/failure determination process in step S505 will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in step S5101, it is determined whether or not the value of the hit/fail random number counter C1 newly stored in the special change reservation area matches the value "7" or "307" stored in the first hit/fail determination table. determine whether By the way, "7" and "307" are values that are big hits both in the low-probability state and in the high-probability state.

Although FIG. 14 simplifies the processing of step S5101 for the sake of convenience, in practice, it is determined whether or not the value of the success/failure random number counter C1 is "7", and the determination is negative. If it is determined, it is determined whether or not the value of the success/failure random number counter C1 is "307". If a negative determination is also made in step S5101, a negative determination is made in step S5101.

If the determination in step S5101 is affirmative, the process ends after turning on the first propriety flag in step S5102. In this embodiment, in addition to the success/failure random number storage area for storing the value of the success/failure random number counter C1, a success/failure flag is not provided separately. is stored (overwritten). As described above, the success/failure random number storage area uses 2 bytes, and in step S5102, for example, "1010101010101010" is set in the success/failure random number storage area. In the present embodiment, for the sake of convenience, the fact that the setting is made in the success/failure random number storage area is referred to as turning on the first success/failure flag.

If a negative determination is made in step S5101, then in step S5103 the value of the success/failure random number counter C1 newly stored in the special variation holding area is the value stored in the second success/failure determination table (8 to 16, 308 to 316”. By the way, "8 to 16, 308 to 316" is a value that becomes a big hit only in the variable probability mode. Incidentally, even in the determination process, it is actually determined one by one whether or not the value of the win/fail random number counter C1 and each value corresponding to the big win match as described above.

If the determination in step S5103 is affirmative, the process ends after turning on the second propriety flag in step S5104. Turning on the second right/fail flag means that, for example, "1100110011001100" is set in the right/fail random number storage area.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5103, that is, if the "missing" state is obtained even in the high probability state, then in step S5105, the value of the hit/fail random number counter C1 newly stored in the special change holding area is set to the first It is determined whether or not it matches the value "404" stored in the small hit determination table. Incidentally, "404" is a value that becomes a small hit in both a low probability state and a high probability state.

When affirmative determination is made in step S5105, after turning on the first small hit flag in step S5106, this processing is terminated. In addition, in this embodiment, it is configured to store (overwrite) information as to whether or not a small win state occurs in the success/failure random number storage area.

When the negative determination is made in step S5105, in step S5107, the value of the hit/fail random number counter C1 newly stored in the special change holding area is the value stored in the second small hit determination table "405 to 413". It is determined whether it is one of Incidentally, "405-413" is a value that becomes a big hit only in a high-probability state. If the determination in step S5107 is affirmative, this process is terminated after turning on the second small hit flag in step S5108. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5107, this processing ends.

As described above, in the present embodiment, information relating to success or failure is stored using 2 bytes. Therefore, for example, when noise occurs, the success/failure flag (stored contents of the success/failure random number storage area) is rewritten. , it is possible to prevent a situation in which a big winning state occurs even though the winning is not made or a big winning state does not occur even though the winning is made. The pattern (a combination of "1" and "0") set in the success/failure random number storage area in the success/failure determination process is a pattern that is not used when the value of the success/failure random number counter C1 is stored in the success/failure random number storage area. be.

In addition to the success/failure random number storage area for storing the value of the success/failure random number counter C1, a success/failure flag may be provided separately so that the value of the success/failure random number counter C1 is stored at this time, and the value of the success/failure random number counter C1 is stored as it is. In the variable display setting process that is performed at the start, it may be configured such that success or failure is determined by referring to a corresponding table based on the value of the success/failure random number counter C1. A random number counter for small wins may be provided separately from the hit/fail random number counter C1 used for judging big wins.

Next, the second type determination processing in step S506 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S5401, it is determined whether or not the first or second success flag has been set to ON in the success/failure determination process performed immediately before. If a negative determination is made in step S5401 (there is no possibility of occurrence of a jackpot state), this processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the affirmative determination is made in step S5401 (there is a possibility of occurrence of a jackpot state), in step S5402, the second type determination table is taken into consideration, and the type determination counter newly stored in the special change reservation area It is determined whether the value of C2 matches the value "0" corresponding to "16RS". If the determination in step S5402 is affirmative, the 16RS flag is turned on in step S5403, and this process ends.

In the present embodiment, a 16RS flag or the like is not separately provided in addition to the winning type random number storage area for storing the value of the type determination counter C2. information is stored (overwritten). As described above, the winning type random number storage area uses 1 byte, and in step S5403, for example, "10101010" is set in the winning type random number storage area. In this embodiment, for the sake of convenience, setting a pattern indicating a jackpot type such as "16RS" in the winning type random number storage area is referred to as turning on a flag (16RS flag, etc.) indicating the jackpot type. explain. The pattern (a combination of "1" and "0") set in the winning type random number storage area in the type determination process is not used when the value of the type determination counter C2 is stored in the winning type random number storage area. It's a pattern.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5402, the value of the type determination counter C2 newly stored in the special change reservation area corresponds to "8RS" by referring to the second type determination table in step S5404. It is determined whether or not it matches any one of "7 to 13". If the determination in step S5404 is affirmative, in step S5405, the 8RS flag is turned on (for example, "00011111" is set in the winning type random number storage area), and this process ends.

Also, if the determination in step S5404 is negative, in step S5406, the second type determination table is taken into consideration, and the value of the type determination counter C2 newly stored in the special change reservation area corresponds to "2RN30". It is determined whether or not it matches any one of "14 to 17". If an affirmative determination is made in step S5406, the 2RN30 flag is turned on in step S5407, and this process ends.

Also, if the determination in step S5406 is negative, in step S5408, the second type determination table is taken into account, and the value of the type determination counter C2 newly stored in the special change reservation area corresponds to "2RN60". It is determined whether or not it matches with "18". If the determination in step S5408 is affirmative, the 2RN60 flag is turned on in step S5409, and then this process ends.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S5408 is negative, the value of the type determination counter C2 newly stored in the special change reservation area is "19" corresponding to "2RN90", so in step S5410, 2RN90 After turning on the flag, this processing ends. In addition, in the type determination process, it is only necessary to determine the jackpot type. It may be configured to determine whether the value corresponding to "2RN90" and the obtained random number value match.

Next, reach determination processing in step S507 will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in step S5301, it is determined whether or not the first success flag has been set in the previous success determination process. If the determination in step S5301 is affirmative, that is, if the jackpot is achieved in both the low-probability state and the high-probability state (the jackpot state always occurs), this processing ends.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5301, that is, if the jackpot state does not occur at least in the low probability state (there is a possibility of being out), in step S5302, the reach determination table is taken into consideration, and a new It is determined whether or not the value of the variation selection counter C3 stored in the special variation reservation area matches one of the values '0, 1' corresponding to the 'outside reach'. If the determination in step S5302 is affirmative, in step S5303, the front-rear flag indicating the occurrence of front-rear out-of-reach reach is turned on, and then this process ends.

In this embodiment, in addition to the reach random number storage area for storing the value of the variation selection counter C3, there is no separate front/rear flag. is stored (overwritten). As described above, the reach random number storage area uses 1 byte, and in step S5303, for example, "10101010" is set for the reach random number storage area. In this embodiment, for the sake of convenience, setting the reach random number storage area will be referred to as turning on the before/after flag.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5302, the reach determination table is taken into account in step S5304, and the value of the variation selection counter C3 newly stored in the special variation reservation area corresponds to "reach other than front and rear deviation". It determines whether or not it matches any of the values "2 to 21". If the determination in step S5304 is affirmative, the flag other than before and after is turned on in step S5305, and then this process ends. Note that turning on the flag other than before and after means that, for example, "11001100" is set in the reach random number storage area.

If a negative determination is made in step S5304, that is, if the variable display ends without going through the reach state, that is, "completely out", this process ends. The pattern (a combination of "1" and "0") set in the reach random number storage area in the reach determination process is a pattern that is not used when storing the value of the variation selection counter C3 in the reach random number storage area. be.

Returning to the description of FIG. 13, in step S508 subsequent to step S507, a preceding command setting process is performed. In addition, in the starting command, the change information (predetermined information used to determine the contents of the change display) that is reserved and stored is triggered by which of the first start prize winning device 33a or the second start prize winning device 33b. Along with information indicating whether or not, information indicating the results of the validity determination process, type determination process, and reach determination process is included, and is output to the sub-control device 262 in the next external output process (see step S201) .

After the processing of step S508, or when the negative determination is made in step S501 or step S502, in step S509, the first start winning switch 224a determines whether or not the game ball has won the first start winning device 33. is determined by the detection information of If a negative determination is made in step S509, this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the determination is affirmative, in step S510, the value of the first suspension counter Na that counts the number of suspensions of the variable display triggered by the winning of the first start prize winning device 33a is the upper limit value (in this embodiment, "4"). If a negative determination is made in step S510, this process ends. On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S510, the process proceeds to step S511, and the first suspension counter Na is incremented by one.

In the subsequent step S512, each value of the success/failure random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, and the variation selection counter C3 is stored in the vacant reservation areas (the success/failure random number storage area, the winning type random number storage area, the reach random number storage area) of the special variation reservation area. ). After step S512, the process proceeds to step S513.

In step S513, a win/fail determination process is performed to determine whether or not the value of the hit/fail random number counter C1 newly stored in the special change reservation area is a value corresponding to a big win. The details of the suitability determination process have already been described above.

In the subsequent step S514, when it is determined in step S513 that the value of the hit/fail random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to the big hit, based on the value of the type determination counter C2 newly stored in the special change holding area, the big hit A first type determination process for determining the type is performed. In the present embodiment, there are two cases: a case of winning a big win in a winning lottery based on a ball entering the first starting prize winning device 33a, and a case of winning a big win in a winning lottery based on a ball entering the second starting prize winning device 33b. So, the distribution of the given jackpot type is different.

Here, the first type determination processing in step S514 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S5201, it is determined whether or not the first or second success/failure flag has been set to ON in the success/failure determination process performed immediately before. If a negative determination is made in step S5201 (there is no possibility of occurrence of a jackpot state), this processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if affirmative determination is made in step S5201 (there is a possibility of occurrence of a jackpot state), in step S5202, the first type determination table is taken into consideration, and the type determination counter newly stored in the special change reservation area It is determined whether the value of C2 matches the value "0" corresponding to "16RS". If the determination in step S5202 is affirmative, the 16RS flag is turned on in step S5203, and this process ends.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S5202 is negative, in step S5204, the first type determination table is taken into account, and the value of the type determination counter C2 newly stored in the special change reservation area corresponds to "8RN". It is determined whether or not it matches any one of "12 to 17". If an affirmative determination is made in step S5204, the 8RN flag is turned on in step S5205, and then this process ends.

Also, if the determination in step S5204 is negative, in step S5206, the first type determination table is taken into account, and the value of the type determination counter C2 newly stored in the special change reservation area corresponds to "2RS". It is determined whether or not it matches with either of "18, 19". If the determination in step S5206 is affirmative, in step S5207 the 2RS flag is turned on, and then this processing ends. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5206, the 8RS flag is turned on in step S5208, and this processing ends.

Returning to the description of FIG. 13, in step S515 following step S514, when it is determined in step S513 that the value of the hit/fail random number counter C1 is not a value corresponding to a big hit, the variation newly stored in the special variation holding area Based on the value of the selection counter C3, reach determination processing for determining the type of reach is performed. Details of the reach determination process have already been described above.

After step S515, in step S516, a preceding command setting process is performed, and this process ends. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the first start-up winning device 33a or the second start-up winning device 33b, the value of the success/failure random number counter C1 is directly stored in the special change holding area, and then the success/failure determination process is performed. , type determination processing, and reach determination processing are executed, but the configuration is not particularly limited to such a configuration. For example, a temporary storage area (work area) is provided to temporarily store the values of the success/failure random number counter C1 when these counter values are acquired. After executing the determination process and the reach determination process, a configuration may be adopted in which the reservation area of the corresponding special change reservation area is stored.

The process of extracting the value of the success/failure random number counter C1 in steps S504 and S512 constitutes the discrimination value extraction process, and similarly the value of the success/failure random number counter C1 extracted in steps S504 and S512 is stored in the special change holding area. The process constitutes the discriminant value storage process. Further, the process of determining whether or not the value of the success/failure random number counter C1 in steps S505 and S513 (steps S5101, S5103, steps S5105, and S5107) is a value corresponding to winning constitutes the first success/failure determination process. Then, the processing of steps S5102, S5104, S5106, and S5108 for storing the determination result (setting the corresponding flag) constitutes the result storage processing.

Next, the through gate passage processing in step S305 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In step S601, whether or not the game ball has passed through the through gate 34 is determined based on the detection information of the through gate switch 225. FIG. If a negative determination is made in step S601, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if affirmative determination is made in step S601, that is, if it is determined that the game ball has passed through the through gate 34, then in step S602, the number of suspensions of variable display performed by the normal symbol display device 41 is counted. It is determined whether or not the value of the normal hold counter Nc is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment). If a negative determination is made here, the processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the affirmative determination is made in step S602, that is, if it is confirmed that the game ball has passed through the through gate 34, and the value of the normal reservation counter Nc is <4, the process proceeds to step S603, and the normal reservation counter is reached. Increment Nc by one.

In addition, in the following step S604, a random number related to success or failure is obtained. Specifically, the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 updated in the random number update process of step S303 is stored in the first area of the free storage areas of the normal fluctuation reservation area of the RAM503. After that, the through gate passage processing ends.

FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing NMI interrupt processing, which is executed by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt, the state of the main controller 261 at the time of power failure is stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. FIG.

That is, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to power failure or the like, a power failure signal SK1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 501 in the main controller 261. FIG. Then, the CPU 501 interrupts the control being executed and starts NMI interrupt processing. finish.

The above NMI interrupt processing is also executed in the payout control device 311 in the same manner, and information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the backup area 513 a of the RAM 513 by such NMI interrupt. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SK1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311, and the CPU 511 interrupts the control being executed. to start the NMI interrupt processing in FIG. The contents are as described above.

Next, the flow of main processing executed by the CPU 501 in the main controller 261 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This main process is activated upon resetting when the power is turned on.

First, in step S101, initial setting processing is executed upon power-on. Specifically, in order to set a predetermined value in the stack pointer and wait for the sub-side control devices (sub-control device 262, payout control device 311, etc.) to become operable, for example, 1 Execute wait processing for about a second. In the following step S102, RAM access is permitted.

After that, data backup processing is executed for the RAM 503 in the CPU 501 . That is, in step S103, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 323 provided in the power supply device 313 is pressed (ON). do. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 323 has not been pressed, it is determined in the following step S104 whether or not the power failure occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 or not. Here, if it is not set, backup data is not stored, so in this case also, the process proceeds to step S112. If the power failure occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a, the RAM determination value is calculated in step S105, and in the subsequent step S106, it is determined whether or not the RAM determination value matches the RAM determination value saved at the time of power failure. , that is, determine the validity of the backup. If the RAM determination value calculated here does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power was turned off, the backed-up data is destroyed, and in this case also, the process proceeds to step S112.

In the processing of step S112, an initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the sub-control device 262, the payout control device 311, and the like. Thereafter, the process proceeds to RAM initialization processing (step S113, etc.). Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the work area address of the RAM 503 . Instead of using this RAM determination value, it is also possible to determine the validity of the backup based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 503 is correctly saved.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 is powered on while pressing the RAM erase switch 323 when it is desired to return to the initial state when the power is turned on, such as when the hall starts operating. Therefore, if the RAM erasing switch 323 is ON, the process proceeds to the RAM initialization process (step S113, etc.). Also, when power failure occurrence information is not set, or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.), the initialization process of the RAM 503 (step S113, etc.) is similarly performed. That is, the used area of the RAM 503 is cleared to 0 in step S113, and the initial value of the RAM 503 is set in the following step S114. After that, in step S111, interrupt permission is set, and the normal processing described later is performed.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 323 is not pressed (step S103: NO), the condition is that power failure occurrence information is set and that the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal. Then, the power recovery process (power recovery process) is executed. That is, in step S107, the stack pointer before power-off is restored, and in step S108, power-off occurrence information is cleared.

In step S109, a command is transmitted to return the sub-side control device to the gaming state at the time of power-off. In step S110, the used register is recovered from the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. FIG. After that, in step S111, interrupt permission is set, and the normal processing described later is performed.

Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flow chart of FIG. Main processing of the game is executed in this normal processing. As an overview, the processing of steps S201 to S211 is executed as periodic processing with a period of 4 msec, and the counter update processing of steps S212 and S213 is executed during the remaining time.

First, in step S201, a control signal based on the setting contents of the special display devices 43L, 43R, the starting prize winning device 33, etc., updated in the previous normal processing is transmitted to each device, or output data such as a command is sent to the sub side. Execute external output processing such as sending to each control device.

For example, when the decorative pattern display device 42 displays the decorative pattern in a variable manner, a variable pattern command, a pattern command, and the like are transmitted to the sub-control device 262 . In other words, the variation pattern command and the pattern command are output to the sub-control device 262 in order to cause the decorative pattern display device 42 to perform a display effect that matches the display performed by the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R. command. On the other hand, the sub-control device 262, which has input a variation pattern command, a pattern command, etc., determines the variation mode (variation time, effect mode, etc.) of the decorative pattern display device 42 based on such various commands, and determines the variation mode. on the decorative pattern display device 42 (variation display).

For convenience, the variation pattern command and the like will be described here. The variation pattern command includes information specifying the variation type of decorative symbols such as normal reach, super reach, and premium reach. Although the fluctuation pattern command and the like are originally a 2-byte binary number (output method similar to that of the pending information command), they are indicated by 4-bit hexadecimal numbers for the sake of convenience. In this embodiment, for example, in normal mode and latent mode, any one of "FF10", "FF11", "FF12", "FF13", "FF14", "FF15", and "FF16" is used as a variation pattern command. set. In addition, "FD10", "FD11", "FD12", "FD13", "FD14", "FD15", and "FD16" are set in the variable probability mode and the time reduction mode. On the other hand, the sub-control device 262 stores the relationship between these variation pattern commands and the variation types of decorative symbols in the form of a table. Then, the sub-control device 262 determines the effect pattern of the variable display based on the variation pattern command, and controls the display control device 45, sound, and the like.

Hereinafter, the variation type of decorative symbols and the correspondence relationship between the variation type and the variation pattern command will be described.

Normal reach is a reach pattern in which no special effects are displayed except for variations in decorative patterns. Then, "FF11" or "FD11" is set to the variation pattern command corresponding to the normal reach depending on the mode. In the probability variable mode and the time reduction mode, the variable display time is shortened compared to the normal mode and the latent probability mode even in various reach situations. For example, the variable display time from which the normal reach is derived is "15 seconds" in the normal mode and the latent probability mode, and "10 seconds" in the probability variable mode and the time reduction mode.

Super ready-to-win is a ready-to-win pattern in which a character or the like is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 42 in addition to the decorative patterns during the variable display of the decorative patterns (after establishment of the ready-to-win state), thereby giving the player a sense of expectation. be. In this embodiment, three types of super reach SR1, SR2, and SR3 are prepared as super reach, and the variable display time is different for each type of super reach. Then, if super reach SR1, "FF12" or "FD12" is set in the variation pattern command, if super reach SR2, "FF13" or "FD13" is set, and if super reach SR3, "FF14" or "FD14" is set.

Premium reach is a production mode that can be derived only when the jackpot state occurs, and during the variable display of decorative patterns (after the reach state is established), characters with patterns different from super reach are displayed in addition to decorative patterns. It is a reach pattern that is performed in a manner that is expected to give the player a sense of expectation. In the present embodiment, two types of premium reach PR1 and PR2 are prepared, and the variable display time differs for each type of premium reach. And if it is premium reach PR1, "FF15" or "FD15" will be set to a fluctuation pattern command. For premium reach PR2, "FF16" or "FD16" is set.

In addition, "FF10" or "FD10" is set as the variation pattern command corresponding to "completely out", which does not result in any reach state, depending on the mode. In this embodiment, the variable display time to be completely off is set to "10 seconds" in normal mode and latent probability mode, and "6 seconds" in probability variable mode and time reduction mode.

Further, the sub-control device 262 determines a stop pattern (combination of stop patterns) based on the symbol command, and displays it after the fluctuation time has elapsed. The symbol command is a command that causes the sub-control device 262 to determine the stop symbol, and includes a combination of probability variable jackpot symbols, a combination of normal jackpot symbols, a combination of front and back off symbols, a combination of symbols other than front and back off, and a complete off symbol. It designates five categories of combinations of These divisions are indicated by, for example, "AA11", "AA12", "AA13", "AA14", and "AA15", any one of which is set as a symbol command. On the other hand, the sub-control device 262 stores the relationship between these commands and the stop symbols in a table. Then, the sub-control device 262 stops displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the symbol command.

The classification of the stop symbols and the correspondence relationship between the stop symbols and the symbol commands will be described below. If you win a probability variable jackpot (“16RS” and “8RS”, hereinafter also referred to as “probability variable jackpot with balls”) that can increase the number of game balls, or a normal jackpot (“8RN”) that can increase the number of game balls (Hereinafter, also referred to as "normal jackpot with balls to be played"), the decorative pattern display device 42 stops and displays the decorative patterns with the number patterns in a combination of doubles. becomes. In the present embodiment, in the case of "probability variable jackpot with ball output", a probability variable jackpot pattern that is a combination of decorative patterns consisting of odd numbers of any of 1, 3, 5, 7, and 9, or 2 , 4, 6, or 8, which is a combination of ornamental patterns consisting of even-numbered doublets, the variable display is stopped and displayed, and in the case of "normal jackpot with payout balls" , the variable display is stopped and displayed in combination with normal jackpot symbols.

In the case of the probability variable jackpot with paid balls, the symbol command is set to "AA11", and in the case of the normal jackpot with paid balls, the symbol command is set to "AA12". Then, when "AA11" is set in the symbol command, the sub-control device 262 determines one of the combination of symbols consisting of any of double eyes from 1 to 9 as the stop symbol, and "AA12 is set, one of the combination of symbols consisting of any one of 2nd, 4th, 6th and 8th doubles is determined as the stop symbol.

The combination of front-rear deviating symbols corresponds to "front-rear deviating reach" in which the final stop symbol deviates from the ready-to-win pattern by one before and after the occurrence of the ready-to-win pattern and stops. "AA13" is set in the symbol command. In the present embodiment, the stop modes corresponding to "2RS", "2RN", and "minor win" are also combinations of front and rear deviated symbols. The combination of symbols other than front and back off corresponds to "Reach other than front and back off" in which the final stop symbol stops at a place other than the front and rear of the reach symbol after the occurrence of reach, and the symbol corresponding to the combination of symbols other than front and back off. "AA14" is set in the command. The combination of completely missing symbols corresponds to "completely missing" in which even reach does not occur, and "AA15" is set to the symbol command corresponding to the combination of completely missing symbols. In the present embodiment, when the decorative symbol display device 42 stops displaying a combination of front and rear missing symbols, a combination of symbols other than front and rear missing symbols, and a combination of completely missing symbols, the result is "missing".

Although details will be described later, when "AA13" to "AA15" are set in the symbol command, the sub-control device 262 stops symbol combinations stored in the counter buffer of the corresponding RAM 553. Determined as In the present embodiment, three commands "AA13" to "AA15" are prepared for the symbol command for failure. The configuration may be such that the sub-controller 262 determines the combination of decorative patterns.

Returning to the description of FIG. 10, in step S202, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated. More specifically, like the other counters, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are incremented by 1, and when their counter values reach the upper limit values (59 and 37 in this embodiment), they are cleared to 0. do. Then, the updated values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 503 .

In the subsequent step S203, the prize ball count signal received from the payout control device 311 is read. Next, in step S204, the abnormal payout signal received from the payout control device 311 is read.

Thereafter, in step S205, special display control processing is executed. In this process, the control of the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R is performed, as well as determination of a big hit, setting of variable display in the special display devices 43L and 43R and the decorative pattern display device 42, and the like. The details of this special display control process will be described later.

In step S206, a first variable winning device control process is executed. In this process, control regarding the first variable winning device 32a is performed. In the present embodiment, when winning the lottery based on the ball entering the first starting prize winning device 33a, the big win state or the small win state in which the first variable prize winning device 32a is opened is derived. there is Details of the first variable winning device control processing will be described later.

In step S207, a second variable winning device control process is executed. In this process, control regarding the second variable winning device 32b is performed. In the present embodiment, when winning the winning lottery based on the ball entering the second starting prize winning device 33b, a big win state or a small win state in which the second variable prize winning device 32b is opened is derived. there is The details of this second variable winning device control process will be described later.

In step S208, normal display control processing is executed. In this process, control relating to the normal symbol display device 41 is performed. The details of this normal display control process will be described later.

In step S209, a starting winning device control process is executed. In this process, control regarding the starting winning device 33 is performed. The details of this startup winning device control process will be described later.

After that, in step S210, it is determined whether information on the occurrence of power failure is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 or not. Here, if power failure occurrence information is not set in the backup area 503a, in step S211, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has come, that is, a predetermined time (4 msec in this example) has elapsed since the start of the previous normal process. ) has passed. Then, if the predetermined time has already passed, the process proceeds to step S201, and the processes after step S201 are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not passed since the start of the previous normal processing, the random number initial value counter CINI and the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal processing. It is repeatedly executed (steps S212 and S213).

That is, in step S212, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (599 in this example).

Also, in step S213, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated (similar to step S202). Specifically, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are incremented by 1, and cleared to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum values (59 and 37 in this example). Then, the changed values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 503 .

Here, since the execution time of each process of steps S201 to S210 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the success/failure random number counter C1) can be randomly updated, and similarly fluctuates. The type counters CS1 and CS2 can also be randomly updated.

Also, if the power failure occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 (step S210: YES), it means that the power has been shut down, so the processes from step S214 onward are performed as power failure processing at the time of power failure. will be In the power failure process, first, in step S214, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited. In step S215, the contents of each register used by the CPU 501 are saved in the stack area. memorize to

After that, in step S217, a power-off notification command indicating that the power has been cut off is transmitted to other control devices (payout control device 311, etc.). Then, in step S218, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored in the backup area 503a. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of RAM 503 . Thereafter, in step S219, RAM access is prohibited, and the infinite loop continues until the power supply is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed.

It should be noted that the process of step S210 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to the game state change performed at steps S201 to S209, or at the end of one cycle of the processes at steps S212 and S213 performed within the remaining time. It is executed at different times. Therefore, in the normal processing of the main controller 261, since information on occurrence of power failure is confirmed at the end of each processing, the amount of data to be stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 is smaller than when each processing is in progress. and can be easily memorized. In addition, when returning to the state before the power shutdown, since the amount of data stored in the backup area 503a is small, it can be easily restored, and the processing load on the main controller 261 can be reduced. . Furthermore, since the occurrence of interrupt processing is prohibited before data is stored (step S214), it is possible to prevent the data from being changed when the power is cut off, and the state before the power cut-off can be reliably stored. .

Next, the special display control processing in step S205 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. First, in step S801, it is determined whether or not the current state is other than the big win state or the small win state by referring to the win situation storage area which will be described later in detail. During the jackpot state, an opening period from when the specific display devices 43L and 43R stop displaying the display mode corresponding to the jackpot to when the first or second variable winning devices 32a and 32b are opened, A round period in which the first or second variable prize winning devices 32a, 32b are open, an interval period in which the first or second variable prize winning devices 32a, 32b are closed, and a special display device after the final round. There is an ending period until the variable display of 43L and 43R can be started. During the small win state, an opening period from when the display mode corresponding to the small win is stopped and displayed on the special display devices 43L and 43R to when the first or second variable winning devices 32a and 32b are opened; A round period in which the first or second variable prize winning devices 32a, 32b are open, an interval period in which the first or second variable prize winning devices 32a, 32b are closed, and a special display device after the final round. There is an ending period until the variable display of 43L and 43R can be started.

The win state storage area of the present embodiment stores "0" in states other than the big win state and the small win state, and stores "1" during the opening period and the interval period in the big win state and the small win state. , "2" is stored during the round period, and "3" is stored during the ending period. That is, in the step S801, it is determined whether or not "0" is stored in the win state storage area, and it is determined whether or not the player is in a big win state or a small win state. It should be noted that it is for convenience that numerical values such as "0" to "3" are stored in the winning situation storage area, and actually the winning situation storage area uses 2 bytes.

If a negative determination is made in step S801, that is, if it is in the state of a big hit or a small hit, the processing is terminated as it is. By looking at the setting status of the special figure display flag, it is determined whether or not the variable display is being performed by the first or second special display device 43L, 43R (decorative pattern display device 42). Specifically, when the special figure display flag is in the ON state, it is considered to be in variable display, and when the special figure display flag is in the OFF state, it is considered to be in the stopped display, which corresponds to the state in which the variable display is stopped. . In addition, although it will be described in detail later, the special figure display flag is turned on when starting the variable display of the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R, and the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R Turned off when the variable display is stopped.

Then, when a negative determination is made in step S802, that is, when it is not in the big win state or the small win state and is not in the variable display, the process proceeds to step S803, and is triggered by the ball entering the second starting prize winning device 33b. It is determined whether or not the value of the second suspension counter Nb that counts the number of suspensions of the variable display (second variable display) is greater than zero.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S803, that is, if even one second variation display is retained and stored, 1 is subtracted from the second retention counter Nb in step S804. Note that in this embodiment, if the second variable display is reserved and stored by the determination processing in step S803, the second variable display is executed without executing the first variable display. That is, even if the first variable display is retained and stored earlier than the second variable display, the second variable display is given priority (the first variable display is postponed). ing.

In subsequent step S805, a process of shifting the data stored in the second special change reservation area is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth reservation areas of the second special variable reservation area to the execution area side. The data in each area is shifted in the following order: area→reserved first area, reserved third area→reserved second area, reserved fourth area→reserved third area, and so on. After step S805, in step S806, processing for causing the change identification lamp 40 to emit red light is performed. Thereafter, in step S807, variable display setting processing, which will be described later in detail, is performed, and then this processing ends.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S803, that is, if no second variable display is retained and stored, in step S808, a variable display ( It is determined whether or not the first suspension counter Na that counts the number of suspensions in the first variable display) is greater than zero. If a negative determination is made in step S808, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S808, 1 is subtracted from the first suspension counter Na in step S809. In subsequent step S810, a process of shifting the data stored in the first special change reservation area is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth reservation areas of the first special variable reservation area to the execution area side. The data in each area is shifted in the following order: area→reserved first area, reserved third area→reserved second area, reserved fourth area→reserved third area, and so on. After step S810, in step S811, processing for causing the change identification lamp 40 to emit blue light is performed. After that, in step S807, variable display setting processing is performed, and this processing ends. In the present embodiment, there is only one execution area for the special change reservation area, and the data stored in the first special change reservation area and the second special change reservation area are used when performing a change display based on the data. will be shifted to the common execution area.

Here, the details of the variable display setting process in step S807 will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in step S901, a mode storage area, which will be described later in detail, is referred to, and it is determined whether or not it is in a high-probability state (variable probability mode or latent probability mode). The mode storage area stores discrimination information for discriminating the game mode. In this embodiment, the mode storage area stores any value of "11", "12", "21", and "22", where "11" corresponds to the normal mode and "12" corresponds to the time reduction mode, "21" corresponds to the variable probability mode, and "22" corresponds to the latent probability mode. That is, in step S901, it is determined whether or not the mode storage area stores "21" or "22", thereby determining whether or not the high probability state exists.

If the determination in step S901 is affirmative, that is, if it is in a high probability state (variable probability mode, latent probability mode), in step S902, the success or failure random number storage area of the execution area of the special change reservation area is taken into consideration. It is determined whether or not either the 1 or the second right/wrong flag (see right/wrong determination processing in FIG. 14) is set to ON. When the determination in step S902 is affirmative, that is, when it is determined that the jackpot has been won in the winning lottery in the high probability state, the process proceeds to step S904.

If a negative determination is made in step S901, that is, if the state is a low-probability state (normal mode, time reduction mode), then in step S903, the success/failure random number storage area is taken into consideration to determine whether the first success/failure flag is on. determine whether or not When the determination in step S903 is affirmative, that is, when it is determined that the jackpot has been won in the winning lottery in the low probability state, the process proceeds to step S904.

In step S904, a big win confirmation flag indicating that the occurrence of the big win state has been confirmed is set to ON. In the present embodiment, storing a value corresponding to confirmation of occurrence of a big win state in the win/fail random number storage area is referred to as turning on a big win confirmation flag.

In the subsequent step S905, referring to the variation storage area of the execution area of the special variation reservation area, whether or not the second variation flag is set to ON, that is, the variation display performed this time is sent to the second start winning device 33b. It is determined whether or not it is the second variable display for teaching the result of the winning lottery triggered by the entry of the ball. If the determination in step S905 is affirmative, in step S906, the 16RS flag (see type determination processing in FIGS. 15 and 16) is set to ON by referring to the winning type random number storage area in the execution area of the special change reservation area. Determine whether or not

If the determination in step S906 is affirmative, that is, if it is "16RS", 16RS pattern setting processing (processing for setting variation pattern commands and symbol commands) is performed in step S907. The 16RS pattern setting process is a process for executing a variation display for teaching the generation of "16RS". Determine the variation pattern (variation display time, effect pattern, etc.) of the display devices 43L, 43R and the decorative pattern display device 42, and set the variation pattern command and the pattern command based on the determination and various flags. The relationship between the numerical value of the first variation type counter CS1 and the reach pattern, and the relationship between the numerical value of the second variation type counter CS2 and the variation time are defined in advance by a table or the like. After step S907, the process proceeds to step S931, which will be described later.

Also, if the determination in step S906 is negative, in step S908, it is determined whether or not the 8RS flag is turned on by referring to the winning type random number storage area in the execution area of the special variation reservation area. If the determination in step S908 is affirmative, that is, if it is "8RS", 8RS pattern setting processing is performed in step S909. After step S909, the process proceeds to step S931.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S908 is negative, it is determined in step S910 whether or not the 2RN30 flag is set to ON. If the determination in step S910 is affirmative, 2RN30 pattern setting processing is performed in step S911. After step S911, the process proceeds to step S931.

Furthermore, if a negative determination is made in step S910, it is determined in step S912 whether or not the 2RN60 flag is set to ON. If the determination in step S912 is affirmative, 2RN60 pattern setting processing is performed in step S913. After step S913, the process proceeds to step S931.

In addition, if a negative determination is made in step S912, that is, if the 2RN90 flag is set to ON, 2RN90 pattern setting processing is performed in step S914. After step S914, the process proceeds to step S931.

In addition, when a negative determination is made in step S905, that is, when the variable display performed this time is the first variable display for teaching the result of the lottery triggered by the entry of the ball into the first start prize winning device 33a. In step S915, it is determined whether or not the 16RS flag is turned on by referring to the winning type random number storage area in the execution area of the special change reservation area.

If the determination in step S915 is affirmative, 16RS pattern setting processing is performed in step S916. After step S916, the process proceeds to step S931, which will be described later.

In addition, if the determination in step S915 is negative, in step S917, it is determined whether or not the 8RS flag is set to ON by referring to the winning type random number storage area in the execution area of the special variation reservation area. If an affirmative determination is made in step S917, that is, if "8RS", 8RS pattern setting processing is performed in step S918. After step S918, the process proceeds to step S931.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S917, it is determined in step S919 whether or not the 8RN flag is set to ON. If an affirmative determination is made in step S919, 8RN pattern setting processing is performed in step S920. After step S920, the process proceeds to step S931.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S919, that is, if the 2RS flag is set to ON, 2RS pattern setting processing is performed in step S921. After step S921, the process proceeds to step S931.

Also, if a negative determination is made in step S902, that is, if the jackpot is not won in the high probability state, in step S922, the success or failure random number storage area of the execution area of the special change reservation area is taken into consideration, and the first or It is determined whether or not the second small hit flag is set to ON. If the determination in step S922 is affirmative, that is, if it is determined that a small hit has been won in the winning lottery in the high probability state, in step S923, a small prize indicating that the occurrence of the small hit state has been confirmed. Set the hit confirmation flag to ON. Incidentally, in the present embodiment, to store a value corresponding to the determination of the occurrence of the small hit state in the success/failure random number storage area is referred to as turning on the small hit confirmation flag. Then, in step S924, after performing a small hit pattern setting process, it transfers to step S931.

Also, if a negative determination is made in step S903, that is, if the jackpot is not won in the low probability state, in step S925, the success or failure random number storage area of the execution area of the special change reservation area is taken into consideration, and the first small It is determined whether or not the hit flag is on. When it is determined affirmatively in the step S925, that is, when it is determined that a small hit is won in the lottery in the low probability state, the small hit determination flag is set to ON in step S923, and in step S924. After performing the small hit pattern setting process, it moves to step S931.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S922 or step S925, that is, if it is neither a big hit nor a small hit, in step S926, the reach random number storage area of the execution area of the special change reservation area is considered, and the front and rear flags (Fig. 17) is on. If the determination in step S926 is affirmative, that is, if it is the "front-back reach", the front-back reach pattern setting process is performed in step S927, and then the process proceeds to step S931.

Also, if the determination in step S926 is negative, in step S928, the reach random number storage area in the execution area of the special change reservation area is taken into consideration, and it is determined whether or not the flag other than before and after is on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S928, that is, if it is "reach other than front and back out", reach pattern setting processing other than front and back is performed in step S929, and then the process proceeds to step S931.

If the determination in step S928 is negative, that is, if the result is "complete failure", the failure variation pattern setting process is performed in step S930, and then the process proceeds to step S931.

In step S931, a special figure display flag indicating whether or not the special display devices 43L and 43R are performing variable display is set to ON. This indicates that the conditions for switching display (variable display) have been established in the special display devices 43L and 43R. In the following step S932, a setting process of a special figure display timer for measuring the fluctuation time (remaining time of fluctuation display) in the special display devices 43L and 43R is performed. The special figure display timer is considered when determining whether or not a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable display.

The variable display times of the special display devices 43L and 43R in this embodiment are set to values corresponding to the variable patterns selected by the variable type counters CS1 and CS2. Based on the setting of such a special figure display timer, in the external output process of the next normal process, when a control signal to the effect of starting the switching display (variable display) is output to the special display devices 43L and 43R , the special display devices 43L and 43R start switching display (variable display). In addition, the sub-control device 262, which has received the variation pattern command and the symbol command, starts the variation display on the decorative symbol display device 42 based on the variation pattern command at the same time as the special display devices 43L and 43R start to vary, and the special display device Simultaneously with the stop display of 43L and 43R, the variable display on the decorative pattern display device 42 is stopped and displayed by combining the patterns based on the pattern command. After step S932 ends, the variable display setting process ends.

In the present embodiment, in the starting prize-winning process, the value of the success/failure random number counter C1 in steps S504 and S512 is acquired and stored in the special variable holding area, the success/failure determination process in steps S505 and S513, and the variable display setting. In the process, a win/fail lottery is constituted by steps S901 to S903, steps S922, and S925 for judging win/fail based on win/fail flags, small hit flags, and the situation at that time. Further, the processing of steps S901 to S903, S922, S925 and the like constitute a second right/wrong determination processing, and steps S907, S909, S911, S913, S914, S916, S918, S920, S921, The process of step S927, step S929, step S930, etc. constitutes the variable display setting process.

Returning to the description of FIG. 19, when the determination is affirmative in step S802, that is, when the variable display is in progress, the process proceeds to step S812 to perform subtraction processing of the special figure display timer. Each time this process is performed, the value of the special figure display timer is decremented by 4 msec. For example, if the variation time is 10 seconds (10000 msec), "2500" is set for the special figure display timer, and 1 is subtracted every 4 msec.

Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S813, and it is determined whether or not a predetermined fluctuation time has passed by taking into consideration the value of the special figure display timer after the subtraction. At this time, when the predetermined fluctuation time has passed, that is, when the value of the special figure display timer becomes "0", step S813 is affirmatively determined.

If a negative determination is made in step S813, in step S817, switching display setting is performed to continue the switching display (variable display) of the special display devices 43L and 43R, and this processing ends. In addition, based on the setting contents of the switching display setting, a control signal for switching display is output to the special display devices 43L and 43R in the external output processing in the next normal processing. As a result, switching display (variable display) of the special display devices 43L and 43R is realized at the timing of the special display control process, that is, every 4 ms.

On the other hand, when the affirmative determination is made in step S813, the special figure displaying flag is turned off in step S814, and the stop display setting for performing stop display on the special display devices 43L and 43R is performed in step S815. Based on the setting contents of the stop display setting, a control signal for performing stop display is output to the special display devices 43L and 42R in the next external output process in the normal process. That is, it is stopped and displayed in a stop mode corresponding to each jackpot type, loss, or the like. Also, a control signal is output to the sub-control device 262 to the effect that the decorative pattern display device 42 is to be stopped. As a result, the stop timings of the special display devices 43L and 42R and the decorative design display device 42 are reliably synchronized. However, since the stop mode of the decorative pattern display device 42 has already been determined by the sub-controller 262 according to the pattern command and the variation pattern command output at the start of the variable display, the information about the stop mode of the decorative pattern display device 42 is need not be added. In addition, although it will be repeated, the stop display by such special display devices 43L and 43R is the main display, and the display of the decorative design by the decorative design display device 42 is only an auxiliary one (for production). there is

Subsequently, in step S816, after initial setting of the winning state and determination information setting processing for measuring the period of the time reduction mode are performed, this processing is terminated. Here, the determination information setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 21 .

First, in step S1001, the success/failure random number storage area of the execution area of the special variation reservation area is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the big hit determination flag is set to ON. If the determination in step S1001 is affirmative, in step S1002, it is determined whether or not the 16RS flag is set to ON by referring to the winning type random number storage area in the execution area of the special variation reservation area.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S1002, in step S1003, "16" is set to a round number counter for determining the number of rounds (the number of times the variable winning device 32 is opened) to be executed during the jackpot state. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1002, it is determined in step S1004 whether or not the 2RS flag or the 2RN flag (2RN30, 2RN60, 2RN90) is set to ON.

If the determination in step S1004 is negative, that is, if the 8RS flag or 8RN flag is set to ON, in step S1005, the round number counter is set to "8". After step S1003 or step S1005, the process proceeds to step S1006.

In step S1006, "1" is set in the win situation storage area. In the following step S1007, a value "2000" corresponding to an opening period of, for example, 8 seconds is set to the special variable timer used for control during the winning state (opening/closing control of the first and second variable prize winning devices 32a and 32b). set. Subsequently, in step S1008, the winning counter for counting the number of game balls that have entered the first and second variable winning devices 32a and 32b is set to 8, which is the maximum number of winning balls per round. set to "8" to indicate The value of the winning counter is determined by the first and second count switches 223a to determine whether or not a ball has entered the first and second variable winning devices 32a and 32b during the switch reading process (see FIG. 11) of the timer interrupt process. , 223b, and if it is determined that a ball has entered the first and second variable prize winning devices 32a, 32b, 1 is subtracted.

Then, in step S1009, an opening command for notifying the sub-controller 262 of the start of the winning state is set. The opening command includes winning type information and the like, so that even the sub-control device 262 can grasp the total number of rounds in the winning state. After step S1009, the process ends.

In addition, in the jackpot state, the promotion of the appearance of the jackpot type, etc. or teaches that "16RS" has been won in the jackpot state immediately after when the odd double number is stopped and displayed on the decorative pattern display device 42). .

Further, when the determination in step S1001 is negative, that is, when it is determined that the win is not a big hit, the process proceeds to step S1010. In step S1010, the hit/fail random number storage area of the execution area of the special change reservation area is taken into consideration, and it is determined whether or not the small hit determination flag is set to ON.

If affirmative determination is made in step S1010 (small hit), or if affirmative determination is made in step S1004 ("2RS" or "2RN"), in step S1011, "2" is set to the round number counter. set. After step S1011, in step S1012, "1" is set in the win situation storage area. In the following step S1013, the value "500" corresponding to the opening period of, for example, 2 seconds is set to the special variable timer. Set command. After that, this process is terminated.

Also, if neither the big win nor the small win is determined in step S1010, then in step S1016 it is determined whether or not "12" is stored in the mode storage area, that is, the time reduction mode. or not. If a negative determination is made in step S1016, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S1016 is affirmative, in step S1017, the value of the variation number counter is subtracted by 1 in order to measure the duration of the time reduction mode. Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, at the end of the jackpot state of "8RN", "2RN30", "2RN60", and "2RN90", the fluctuation display corresponding to the period of the time reduction mode is displayed on the fluctuation counter. is set, and 1 is subtracted in the step S1010 each time the special display devices 43L and 43R (decorative pattern display device 42) are displayed once.

In the subsequent step S1018, it is determined whether or not the value of the variation number counter is "0". If a negative determination is made in step S1018, that is, at the end of the winning state, the special display devices 43L, 43R (decorative pattern display device 42) for the specified number of times set as the period of the time reduction mode are still displayed. If not, the processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S1018 is affirmative, in step S1019, "11" is set in the mode storage area to indicate the normal mode. That is, when the special display devices 43L and 43R perform the variable display for a specified number of times, the time reduction mode ends and the mode shifts to the normal mode. After step S1019, in step S1020, after setting a time-saving end command for informing the sub-control device 262 of the end of the time-saving mode, this process is ended. In the present embodiment, the processing for initializing the small winning state and the processing for initializing the big winning states of 2RS and 2RN are shared, but they may be performed separately.

Next, the first variable winning device control processing for opening and closing the first variable winning device 32a in step S206 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S1201, it is determined whether or not the value set in the winning state storage area is "0", thereby determining whether or not the state is other than the big winning state and the small winning state. If the determination in step S1201 is affirmative, that is, if the state is neither a big hit state nor a small hit state, the processing is terminated as it is. By the way, at the start of the big win state or the small win state, "1" is set in the win situation storage area in the determination information setting process.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1201, that is, if it is in a big hit state or a small hit state (if any of "1" to "3" is set in the hit situation storage area), step S1202 , it is determined whether or not the first variation flag is turned on in the execution area of the special variation reservation area. If a negative determination is made in step S1202, this processing ends.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1202, the process proceeds to step S1203, and 1 is subtracted from the value of the special variable timer. Incidentally, at the start of the big hit state or the small hit state, "2000" or "500" is set to the special variable timer in the determination information setting process.

In subsequent step S1204, it is determined whether or not the value of the special variable timer is "0". If an affirmative determination is made in step S1204, it is determined in step S1205 whether or not "1" is set in the win situation storage area.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1205, then in step S1206 "2" is set in the win situation storage area. In the subsequent step S1207, it is determined whether or not there is a jackpot with balls. Here, any one of "16RS", "8RS", and "8RN", which are jackpots with balls that can be awarded in the case of winning in the winning lottery that is triggered by the entry of the ball into the first start prize winning device 33a. It is determined whether or not there is (whether it is other than "2RS").

When an affirmative determination is made in step S1207, in step S1208, a value "7500" corresponding to the time (30 seconds) for maintaining the open state of the first variable winning device 32a is set to the special variable timer. On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S1207, in step S1209, the value "100" corresponding to the time (0.4 seconds) for maintaining the open state of the first variable winning device 32a for the special variable timer. set.

After step S1208 or step S1209, in step S1210, a process of opening the first variable prize winning device 32a is performed, and in step S1211, the sub-control device 262 is informed of the start of the round. Set command. After that, this process is terminated.

Also, if the determination in step S1205 is negative, it is determined in step S1212 whether or not "3" is set in the win situation storage area. Although details will be described later, "3" is set in the win situation storage area when all rounds in the big win state or the small win state are completed and the ending period is started. If a negative determination is made in step S1212, that is, if it is not yet time to end the big win state or small win state, the value of the round number counter is subtracted by 1 in step S1213.

In subsequent step S1214, it is determined whether or not the value of the round number counter is "0". If a negative determination is made in step S1214, that is, if there are still rounds to be executed, the process moves to step S1215, and "1" is set in the win situation storage area. After that, in step S1216, it is determined whether or not there is a jackpot with balls.

If the determination in step S1216 is affirmative, in step S1217 a value "1000" corresponding to the interval time (4 seconds) is set for the special variable timer. On the other hand, if the determination in step S1216 is negative, in step S1218 a value "250" corresponding to the interval time (1 second) is set for the special variable timer.

After step S1217 or step S1218, in step S1219, the winning counter is set to "8". Further, in step S1220, a process of closing the first variable prize winning device 32a is performed, and in step S1221, an interval command is set to inform the sub-controller 262 of the information to start the interval. After that, this process is terminated.

Also, if the determination in step S1204 is negative, that is, if the time (open time or closed time) to maintain the open state or closed state of the first variable prize winning device 32a remains, the process proceeds to step S1222. , determines whether or not the value of the winning counter that measures the number of balls entering the first variable winning device 32a is "0". The winning counter is set to "8", which is the upper limit of the number of winnings per round (predetermined number) at the start of the big win state or the small win state and the start of the interval. Then, 1 is subtracted each time a game ball enters the first variable winning device 32a.

If a negative determination is made in step S1222, the process ends. On the other hand, if the determination in step S1222 is affirmative, that is, if the round end opportunity has arrived without waiting for the set period of the round to elapse, the process proceeds to step S1213. As a result, when eight game balls enter the variable prize winning device 32 during one round, the round is promptly terminated at that point even if the opening period of 30 seconds has not passed. Become.

If the determination in step S1214 is affirmative, that is, if all the rounds in the big win state or small win state have been completed, the process moves to step S1223, and "3" is set in the win situation storage area. After step S1223, in step S1224, it is determined whether or not there is a jackpot with balls. If the determination in step S1224 is affirmative, in step S1225 a value "2500" corresponding to the ending time (10 seconds) is set for the special variable timer. On the other hand, if the determination in step S1224 is negative, in step S1226 a value "250" corresponding to the ending time (1 second) is set for the special variable timer.

After step S1225 or step S1226, in step S1227, the winning counter is set to "7". In addition, when the processing for setting the ending after step S1223 is performed in the flow after the affirmative determination is made in step S1222, the value of the winning counter is "0". If the value of the prize winning counter is set to "0" at the start of the ending period, the first variable prize winning device control process after 4 msec will suddenly result in an affirmative determination in step S1222, and the ending period will not be completed. Can not. Therefore, in step S1227, a provisional value other than "0" ("7" in this example) is set in the winning counter so that the ending period can be completed. Of course, another method may be used to complete the ending period.

After step S1227, in step S1228, a process for closing the first variable prize winning device 32a is performed, and in subsequent step S1229, an ending command is set to inform the sub-control device 262 of starting the ending. . After that, this process is terminated.

Also, if the determination in step S1212 is affirmative, that is, if the ending period has ended and the time to end the jackpot state has arrived, the process proceeds to step S1230, and end setting processing is performed. In the end setting process, setting of the mode storage area and setting of the change number counter are performed.

Here, the termination setting process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S1401, the success/failure random number storage area of the execution area of the special change reservation area is taken into consideration, and it is determined whether or not the small hit determination flag is set to ON. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1401, the process ends. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1401, in step S1402, the winning type random number storage area in the execution area of the special variation reservation area is referenced to determine whether or not the 8RN flag is set to ON.

If the determination in step S1402 is affirmative, in step S1403 a value "12" corresponding to the time reduction mode is set in the mode storage area. As a result, the time reduction mode is provided after the end of the jackpot state.

In the following step S1404, "90" is set for the variation counter. Note that the fluctuation number counter indicates that when "12" is set in the mode storage area, that is, when the time reduction mode is started, the fluctuation display for the specified number of times set as the period of the time reduction mode is completed. It is intended to grasp the fact that After step S1404, in step S1415, a time saving start command for informing the start of the time saving mode to the sub-controller 262 is set. After that, this process is terminated.

Also, if the determination in step S1402 is negative, in step S1405, the winning type random number storage area in the execution area is referenced to determine whether or not the 2RN90 flag is set to ON. If the determination in step S1405 is affirmative, the process proceeds to step S1403 as in the case where the 8RN flag is set to ON.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S1405 is negative, it is determined in step S1406 whether or not the 2RN60 flag is set to ON. If the determination in step S1406 is affirmative, in step S1407, "12" is set in the mode storage area, in step S1408, the variation counter is set to "60", and in step S1415, the time saving start command is set, and then this process ends.

Furthermore, if a negative determination is made in step S1406, it is determined in step S1409 whether or not the 2RN30 flag is set to ON. If the determination in step S1409 is affirmative, in step S1410, "12" is set in the mode storage area, in step S1411, the variation counter is set to "30", and in step S1415, the time saving start command is set, and then this process ends.

If a negative determination is made in step S1409, it is determined in step S1412 whether or not the 2RS flag is set to ON. If the determination in step S1412 is affirmative, "22" is set in the mode storage area in step S1413. As a result, the latent probability mode is provided after the end of the jackpot state. After step S1413, in step S1416, a latent certainty start command for informing the sub-controller 262 of starting the latent certainty mode is set. After that, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S1412 is negative, "21" is set in the mode storage area in step S1414. As a result, the variable probability mode is given after the end of the jackpot state. After step S1414, in step S1417, a variable probability start command for informing the start of the variable probability mode to the sub-controller 262 is set. After that, this process is terminated.

Returning to the description of FIG. 22, after step S1230, in step S1231, "0" is set in the winning state storage area to indicate that the state is neither a big winning state nor a small winning state. After that, in step S1232, after setting a hit end command to convey information to the effect that the big win state or the small win state is ended to the sub-control device 262, this process is ended. The hit end command includes information such as the number of times of the variation counter set in the end setting process.

In addition, in the second variable winning device control processing of step S207 of the normal processing (see FIG. 10), the target of the opening/closing control is basically the second variable winning device 32b in contrast to the first variable winning device control processing. The only difference is that it is executed when the second variation flag is set to ON, and it is determined whether it is 16RS or 8RS when determining whether it is a jackpot with balls, so the description thereof is omitted. do.

Next, the normal display control processing in step S208 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S2101, it is determined whether or not the normal pattern display flag indicating whether or not the normal pattern display device 41 is performing variable display is on. In addition, when the normal pattern display flag is ON, it is considered that the normal pattern display device 41 is in the process of variable display.

If the determination in step S2101 is negative, the process advances to step S2102 to determine whether or not the value of the normal hold counter Nc is greater than zero. At this time, if the value of the normal reservation counter Nc is 0, the process is terminated.

In addition, when the negative determination is made in step S2102, that is, when the variable display of normal symbols is not even one, the process is finished as it is. On the other hand, if the determination in step S2102 is affirmative, 1 is subtracted from the normal hold counter Nc in step S2103.

In the subsequent step S2104, a process of shifting the data stored in the normal variation reservation area is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth reserve areas of the normal variable reserve area to the execution area side. The data in each area is shifted in the order of reserved first area, reserved third area→reserved second area, reserved fourth area→reserved third area, and so on.

After that, in step S2105, normal pattern fluctuation setting processing for setting and starting the normal pattern fluctuation display in the normal pattern display device 41 is executed.

Here, with reference to Drawing 25, normal figure fluctuation setting processing is explained. First, in step S2301, the normal pattern display flag indicating that the normal pattern display device 41 is normally displaying the variable pattern is turned on. In the following step S2302, the win situation storage area is referenced to determine whether or not "0" is stored, that is, whether the current state is other than the big win state or the small win state. If the determination in step S3202 is affirmative, that is, if neither the big win state nor the small win state, in step S2303, whether or not the value "12" or "21" is stored in the mode storage area. That is, it is determined whether or not the player is in a high ball entry state (shortening time mode or variable probability mode).

When the affirmative determination is made in step S2303, in step S2304, for the normal pattern display timer for measuring the fluctuation time (residual time) of the fluctuation display performed by the normal pattern display device 41, the normal pattern fluctuation display time Set to "100" for 0.4 seconds.

After that, in step S2305, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol random number counter C4 in the execution area of the normal variation reservation area is "0". In addition, in the high ball entry state, when the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4, which takes a value in the range of "0 to 99", is "1 to 99", the win is won.

If a negative determination is made in step S2305, that is, if the ball-entering support lottery for whether or not to open the second starting prize-winning device 33b is won, in step S2306, it is determined that the ball-entering support lottery has been won. Turn on the ball entry support flag that indicates. After step S2306, or if an affirmative determination is made in step S2305, this process ends.

In addition, step S2302 or, when the negative determination is made in step S2303, that is, when it is in the jackpot state, the small hit state, or the low ball entering state, in step S2307, the general pattern display timer is set to the normal pattern. "2000" is set to set the variable display time to 8 seconds. Furthermore, in step S2308, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol random number counter C4 in the execution area of the normal variation reservation area is "1". In addition, in the low ball entry state, when the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4, which takes a value in the range of "0 to 99", is "1", the win is won.

If the determination in step S2308 is affirmative, that is, if the ball-entering support lottery is won, a ball-entering support flag indicating that the ball-entering support lottery has been won is set to ON in step S2309. After step S2309, or if a negative determination is made in step S2308, this process ends.

Returning to the description of FIG. 24, this processing ends after step S2105. In addition, based on the setting in the normal pattern fluctuation setting process, in the external output process of the next normal process, when the control signal to the effect of starting the fluctuation display is normally output to the design display device 41, the normal design display device At 41 the variable display is started. As described above, the normal symbol display device 41 is configured to display "O" or "X" as normal symbols, and if "O" is displayed, "X" or "X" is displayed. If so, the display is switched (changed) to "○".

In addition, when the affirmative determination is made in step S2101, that is, when the normal symbol display device 41 is performing variable display, the process proceeds to step S2106 to perform processing for subtracting the normal symbol display timer. Each time this process is performed, the count value of the normal diagram display timer is decremented by 1.

Subsequently, in step S2107, it is determined whether or not the count value of the normal diagram display timer is "0", that is, whether or not the fluctuation time has elapsed. When affirmative determination is made in step S2107, the flag during normal pattern display is turned off in step S2108, and normal pattern stop display setting for performing stop display on the normal pattern display device 41 is performed in step S2109. And, based on the setting contents of this normal figure stop display setting, in the external output process in the next normal process, a control signal to the effect that the normal symbol display device 41 performs stop display is output. That is, when winning (when the entry support flag is set to ON), the "○" pattern (winning pattern) is stopped and displayed (eg, lit for a few seconds), and when it is out, "X" Stop displaying the pattern.

Then, it progresses to step S2110, normal figure discrimination|determination information setting processing is performed, and this processing is complete|finished. Here, normal figure discrimination information setting processing will be described with reference to FIG. 26 .

First, in step S2401, it is determined whether or not the ball entry support flag is set to ON. If a negative determination is made in step S2401, this processing ends. On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S2401, in step S2402, a normal variable flag for determining whether or not the second starting prize winning device 33b is in the open state is set to ON.

In the subsequent step S2403, it is determined whether or not one of "12, 21" is stored in the mode storage area, that is, whether or not the player is in a high ball entry state. When an affirmative determination is made in step S2403, in step S2404, the opening time of the second starting prize winning device 33b is set to 4 for the normal variable timer for measuring the opening time (remaining time) of the second starting prize winning device 33b. Set to "1000" for seconds.

Further, in step S2405, an opening number counter for counting the number of times (remaining number of times) to open the second starting prize winning device 33b is set to "3" so as to open the second starting prize winning device 33b three times. After step S2405, the entry support flag is turned off in step S2408, and the support period flag is turned on in step S2409. Furthermore, in step S2410, after setting the second starting prize winning device 33b to the open state, this process ends.

In addition, when the negative determination is made in step S2403, that is, when the ball is in a low ball entry state, in step S2406, the opening time of the second starting prize winning device 33b is set to 0.4 seconds with respect to the normal variable timer. Set "100". In the following step S2407, "1" is set to the opening counter to open the second starting prize winning device 33b once. After step S2407, in step S2408, the ball entry support flag is turned off, in step S2409, the support period flag is turned on, and in step S2410, after setting the second start winning device 33b to the open state, End this process.

Returning to the description of FIG. 24, when the negative determination is made in step S2107, in step S2111, the switching display setting for continuing the switching display (variable display) of the normal symbol display device 41 is performed, and this processing is executed. finish. Then, based on the setting contents of the switching display setting, a control signal for performing switching display is output to the normal symbol display device 41 in the external output processing in the next normal processing. Specifically, if the current lighting is "o", the display is switched to "x", and if it is "x", the display is switched to "o". As a result, switching display (variable display) of the normal symbol display device 41 is realized at the timing of the normal display control process, that is, every 4 ms.

Next, the starting winning device control processing in step S209 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S2201, it is determined whether or not the support period flag is on. If a negative determination is made in step S2201, the processing ends. On the other hand, if the determination in step S2201 is affirmative, the value of the normal variable timer is subtracted by 1 in step S2202. In subsequent step S2203, it is determined whether or not the normal variable flag is on. If the determination in step S2203 is affirmative, that is, if the second starting prize winning device 33b is open, it is determined in step S2204 whether or not the value of the normal variable timer is "0". If a negative determination is made in step S2204, that is, if the predetermined opening time of the second start-up winning device 33b has not yet passed, this process ends.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S2204 is affirmative, the process proceeds to step S2205 to turn off the normal variable flag. In the subsequent step S2206, the value of the open number counter is subtracted by 1, and in step S2207, the second starting prize winning device 33b is set to be closed.

After that, in step S2208, it is determined whether or not the value of the opening number counter is "0". If the determination in step S2208 is affirmative, the support period flag is turned off in step S2209, and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2208, that is, the winning ball entry support lottery was performed in the variable probability mode or the time reduction mode, and the second starting prize winning device 33b is opened three times based on that. If there is a remaining number of times, a value (for example, "100") corresponding to the interval time is set for the normal variable timer in step S2210. After step S2210, the process ends.

Further, if the determination in step S2203 is negative, that is, if it is the interval period during which the second start-up prize winning device 33b is opened three times (the second start-up prize winning device 33b is in a closed state), the process proceeds to step S2211. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal variable timer is "0". If a negative determination is made in step S2211, that is, if the interval period has not yet passed, this process ends.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S2211 is affirmative, the normal variable flag is turned on in step S2212, and a value corresponding to the opening time ("1000" in this example) is set for the normal variable timer in step S2213. In step S2214, after setting the second starting prize winning device 33b to the open state, this process is terminated.

Next, the payout control executed by the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311 will be described. For convenience of explanation, first the reception interrupt processing will be described with reference to FIG. 28, and then the main processing will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing reception interrupt processing executed by the payout control device 311. As shown in FIG. The reception interrupt process is a process that is executed by interrupting when the payout control device 311 receives a command transmitted from the main control device 261 . When the payout control device 311 confirms that the command transmitted from the main control device 261 has been received, other processing executed by the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311 is put on standby for a while, and reception interrupt processing is executed. When the reception interrupt process is executed, the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is first stored in the command buffer of the RAM 513 in step S3001, and the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is stored in step S3002. Turns on the command reception flag and terminates this reception interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is stored in the command buffer, the storage pointer is referenced and stored in a predetermined storage area, and the storage pointer is used to store the next received command in the next storage area. is updated.

Note that in this embodiment, the reception processing of a command transmitted from the main controller 261 is performed by an interrupt processing executed when the command is received. In timer interrupt processing, it is checked whether a command has been received before command determination processing (step S3201) is performed, and if a command has been received, the command is stored in the command buffer of RAM 513. The command reception flag may be turned on, and if the command has not been received, the process may proceed to the command determination process. In such a case, whether or not the command has been received is checked by checking the port corresponding to the command input of the input/output port at predetermined intervals.

Next, the main processing of the payout control device 311 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing the main processing of the payout control device 311, and this main processing is activated when the power is turned on.

First, in step S3101, initial setting processing is executed upon power-on. Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer, and an interrupt mode is set. Then, RAM access is permitted in step S3103, and an external interrupt vector is set in step S3104.

After that, in step S3106, it is determined whether information on the occurrence of power failure is set in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513 or not. If power failure occurrence information is set in the backup area 513a, the RAM determination value is calculated in step S3107. No, that is, the validity of the backup is determined. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the work area address of RAM 513 . It is also possible to determine the effectiveness of the backup by checking whether the keywords written in a predetermined area of the RAM 513 are correctly saved.

If power failure occurrence information is not set in step S3106, or if backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) in step S3108, the process proceeds to initialization processing of the RAM 513 after step S3115. Transition.

At step S3115, the entire area of the RAM 513 is cleared to 0, and at step S3116 the initial value of the RAM 513 is set. Thereafter, in step S3117, the CPU peripheral device is initialized, and in step S3114 the interrupt is permitted.

On the other hand, on the condition that power failure occurrence information is set in step S3106, and that the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal in step S3108, processing at the time of power recovery process). That is, in step S3109, the stack pointer before the power cutoff is restored, in step S3110, the power cutout occurrence information is cleared, and in step S3111, the payout permission flag for permitting the payout of prize balls is cleared. In step S3112, the CPU peripheral device is initialized, and in step S3113, the used register is restored from the backup area 513a of the RAM 513. FIG. Further, in step S3114, interrupts are permitted.

After the interruption is permitted in step S3114, in the process of step S3122, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is set in the backup area 513a. Here, if the information on the occurrence of power failure is set, it means that the power has been shut off, so the processing from step S3123 onwards is performed as power failure processing at the time of power failure. In the power failure process, first, in step S3123, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited, and in the next step S3124, command determination processing, which will be described later, is executed. After that, in step S3125, the contents of each register used by the CPU 511 are saved in the stack area, in step S3126 the value of the stack pointer is stored in the backup area 513a, and in step S3127 the RAM determination value is calculated and stored in the backup area 513a. , the RAM access is prohibited in step S3128, and the infinite loop continues until the power supply is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area backed up in the RAM 513 .

In the processing of step S3122, the power failure occurrence information is confirmed after the processing that is performed when the power is turned on is completed. less and can be easily memorized. In addition, when returning to the state before the power shutdown, since the amount of data stored in the backup area 513a is small, the return can be easily performed, and the processing load of the payout control device 311 can be reduced. .

Next, timer interrupt processing of the payout control device 311 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This timer interrupt process is started periodically (with a cycle of 2 msec in this embodiment).

In the timer interrupt processing, first, a command is acquired from the main control device 261, and determination processing of the command is performed (step S3201). This command determination processing will be described below with reference to FIG.

FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing command determination processing performed by the payout control device 311. FIG. In the command determination process (steps S3124, S3201), first, it is determined whether or not the command reception flag is turned on in step S3301. The command reception flag is turned on when a command transmitted from main controller 261 is received in the above-described reception interrupt processing (see FIG. 28).

If it is determined in step S3301 that the command reception flag is off, no new command has been received from the main controller 261, so this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command reception flag is on in step S3301, the received command is read from the RAM 513 in step S3302, and the command reception flag is turned off in step S3303. By turning off the command reception flag in step S3303, the processing of steps S3302 to S3311 can be skipped until a new command is received, so the control of the payout control device 311 can be reduced.

The type of command read out from the RAM 513 is discriminated in the processing of steps S3304 to S3306. In step S3304, it is determined whether or not the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is a payout initialization command, in step S3305 it is determined whether or not it is a payout return command, and in step S3306 whether it is a prize ball command It is determined whether or not

If the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is a payout initialization command, it is determined whether or not the payout permission flag is already turned on in step S3307. Since the controller 261 has instructed the initialization of the RAM 513, the work area (area) of the RAM 513 other than the stack area is cleared to 0 in step S3308, and the initial value of the RAM 513 is set in step S3309. After that, in step S3311, the payout permission flag is turned on, and the payout permission of prize balls is set.

As described above, the main controller 261 performs the initialization process of the RAM 503 after transmitting the payout initialization command, and the payout control device 311 initializes the RAM 513 after receiving the payout initialization command. is performed, the timing at which the RAM 503 is initialized and the timing at which the RAM 513 is initialized are substantially the same. Therefore, even if the payout control device 311 receives a command transmitted from the main control device 261, the RAM 513 is initialized due to the timing of initialization being shifted, and control corresponding to the received command cannot be performed. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of harmful effects. Also, since the payout permission flag is turned on after the RAM 513 is initialized, the payout permission of prize balls can be reliably set.

On the other hand, if the payout permission flag is already turned on in step S3307, this command determination process is terminated without clearing the work area of the RAM 513 and initializing the RAM 513. FIG. That is, the process of step S3307 prohibits the RAM 513 from being initialized while the payout permission flag is set. Since the payout initialization command is a command that is transmitted only when the RAM erase switch 323 is turned on when the power is turned on, it will not be received with the payout permission flag turned on. It is conceivable that the payout control device 311 has recognized it as a payout initialization command due to the influence of noise or the like. Therefore, if the work area of the RAM 513 is cleared (step S3308) and the initial value of the RAM 513 is set (step S3309) while the payout permission flag is turned on, it will not be paid out if there are prize balls remaining. A bad effect occurs and a loss is given to the player, but since the RAM 513 is prevented from being initialized while the payout permission flag is turned on, the loss to the player can be prevented.

Also, if the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is a payout return command (step S3304: NO, step S3305: YES), the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 return to the state before the power shutdown, In order to permit the payout of prize balls, the payout permission flag is turned on in step S3311. That is, when there is power-off occurrence information and the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 return to the state before the power-off, payout of prize balls is permitted. When the payout permission flag is turned on in the process of step S3311, the process based on the command stored in the predetermined storage area of the command buffer is completed, so the read pointer is set to the read pointer corresponding to the next storage area. Updated.

Furthermore, if the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is a prize ball command (step S3305: NO, step S3306: YES), in step S3310, the received number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls and stored. , the payout permission flag is turned on in step S3311 to allow the payout of prize balls. At this time, the payout control device 311 sequentially reads the prize ball commands stored in the command buffer (ring buffer), and adds the number of prize balls corresponding to the commands to the total number of prize balls stored in a predetermined buffer area. and memorize it. Since the payout of prize balls corresponding to the number of prize balls is performed based on the prize ball command transmitted from the main controller 261, the prize ball command is a payout instruction command for instructing the payout of prize balls. . In addition, when the prize ball command is received, the payout permission is set immediately, so the prize balls can be paid out early for the win. When the payout permission flag is turned on in the process of step S3311, the process based on the command stored in the predetermined storage area of the command buffer is completed, so the read pointer is set to the read pointer corresponding to the next storage area. Updated.

It should be noted that the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is neither a payout initialization command (step S3304: NO), nor a payout return command (step S3305: NO), nor a prize ball command (step S3306: NO), The command determination process is ended without turning on the payout permission flag.

Here, returning to the flowchart of FIG. 30, description will be made. When the command determination process ends, it is determined in step S3202 whether or not the payout permission flag is turned on in the command determination process. Here, if the payout permission flag is not turned on, this processing is terminated as it is. In other words, it is possible to prevent the prize balls from being paid out before the command is transmitted from the main controller 261 .

On the other hand, if the determination in step S3202 is affirmative, the firing control device 312 is set to permit firing in step S3203, and the state return switch 321 is checked in step S3204. Execute the return operation. By this processing, when the state recovery switch 321 is pressed when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging occurs in the dispensing motor 358a, the dispensing motor 358a is rotated forward and reverse, and the ball clogging is eliminated (return to normal state). planned.

After that, in step S3205, the setting of the lower tray full state or the lower tray full state canceled state is executed according to the change in the state of the lower tray 15. FIG. That is, the full state of the lower tray 15 is determined by the detection signal of the lower tray full switch. , execute the setting of the lower tray full state release state. Further, in step S3206, setting of the no-ball-in-tank state (out-of-ball state) or no-ball-in-tank canceled state (with-ball state) is executed according to the change in the state of the ball in the tank. That is, the no-ball-in-tank state is determined by the detection signal of the no-ball-in-tank switch, the no-ball-in-tank state, the no-ball-in-tank state is set, the no-ball-in-tank state, and the no-tank-ball canceled state are set. Run the settings.

After that, in step S3207, it is determined whether or not there is a state to be notified, such as an error state, and if there is a state to be notified, it is notified.

Subsequently, a prize ball and rental ball payout control process is executed. Specifically, payout number setting processing is performed in step S3208, motor control state acquisition processing is performed in step S3209, and motor driving processing is performed in step S3210.

In step S3211, the state return switch 321 is checked, and on the condition that the ball removal is not possible and the ball removal operation is not started, the payout motor 358a is driven to execute the ball removal process. In subsequent step S3212, control of vibrator 360 (vibration motor control) is executed on the condition that the ball is clogged. After that, it returns to the beginning of this timer interrupt processing.

Next, normal processing of the sub-controller 262 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S3901, the port corresponding to the command input of the input/output port 554 is confirmed, and it is determined whether or not the command transmitted from the main controller 261 has been received.

If a command has been received, the command is stored in the command buffer of RAM 553 in step S3902. A command buffer of the RAM 553 is composed of a ring buffer that temporarily stores commands sent from the main controller 261 . The ring buffer has a predetermined storage area, and commands are stored with regularity from the beginning to the end of the storage area. The return command is configured to be updated. Therefore, when a command is stored and read, the store pointer and read pointer in the command buffer are updated, and the command is stored and read based on each pointer.

In the subsequent step S3903, pending information storage processing is performed to store the information of the leading command output from the main controller 261 in the pending information storage area provided in the RAM 553 of the sub-controller 262. FIG. In addition, as described above, the starting command includes information indicating which of the first start-up winning device 33a or the second start-up winning device 33b is triggered by the winning ball, and variation information corresponding to the big win. Information indicating whether there is, information indicating the jackpot type, and information indicating the type of reach are included.

The pending information storage area of the sub-controller 262, like the special variable pending area of the main controller 261, has four pending areas (first pending area to fourth pending area) and a second pending information storage area. It has a pending information storage area and one execution area. In the first pending information storage area, in accordance with the reception history of the starting command based on the first variable display (information stored in the first special variable pending area), information on whether it is a big hit, whether it is a big hit, whether it is a small hit Information on whether or not, and information (variation information) on variable display such as reach type are stored in chronological order. Also, in the second pending information storage area, variable information is stored chronologically according to the reception history of the preceding command based on the second variable display (information stored in the second special variable pending area). By adopting this configuration, the variation information regarding the first variable display triggered by the ball entering the first starting prize winning device 33a, and the second variable display triggered by the ball entering the second starting prize winning device 33b. Four pieces of variation information about each can be stored in a reserved manner. As a result, it is possible for the sub-controller 262 to grasp not only the execution areas of the first and second special variable reservation areas of the main controller 261, but also the variation information stored in the reservation areas. .

The pending information storage process will be described below with reference to FIG. First, in step S4101, it is determined whether or not an advance command has been received (whether or not the advance command has been stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553). If a negative determination is made in step S4101, this process ends.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S4101 is affirmative, in step S4102 does the starting command correspond to the ball entering the second starting prize winning device 33b (variation information stored in the second special variation reservation area)? determine whether or not If a negative determination is made here, that is, if the starting command corresponds to the entry of the first starting prize winning device 33a (variation information stored in the first special variation reservation area), in step S4103 , increments by one a first variation pending counter Nd that counts the number of suspensions of variation information stored in the first pending information storage area.

In the following step S4104, information on whether or not the jackpot included in the starting command, information on the type of jackpot, information on whether or not it is a small hit, information on the reach type, etc. are stored in the vacant reservation area of the first reservation information storage area. stored in the first area.

Further, in the following step S4105, the advance notice information storage processing is performed. That is, in the present embodiment, there is a case where mutually related effect displays are intentionally derived in a plurality of consecutive variable displays (so-called "continuous advance notice" is performed). Here, the value of the continuous notice counter for determining whether or not to perform the continuous notice and the value of the notice type counter for determining the type of continuous notice are acquired, and the counter value is stored in the first reservation information Of the areas, the change information is stored in the newly stored holding area in step S4104.

The continuous notice counter is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by one within a range of 0 to 49, for example, and returns to 0, which is the lower limit, after reaching the upper limit (that is, 49). The continuous announcement counter is updated periodically, and each time, the value of the continuous announcement counter is stored in the corresponding counter buffer (continuous announcement counter buffer).

The advance notice type counter is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 9, for example, and returns to 0 as the lower limit after reaching the upper limit (that is, 9). The notice type counter is updated periodically, and each time, the value of the notice type counter is stored in the corresponding counter buffer (notice type counter buffer).

Then, in the notice information storing process, when the change information is stored in the pending information storage area, the value of the continuous notice counter and the value of the notice type counter stored in the continuous notice counter buffer and the notice type counter buffer are acquired. The Rukoto. Furthermore, each pending area and execution area of the pending information storage area is provided with a continuous announcement flag that is turned on when it is determined that the continuous announcement is derived.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the ROM 552 is provided with a notice propriety determination table that is taken into consideration when determining whether or not to perform continuous notices, and a notice table that is taken into account when deciding the form of continuous notices. A plurality of notice adequacy determination tables and notice tables are provided, respectively, and the notice adequacy determination tables and notice tables to be considered are selected according to the variation information.

After step S4105, in step S4106, one of the first suspension lamps 46a in the off state (for example, the leftmost one among the four first suspension lamps 46a that are extinguished) is turned on. state. The first holding lamp 46a of this embodiment emits blue light. In the subsequent step S4107, continuous announcement lottery processing is performed to determine whether or not to execute continuous announcements. In this embodiment, the continuous advance notice lottery process in step S4107 constitutes the specific effect determination process.

In addition, in the continuous notice lottery process of step S4107, when the value of the first variable suspension counter Nd is "2" or more, based on the value of the continuous notice counter newly stored in the first suspension information storage area, A notice propriety determination table corresponding to each of the jackpot type, the ready-to-win type, and the game mode is referred to, and it is determined whether or not to execute the continuous notice. Furthermore, when it is decided to execute the continuous notice, based on the value of the notice type counter newly stored in the first reservation information storage area, the notice table corresponding to the jackpot type, reach type and game mode to determine whether or not to execute continuous advance notice. In addition, the continuous notice flags of all the reservation areas in which the variation information is stored are turned on among the reservation areas of the first reservation information storage area. However, the continuous notice flag of the execution area is not turned on.

Now, in this embodiment, after step S4107, in step S4113, hold icon setting processing, which will be described later in detail, is performed. That is, in this embodiment, the player can customize the "car" as a specific object that can be used in the "car effect" as a specific effect, which will be described later in detail. After step S4113, the process ends.

Also, if a negative determination is made in step S4102, that is, if the starting command corresponds to the ball entering the second starting prize winning device 33b (variation information stored in the second special variation reservation area) , the process advances to step S4108 to increment by 1 a second variation suspension counter Ne that counts the number of suspensions of variation information stored in the second suspension information storage area.

After that, in step S4109, information on whether or not the jackpot included in the starting command, information on the type of jackpot, information on whether or not it is a small hit, information on the reach type, etc. are stored in the vacant reservation area of the second reservation information storage area. stored in the first area. In subsequent step S4110, the value of the continuous notice counter and the value of the notice type counter are obtained, and the counter values are stored in the second reservation information storage area in which the change information is newly stored in step S4109.

After step S4110, in step S4111, one of the second holding lamps 46b that are in the off state (for example, the leftmost one of the four second lamps 46b that are off) is turned on. and The second holding lamp 46b of this embodiment emits red light. In the following step S4112, continuous announcement lottery processing is performed to determine whether or not to execute continuous announcements. Note that the continuous advance notice lottery process in step S4112 only corresponds to the continuous advance notice lottery process in step S4107 when the ball enters the second starting prize winning device 33b, and the description thereof is omitted. After step S4112, in step S4114, hold icon setting processing, which will be described later in detail, is performed, and then this processing ends.

Returning to the description of FIG. 32, after step S3903 or if a negative determination is made in step S3901, the process proceeds to step S3904, and whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has been reached, that is, the start of the previous normal process is performed. It is determined whether or not a predetermined time (2 msec in this example) has elapsed since. If the predetermined time has already passed, the process moves to step S3905. On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet passed since the start of the previous normal process, the process moves to step S3915.

In step S3905, update processing of various counters is executed. The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 uses various counter information when displaying decorative symbols. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 33, the left, middle, and right symbols used for setting the decorative symbol counter CO at the time of the big hit, and the left symbol display area, the middle symbol display area, and the right symbol display area. Each symbol counter CL, CM, CR is used. The symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are configured such that register values are added using an R register (refresh register) in the CPU 551, and as a result, numerical values change randomly.

The jackpot decorative pattern counter CO determines the pattern (jackpot pattern) when the fluctuation of the decorative pattern display device 42 is stopped when the jackpot state occurs. In this embodiment, the jackpot decorative pattern counter CO is used. has nine counter values (0 to 8). That is, the jackpot decoration pattern counter CO is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 8, and returns to 0 after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 8).

Then, when the symbol command transmitted from the main control device 261 is "AA11" indicating that the symbol corresponding to the variable probability jackpot is to be stopped, a table (not shown) (a table that associates the counter value with the decorative symbol), For example, if the counter value is 0, it is "1", and if it is 1, it is "2". This jackpot decoration symbol counter CO is periodically updated in the counter update process of step S3905, and is read from the counter buffer of the RAM 553 at the timing when the sub-controller 262 receives a symbol command as described later. In this embodiment, the jackpot decorative pattern counter CO is stored in the RAM 553 jackpot decorative pattern counter buffer. can be

Also, if the symbol command is "AA12" indicating that the symbol corresponding to the normal jackpot is stopped, for example, if the counter value is 0 or 1, "2" (double), if 2 to 4 A combination of jackpot patterns is determined, such as "4" (double), "6" (double) for 5 and 6, and "8" (double) for 7 and 8. .

Left, middle, and right symbol counters CL, CM, and CR determine the combination of the respective stop symbols in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas when the winning lottery is lost. Since one of the nine decorative patterns is displayed in the row, nine counter values (0 to 8) are prepared for each row. A left pattern counter CL determines a stopped pattern in the left pattern display area, a medium pattern counter CM determines a stopped pattern in the middle pattern display area, and a right pattern counter CR determines a stopped pattern in the right pattern display area.

In this embodiment, the values of the counters CL, CM, and CR are randomly updated by using the numerical value of the R register built into the CPU 551 . That is, when each symbol counter CL, CM, CR is updated, the value of the lower 3 bits of the R register is added to the previous value, and when the addition result exceeds the upper limit, 8 is subtracted to determine the current value. . The pattern counters CL, CM, CR are updated so that the update times do not overlap, and the combinations of the pattern counters CL, CM, CR are the front-rear off reach pattern buffer of the RAM 553, the non-front-rear off reach pattern buffer, and the complete It is stored in any of the outlier pattern buffers.

Here, updating processing of each symbol counter CL, CM, CR will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 34, in step S4001, it is determined whether or not it is time to update the left symbol counter CL, and in step S4002, it is determined whether or not it is time to update the middle symbol counter CM. The left, middle, and right symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are updated one by one in one update process. Therefore, when the right symbol counter CR has been updated in the previous update process, the determination in step S4001 is affirmative. Also, if the left symbol counter CL has been updated in the previous update process, the determination in step S4002 is affirmative. If it is time to update the left symbol counter CL (YES in step S4001), the process advances to step S4003 to update the left symbol counter CL. If it is time to update the medium design counter CM (YES in step S4002), the process proceeds to step S4004 to update the medium design counter CM. Further, if it is time to update the right symbol counter CR (NO in both steps S4001 and S4002), the process proceeds to step S4005 to update the right symbol counter CR. In updating the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR in steps S4003 to S4005, the lower 3-bit value of the R register is added to the previous counter value, and 8 is subtracted if the addition result exceeds the upper limit value. The calculation result is used as the current value of the outlier symbol counters CL, CM, and CR.

According to the updating process of CL, CM, and CR, the left, middle, and right pattern counters CL, CM, and CR are updated one by one in one update process, and the updating timing of each counter value overlaps. no. As a result, one set of the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is updated each time the updating process is executed three times.

After that, in step S4006, it is determined whether or not the combination of the updated symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is a combination of ready-to-win symbols (the symbol in the left symbol display area and the symbol in the right symbol display area are the same). If it is a combination of ready-to-win symbols (S4006 is YES), then in step S4007, whether or not it is a combination of jackpot symbols (the left and right symbol display areas are the same as the middle symbol display area). determine whether If the determination in step S4007 is affirmative, this processing is terminated without storing the combination of the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR in the RAM553.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S4007, it is determined in step S4008 whether or not the combination of symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is a combination of front and rear deviated symbols. If the pattern counters CL, CM, and CR are a combination of front and rear out-of-order patterns (front-to-rear out-of-reach reach) (S4008 is YES), the process proceeds to step S4009, and the combination of the pattern counters CL, CM, and CR at that time is stored in the RAM 553. It is stored in the out-of-reach pattern buffer, and this processing ends. If the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are a combination of symbols other than front-rear deviation (Reach other than front-rear deviation) (NO in S4008), the process proceeds to step S4010, and the combination of symbol counters CL, CM, and CR at that time. are stored in the ready-to-win pattern buffer of the RAM 553 except for front and back deviation, and this processing is terminated.

Also, if the combination is other than the ready-to-win pattern (NO in S4006), the combination of the losing pattern counters CL, CM, and CR is a combination of losing patterns (completely missing patterns), so in step S4011, the The combination of the lost pattern counters CL, CM, and CR at the time is stored in the complete lost pattern buffer of the RAM 553, and this process is terminated.

Returning to the description of FIG. 32, in step S3906, a hold process is performed. The suspension process will be described below with reference to FIG.

First, in step S4201, it is determined whether or not a variation pattern command has been received (whether or not the variation pattern command has been stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553). If an affirmative determination is made in step S4201, it is determined in step S4202 whether or not the value of the second variation suspension counter Ne is greater than "0". If the determination in step S4202 is negative, that is, if the variation information of the second variation display is not stored pending, the process proceeds to step S4203, and 1 is subtracted from the value of the first variation pending counter Nd.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the second variable display is preferentially digested over the first variable display, and when the second variable display is retained and stored, the first variable display is digested. never That is, when the variation information of the second variation display is retained in the second retention information storage area, the variation pattern command corresponding to the first variation display is not sent. For this reason, in this embodiment, in step S4202, by determining whether or not the value of the second variation pending counter Ne is greater than "0", the variation pattern command is displayed in the first variation display and the second variation display. It is determined which of the fluctuation information has. Of course, the variation pattern command is given information as to which variation information of the first variation display and the second variation display corresponds, and based on the variation pattern command, the variation pattern command is the first variation display and the second variation display. It may be determined which variation information of the second variation display has.

After step S4203, in step S4204, a process of shifting the data stored in the first pending information storage area is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data (including the continuous notice flag) stored in the first to fourth reserved areas of the first reserved information storage area to the execution area side. The data in each area is shifted in the order of →execution area, second reserved area→first reserved area, third reserved area→second reserved area, fourth reserved area→third reserved area.

In subsequent step S4205, one of the lit first suspension lamps 46a (for example, the rightmost one of the lit first suspension lamps 46a) is turned off. After step S4205, the process proceeds to step S4209.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S4202, that is, if at least one piece of variation information for the second variation display is retained and stored, 1 is subtracted from the value of the second variation retention counter Ne in step S4206.

In subsequent step S4207, a process of shifting the data stored in the second pending information storage area is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth reserved areas of the second reserved information storage area to the execution area side. The data in each area is shifted in the following order: area→reserved first area, reserved third area→reserved second area, reserved fourth area→reserved third area, and so on. In this embodiment, there is only one execution area in the pending information storage area, and the data stored in the first pending information storage area and the second pending information storage area are displayed in a variable display corresponding to the data. are shifted into the common execution area.

In the subsequent step S4208, one of the lit second suspension lamps 46b (for example, the rightmost one of the lit second suspension lamps 46b) is turned off. After step S4208, the process proceeds to step S4209.

In step S4209, advance notice setting processing is performed to determine the type of display effect used for continuous advance notice. In the advance notice setting process of step S4209, it is determined whether or not the continuous advance notice flag (see the continuous advance notice lottery process of step S4107) in the execution area of the hold information storage area is on. is not performed, this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if affirmative determination is made, based on the variation information of the variation pattern command, it is determined whether it is a jackpot, if it is a jackpot, what is the type, and if it is not a jackpot, it is determined what the reach type is. , and determine the type of continuous notice by referring to the corresponding table. The continuous announcement of the type determined here is derived at the desired timing for the corresponding variable display.

After step S4209, in step S4210, pending icon shift processing for shifting the pending icon 411 displayed on the decorative design display device 42 is performed. Each pending area of the pending information storage area and the execution area are provided with a pending icon storage area for storing the type of pending icon. Four pending icons 411 are displayed in the lower left pending display area 405 of the decorative pattern display device 42, and each time the variable display is digested (executed), the leftmost pending icon is displayed. 411 is erased, and the pending icon 411 arranged on the right side thereof is shifted to the left by one (the display position is moved).

After step S4210, in step S4211, it is determined whether or not the current variation display is a variation display corresponding to a jackpot with balls to be released. If the determination in step S4211 is affirmative, in step S4212, after resetting the sub-side variation counter for counting the number of variations of the special symbol (decorative symbol) on the sub-control device 262 side, this process ends. do.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S4111 is negative, in step S4213 the sub-side variation counter is incremented by 1, and this process ends. In other words, the sub-side fluctuation number counter continues to be added without being reset in the case of a no-ball-out jackpot (“2RS”, “2RN”) or a “small hit”.

In the present embodiment, the second variable display is preferentially digested over the first variable display. If a ball is entered into the second starting prize winning device 33b during the variable display of the display, the second variable display may interrupt the first variable display for a plurality of times, and the continuous notice may be interrupted. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the effect used as the continuous notice is a display effect that can be derived even during the normal variable display when the continuous notice is not performed (the effect that can be derived for a single variable display). is used. Therefore, even if the continuous notice is interrupted, no sense of incongruity is caused.

Returning to the description of FIG. 32, display setting processing is performed in step S3907. Here, based on the information stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553, various arithmetic processing such as generation of display commands to be output to the display control device 45 and command output settings are performed. That is, here, the display mode to be displayed on the decorative pattern display device 42 is determined. For example, when receiving a variation pattern command and a symbol command, the sub-control device 262 refers to the corresponding table based on the variation type, variation time, stop symbol, etc., and determines the display pattern and the like. Then, it performs control such as outputting the determined item to the display control device 45 as a display command.

In addition, the display control device 45 performs drawing processing according to a command from the sub-control device 262, and starts the variable display of the decorative design on the decorative design display device 42. FIG. In addition, once the variation pattern command is received from the main controller 261, until the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern elapses, the pattern is displayed under the cooperation of the sub-controller 262 and the display controller 45. continues to fluctuate.

Further, when starting the variable display, if the continuous notice flag (see the continuous notice lottery process in step S4105) of the execution area of the pending information storage area is on, based on the fluctuation information of the fluctuation pattern command, each situation By referring to the table corresponding to , the type of continuous notice to be derived to the variable display is determined, the derivation of the notice effect different from the continuous notice is determined, and the display corresponding to the operation of the effect button 125 or the like is performed. or Furthermore, in the display setting process of the step S3907, a process (hit display process) for performing effect control during a big hit or a small hit is also performed.

Here, the winning display processing performed in the display setting processing in step S3907 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S4701, it is determined whether or not an opening command has been received from the main controller 261 to tell the start of the big win state or the small win state. If the determination in step S4701 is affirmative, then in step S4702, a round grasping counter for grasping the number of remaining rounds is set to "16" if it is "16RS" based on the information included in the opening command. "8" is set for "8RS" and "8RN", and "2" is set for "2RS", "2RN" and "minor win".

After that, in step S4703, if it is a jackpot with balls, the setting of the opening effect for 8 seconds (the image of the decorative pattern display device 42, the sound of the speaker SP, the setting of the lighting mode of various lamps) is performed, and then this processing is performed. finish. The sub-control device 262 is provided with a table or the like that stores the correspondence between the jackpot type, the number of remaining rounds, and various effects during the jackpot state. Choose and do it.

If a negative determination is made in step S4701, it is determined in step S4704 whether or not an interval command has been received. When an affirmative determination is made in step S4704, in step S4705, if a jackpot with balls is produced, an effect during the round is set for a maximum of 30 seconds, and then this processing ends.

If the determination in step S4704 is negative, it is determined in step S4706 whether or not an interval command has been received. If the determination in step S4706 is affirmative, the round grasping counter is decremented by 1 in step S4707, and if the jackpot with balls is produced in step S4708, the effect during the interval of 4 seconds is set, and then this processing ends.

If the determination in step S4706 is negative, it is determined in step S4709 whether or not an ending command has been received. If the determination in step S4709 is affirmative, the round grasping counter is decremented by 1 in step S4710, and if a jackpot with balls is produced in step S4711, an ending effect of 10 seconds is set, and then this process ends.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the case of a jackpot or a small hit other than the jackpot with a ball, the opening period (2 seconds), the round period (0.4 seconds), the interval period (1 second), and the ending period ( 1 second), instead of setting the effect for each period, the setting is made such that the effect (announcement, etc.) is performed throughout the entire period.

If a negative determination is made in step S4709, it is determined in step S4712 whether or not a winning end command has been received. If a negative determination is made in step S4712, this processing ends. On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S4712, in step S4713, the ending display is immediately ended, and a normal game state mode in which variable display is performed is set. After that, this process is terminated.

Returning to the description of FIG. 32, in steps S3908, S3909, and S3910, a process relating to the transfer of data between the pachinko machine 10 and the mobile communication terminal (eg, smart phone, etc.) carried by the player is executed. . In other words, in the present embodiment, data relating to the game played by the player can be exchanged between the pachinko machine 10 and the server operated by the game machine manufacturer via the mobile communication terminal carried by the player. It is configured.

Here, the schematic configuration of the entire gaming system will be described with reference to FIG. As a method of sending information from the pachinko machine 10 to the mobile communication terminal, a QR code (registered trademark) as code information, which is a two-dimensional code, is displayed on the decorative design display device 42 and read by the mobile communication terminal. done. The mobile communication terminal in this embodiment includes reading means (camera, decoder, etc.) capable of reading the QR code displayed on the decorative pattern display device 42, communication means capable of communicating with the server, and data supplied from the server ( and mobile display means (display) capable of displaying web pages, etc.).

By reading the QR code on the mobile communication terminal, character string information in a URL (Uniform Resource Locator) format can be obtained using a conversion application (barcode reader) pre-installed on the mobile communication terminal. The server is accessed based on the server address information or the like included in the string information (requests the processing indicated by the character string information).

The server performs display according to the request from the mobile communication terminal, and also displays various information included in the character string information for each pachinko machine 10 model (game machine ID) and for the player (mobile communication terminal identification). information). Furthermore, it also stores information (such as the number of big wins and the rank given according to the number of fluctuations) determined from the accumulated and stored various information, and the settings made by the player. Also, in response to a request from a mobile communication terminal, a password is issued based on various information accumulated and stored corresponding to the player.

By inputting the password into the pachinko machine 10 by the player, a game reflecting various information corresponding to the player can be played. In this embodiment, by inputting the password issued by the server into the pachinko machine 10, the balance of the effect is changed and the game is played without inputting the password, as compared with the case where the game is performed without inputting the password. When performing, it becomes possible to derive effects that are not derived. Hereinafter, a game performed by inputting a password will be referred to as a "mobile-linked game", and a game performed without inputting a password will be referred to as a "non-mobile-linked game".

In addition, the sub-control device 262 of this embodiment includes a game information storage area as a game information storage means capable of accumulating and storing game information, which is information about the game of the player, and selection information, which is information about the hobby and preference of the player. and a selection information storage area as selection information storage means capable of accumulating and storing. The game information of the present embodiment includes "number of fluctuations", "number of big hits", and "information on whether or not the first to third premium reaches have been derived". Correspondingly, in the game information storage area, there are a variation number counter that counts the number of variations in the mobile-linked game state, a jackpot number counter that counts the number of jackpots in the mobile-linked game state, and a first 3) There are three experienced flags that are turned on when various premium reaches are derived. Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the variation number counter and the jackpot number counter constitute game information counting means.

It should be noted that only the first premium reach out of the first to third premium reach can be derived in the non-mobile-linked gaming state or in the initial state even in the mobile-linked gaming state. On the other hand, if the first premium reach is derived even once in the mobile-linked gaming state, the second premium reach can be derived in subsequent mobile-linked gaming states, and the second premium reach that has already been derived is allowed. The derivation probability of the first premium reach is increased. In addition, when the second premium reach is derived in a state where the second premium reach is derivable, the third premium reach is derivable, and the first and second premiums that have already been derived Reach derivation probability is increased. Furthermore, when the third premium reach is derived in a state where the third premium reach is derivable, the derivation probability of the first to third premium reach increases.

In addition, in the mobile-linked gaming state, when the first premium reach is derived, the first experienced flag is turned on, and when the second premium reach is derived, the second experienced flag is turned on and the third premium. When reach is derived, the third experienced flag is turned on. Incidentally, the premium reach corresponds to "16RS", and when the premium reach is derived, it can be grasped that the "16RS" jackpot state will occur at that time. In this embodiment, when the probability of occurrence of premium reach is increased, the probability of stopping the odd double number when the variable display is stopped when the probability variable jackpot is won is reduced by that amount. .

Also, as described above, in the present embodiment, in order to suggest or teach which game mode is staying in the normal mode, the variable probability mode, the time reduction mode, or the latent probability mode, the decorative pattern display device 42 , any one of a normal stage, a variable probability stage, a pullback stage, and an omen stage is displayed. Among them, the "Normal Stage", which indicates that you are staying in the normal mode, has three stages: the 1st stage, the 2nd stage, and the 3rd stage. prepared. For example, in the normal processing of the sub-controller 262, it is periodically determined whether or not the input information of the cross button 126 is detected. It is determined whether the menu screen is in a non-display state) or in a high-speed change state (a state in which all decorative symbols are changing). If the result is affirmative here, it is determined whether or not it is the input of "right or down" of the cross button 126. If the determination is affirmative, the first stage→second stage→third stage→first stage is performed. The performance stages are changed in the order of stage .

In addition, three stages are prepared for the jackpot state. More specifically, in the variable display of the decorative symbol display device 42, when an even number of doubles is stopped and displayed, one of the jackpot states with payouts occurs (the second start winning device 33b is entered). If it is a variable display based on a ball, the state of a big win with a ball is determined), and if an odd double number other than "7" is displayed stopped, one of the states of a big win with a ball is generated and "7" is displayed. ” is stopped and displayed, “16RS” is generated. In the present embodiment, in the variable display of the decorative pattern display device 42, when an even number of doubles or an odd number of doubles other than "7" is stopped and displayed, an effect for teaching the jackpot type during the jackpot state. ("promotion effect") is performed, and the stage in the jackpot state is divided into three (more precisely, four stages including the stage for "16RS" confirmation) depending on the difference in the effect.

In the present embodiment, when an even number of doubles is displayed stopped during the variable display, a higher jackpot type such as "probable variable jackpot", and when an odd number of doubles other than "7" is stopped and displayed, "16RS". At the start of the jackpot round, a "sudden announcement stage" (for example, when the jackpot type is internally higher, a 50% winning lottery that is triggered by the operation of the production button 125 is performed once. 5% that is triggered by the operation of the production button 125 when the final announcement stage is announced at the end of the 7th round. A success effect if the lottery wins a lottery up to 15 times and wins)”, and a “chance effect” that derives a promotion effect in which the player participates by operating the effect button 125 or the like in any of the 2nd to 7th rounds. Stage (for example, if it is a high-ranking jackpot type internally, it is triggered by the operation of the production button 125 during the promotion production period, which is derived with a probability of 50% at the start of the 2nd to 7th rounds. 30% If you win in the lottery that wins in the success production)" is prepared. At the start of the jackpot state, a selection screen for selecting a stage is displayed, and when the cursor is moved to the option corresponding to the desired stage by the cross button 126 and the performance button 125 is operated, the jackpot round is started on the corresponding stage. It will happen.

In addition, in this embodiment, a display prompting the operation of the production button 125 is made during the variable display on the decorative pattern display device 42, and whether or not the production button 125 is operated (pressed) within the set period, and the operation of the production button 125 A button effect may be performed such that the derived effect changes according to the number of times (the number of repeated hits).

As the selection information of this embodiment, the number of times of variation in each production stage in the normal game state, the number of selections of "suddenly announcement stage", "final announcement stage", and "chance production stage", and the number of times of each selection, and the production at the time of button production There is information as to whether or not the button 125 has been operated and how many times the performance button 125 has been operated. That is, in the selection information storage area, there are stay stage counters that count the number of fluctuations in the ``first stage'', ``second stage'', and ``third stage'', and ``sudden announcement stage'' and ``final announcement stage''. , a jackpot stage selection counter that counts the number of selections of the ``chance performance stage'', a button counter that counts when the performance button 125 is not operated at all during the button performance, and a performance button 125 that is operated during the button performance. A repeated hitting counter for counting the total number of hits is provided. In particular, in this embodiment, two sets of stay stage counters, jackpot stage selection counters, button counters, and repeated hit counters are provided for personal use and for statistics.

Further, although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, a customization function is provided for changing the design of the image object (character or the like) displayed on the decorative pattern display device 42 . Furthermore, in this embodiment, basically, it is configured such that the customization function can be used only when a mobile-linked game is being played. In addition, the sub-controller 262 is provided with a customization information storage area for storing customization information related to customization performed during the mobile-linked game. It has become.

In this embodiment, the QR code contains various information such as game information such as the number of times of big hits and the number of fluctuations, and selection information that counts how many times the player has selected items that can be selected by the player. is configured to In this embodiment, the pachinko machine 10, a mobile communication terminal operated by a player, and a server constitute a game system.

Next, the menu display processing in step S3908 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S6101, it is determined whether or not the special display devices 43L, 43R (decorative pattern display device 42) are performing variable display. If an affirmative determination is made in step S6101, the processing ends.

If a negative determination is made in step S6101, it is determined in step S6102 whether or not the game is in a big win state. If an affirmative determination is made in step S6102, this processing ends. If a negative determination is made in step S6102, it is determined in step S6103 whether or not the production button 125 has been operated. If a negative determination is made in step S6103, this processing ends.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S6103 is affirmative, it is determined in step S6104 whether or not the top menu screen is being displayed. When a negative determination is made in step S6104, processing for displaying the top menu screen on the decorative design display device 42 is performed in step S6105. As shown in FIG. 40(a), the top menu screen includes "Enter password (start mobile-linked game)", "Issue code (initial registration/finish mobile-linked game)", "Erase mobile-linked game data", and "Play". "History" and "Close menu screen" operation items are displayed. After step S6105, this processing ends.

Also, if the determination in step S6104 is affirmative, in step S6106, the password select operation (operating the effect button 125 while the cursor is aligned with the operation item "password input (mobile interlocking game start)"). determine whether it has been done. If an affirmative determination is made in step S6106, the password input screen is displayed in step S6107, and then this processing ends.

As shown in FIG. 40(b), on the password input screen, the alphanumeric characters "A to Z" and "1 to 9" used for the password, and the selection of "delete one character", "determine", and "return" are selected. Along with the items being displayed, a word display section composed of eight frames (squares) arranged side by side is displayed in order to display the 8-character word input as a password by dividing it into characters. . In addition, the password input screen consists of alphanumeric characters used in the password, an input cursor that indicates which one of "delete one character", "determine", and "return to menu" is selected, and 8 frames. An input place cursor is displayed to indicate in which frame the alphanumeric characters are to be input when the alphanumeric characters are selected with the input cursor in the word display area and an input operation is performed.

If a negative determination is made in step S6106, in step S6108, the effect button 125 is operated while the cursor is placed on the operation item "code issuance (initial registration/end of mobile-linked game)". ) has been performed. When an affirmative determination is made in step S6108, processing for displaying a code issue screen is performed in step S6109. As shown in FIG. 40(c), the code issue screen displays operation items such as "issue code (end mobile-linked game)", "initial registration", and "return to top menu". After step S6109, this processing ends.

If a negative determination is made in step S6108, in step S6110, the mobile-linked game data deletion operation (by operating the effect button 125 while the cursor is placed on the operation item "delete mobile-linked game data") is performed. determine whether it has been done. If the determination in step S6110 is affirmative, in step S6111, a process of displaying a data deletion screen is performed.

In addition, on the data erasing screen, a text message asking whether the mobile-linked game data should be erased and options of "yes" and "no" are displayed. Then, when the cursor is moved to the item "yes" and determination input is performed, various information (game information, selection information, etc.) of the individual player regarding the mobile-linked game is erased. Furthermore, a mobile-linked game in-progress flag indicating that the mobile-linked game is in progress is set to OFF. After step S6111, the process ends.

Further, when a negative determination is made in step S6110, in step S6112, it is determined whether or not a game history display operation (operating the effect button 125 while the cursor is placed on the operation item "game history") has been performed. determine. If an affirmative determination is made in step S6112, the game history screen is displayed in step S6113, and then this processing is terminated.

Also, if a negative determination is made in step S6112, is there an operation to close the menu screen in step S6114 (by operating the effect button 125 while the cursor is placed on the operation item "close menu screen")? determine whether or not If the determination in step S6114 is affirmative, in step S6115 the top menu screen is closed, and this process ends. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S6114, this processing ends.

It should be noted that the operation of the cursor during display of various menu screens is performed by, for example, in the normal processing of the sub-controller 262, by periodically determining whether or not the input information of the cross button 126 has been detected, and if the determination is affirmative, , it is determined whether or not various menu screens are being displayed, and if the determination is affirmative, the cursor is moved according to the operation of the cross button 126 corresponding to each menu screen.

Next, password input processing in step S3909 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S6201, it is determined whether or not the password input screen is opened on the decorative design display device . If a negative determination is made in step S6201, this processing ends. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S6201, it is determined in step S6202 whether or not the effect button 125 has been operated. When a negative determination is made in step S6202, it is determined in step S6216 whether or not the variable display of the decorative design display device 42 is started.

If a negative determination is made in step S6216, this process ends. On the other hand, when the affirmative determination is made in step S6216, in step S6217, the menu screen including the password input screen is closed, and the variable display of the decorative design of the decorative design display device 42 is visually recognized. finish.

If the determination in step S6202 is affirmative, it is determined in step S6203 whether or not the input operation is for returning to the top menu. When an affirmative determination is made in step S6203, the process proceeds to step S6204, displays the top menu on the decorative design display device 42, and then ends this process.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S6203, it is determined in step S6205 whether or not the input operation is for each word constituting a password. If the determination in step S6205 is affirmative, in step S6206 the word specified by the input cursor is displayed in the frame of the word display area specified by the input place cursor, and then this process ends.

In this embodiment, the password can be entered regardless of whether or not the password has already been entered. Determines whether or not linked play is in progress, and if the determination is affirmative, notes such as "You have already entered your password. If you want to enter a new password, please delete your current password." The processing may be terminated after the explanation is displayed.

If a negative determination is made in step S6205, it is determined in step S6207 whether or not the operation is to erase one character of the word input in the word display area. If the determination in step S6207 is affirmative, in step S6208, if the word in the frame specified by the input location cursor in the word display area or the frame specified by the input location cursor has not yet been entered with a word. In step 1, the word in the preceding frame (one frame to the left) is erased, and then this processing ends.

In addition, if a negative determination is made in step S6207, that is, if the player has finished inputting the password in the word display section and has operated the effect button 125 while the input cursor is aligned with the operation item "determine". , password authentication processing is performed in step S6209. In subsequent step S6210, it is determined whether or not the entered word combination is registered in advance as a valid password combination. That is, not all combinations of alphanumeric characters described above are used as passwords, and some combinations are not used.

If the determination in step S6210 is affirmative, in step S6211 input error display processing is performed, and then this processing ends. That is, in the input error display process, a message such as "The password is incorrect" is displayed, and the operation item for which the player's consent is obtained is displayed in a state of being selected by the cursor from the beginning, and the player operates the effect button 125. Then, the setting is made so as to return to the password input screen.

If a negative determination is made in step S6210, password reflection processing is performed in step S6212 to reflect the information contained in the input password to the game of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. After step S6212, in step S6213, a process of executing an input completion announcement (for example, image display for 2 seconds on the decorative design display device 42) indicating completion of password input is performed. After that, in step S6214, a mobile-linked game in-progress flag indicating that the mobile-linked game is in progress is set to ON, and then this processing ends.

The password includes a variation rank given according to the number of variations (number of variations) performed on the special display devices 43L and 43R (decorative pattern display device 42) when the player plays the game, and a jackpot state. The jackpot rank given according to the number of times (the number of jackpots) has occurred, and the first to third premium reach as a predetermined specific production have been derived. In addition to information about the career rank of the player, information about the player's preferences regarding games is also included.

Next, the processing (code issuing processing) related to QR code issuance in step S3910 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S6301, it is determined whether or not the code issuance screen is open on the decorative design display device . If a negative determination is made in step S6301, this processing ends. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S6301, it is determined in step S6302 whether or not the effect button 125 has been operated. When a negative determination is made in step S6302, it is determined in step S6316 whether or not the variable display of the decorative design display device 42 is started.

If a negative determination is made in step S6316, this processing ends. On the other hand, if the determination in step S6316 is affirmative, it is determined in step S6316 whether or not the QR code is being displayed. When a negative determination is made in step S6317, in step S6318, the menu screen including the code issue screen is closed, and the variable display of the decorative design of the decorative design display device 42 is made visible, after which this process is terminated. .

On the other hand, if the determination in step S6317 is affirmative, in step S6319 the mobile-linked playing flag is set to OFF, and in step S6318 the menu screen including the code issue screen is closed, and this process is terminated. finish.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S6302, it is determined in step S6303 whether or not it is an input operation for initial registration. If the determination in step S6303 is affirmative, it is determined in step S6304 whether or not the mobile-linked game is being played (whether or not the mobile-linked game flag is set to ON). If a negative determination is made in step S6304, in step S6305 a QR code corresponding to initial registration is set and displayed, after which this process ends. The QR code displayed on the "initial registration" subpage includes the gaming machine ID, server address, and information indicating that the game is being played for the first time.

The QR code for initial registration does not include game information, but the QR code for subsequent registrations is configured to always include game information, selection information, and customization information. In addition, by reading the QR code with a mobile communication terminal, the above-mentioned server address, game information, etc. are displayed in a URL format character string on the display of the mobile communication terminal, and by accessing the server, the game information, etc. will be sent to the server.

Also, if the determination in step S6304 is affirmative, in step S6306, for example, after displaying an explanation of precautions such as "Please delete the mobile-linked game data before registering", this process is executed. finish. That is, in the present embodiment, the first registration cannot be performed while the player's personal data related to the mobile-linked game remains. It should be noted that the code for initial registration may be issued in both the mobile-linked gaming state and the non-mobile-linked gaming state.

If a negative determination is made in step S6303, it is determined in step S6307 whether the input operation is for displaying a QR code. If the determination in step S6307 is affirmative, it is determined in step S6308 whether or not the mobile-linked game is being played. When the determination in step S6308 is affirmative, in step S6309, a QR code is set and a process of displaying it on the decorative design display device 42 is performed. In this embodiment, the QR code displayed on the "issue code (end of game)" subpage contains the gaming machine ID that identifies the pachinko machine 10, the address of the server operated by the gaming machine manufacturer, game information, selection information, and the like. In particular, the game information includes a variation number counter, a jackpot number counter, and the memory contents of an experienced flag. Selection information includes a stay stage counter, a jackpot stage selection counter, a button counter, and a repeat counter for personal use and statistics. , and customization information regarding customization, which will be described later in detail. After step S6309, this processing ends.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S6308, in step S6310, an explanation of precautions such as "there is no data that can be output. When playing mobile-linked games, please enter the password issued by the server." is displayed, and then this processing ends.

If the determination in step S6307 is negative, it is determined in step S6311 whether or not the QR code is being displayed. If an affirmative determination is made in step S6311, that is, if an operation input of "return (delete the QR code display screen)" is performed on the QR code display screen, in step S6312, it is stored in the pachinko machine 10. A process for erasing the game data of the individual player who is in the More specifically, in step S6312, the fluctuation number counter, the jackpot number counter, and the experienced flag are reset (the counter value is set to 0 and the flag is turned off), and the stay stage counter, jackpot stage selection counter, Of the button counter and repeated hit counter, the one for personal use is reset. Furthermore, various customization information stored in the customization information storage area is also erased.

Incidentally, the stay stage counter, jackpot stage selection counter, button counter, and repeat counter for statistics are not reset at this time. The storage area for statistics is configured to be able to store selection information for one week separately for each day, and is configured to erase information over one week based on a date counter that counts dates. ing.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, a variable number counter, a jackpot number counter, a personal stay stage counter, a jackpot stage selection counter, a button counter, a repeated hit counter, an experienced flag, and a customization information storage area. Memorization is performed only for mobile-linked games. On the other hand, the storage of the counts in the staying stage counter for statistics, the jackpot stage selection counter, the button counter, and the repeated hitting counter is performed not only in the mobile-linked game but also in the non-mobile-linked game. Corresponding to these configurations, the QR code can include not only the player's individual game information and selection information, but also selection information and questionnaire information for one week including those of other players. set.

After step S6312, in step S6313, the mobile-linked playing flag is set to OFF, and in step S6314, the menu screen including the code issue screen is closed, and this process ends.

If a negative determination is made in step S6311, that is, if the code issue screen was displayed but an operation input to return to the top menu was performed without issuing the QR code, the top menu is displayed in step S6315. This process ends after performing the process for causing the In this embodiment, the decorative design display device 42 corresponds to the display means, and the function of displaying the QR code on the decorative design display device 42 constitutes the information output means.

Here, the processing of the "server" (access handling processing) when there is an access from a predetermined mobile communication terminal (for example, mobile phone, smart phone, etc.) will be described with reference to FIG. The server receives from the mobile communication terminal a variation number counter, a jackpot number counter, an experienced flag, a stay stage counter for personal use and statistics, a jackpot stage selection counter, a button counter, a repeat counter, and customized information. A server-side game information storage area equipped with a server-side fluctuation number counter, a server-side jackpot number counter, and a server-side experienced flag so that the information can be stored when the information is transmitted to the storage area. , a server-side selection information storage area comprising a server-side stay stage counter for personal use and statistics, a server-side jackpot stage selection counter, a server-side button counter, and a server-side repeated hit counter, and a server-side continuous display object information accumulation storage means and a server-side customization information storage area.

First, in step S6401, it is determined whether or not there is an access from a mobile communication terminal. If a negative determination is made in step S6401, this processing ends. On the other hand, if the determination in step S6401 is affirmative, it is determined in step S6402 whether or not the information transmitted from the mobile communication terminal includes information indicating that it is the first time.

If the determination in step S6402 is affirmative, in step S6403, the portable communication terminal is stored in the storage areas on the server side (server-side game information storage area, server-side selection information storage area, server-side customization information storage area). A process for setting a storage area for accumulating and storing game information, selection information, and customization information of a player's individual accessing through the . In this embodiment, the server-side selection information storage area includes an area for personal use and an area for statistics. There is only one for

Subsequently, in step S6404, processing is performed to display a first-time web page corresponding to access using the first-time QR code on the display of the mobile communication terminal, and then this processing ends. More specifically, after formal user registration, the password for the first time is displayed. The initial password includes information indicating that the game is played for the first time. Also, in step S6404, cookie (HTTP cookie) information is stored in the accessing mobile communication terminal. As a result, when the mobile communication terminal accesses the server from the next time onwards, the cookie information will also be sent to the server, and the server will be able to confirm the cookie information even if the player does not log in. , the mobile communication terminal of the player with which accumulated data has been accessed is grasped, and the corresponding display is performed. It should be noted that the user may be configured to log in by entering the ID password each time the server is accessed.

Further, if the determination in step S6402 is negative, that is, if access based on the QR code is received from the mobile communication terminal of the player who has finished the mobile-linked game, in step S6405, the The number of fluctuations information (information indicating the value of the fluctuation counter) is read from the information, the number of fluctuations this time is added to the number of fluctuations already stored in the server side fluctuation number counter, and the calculated value is newly added to the server side Store in the variation counter.

In the following step S6406, the number of big wins information (information indicating the value of the number of big wins counter) is read from the information transmitted from the portable communication terminal, and the number of big wins this time is changed to the number of variations already stored in the number of big wins counter on the server side. , and the calculated value is newly stored in the server-side jackpot number counter.

Further, in step S6407, information on the occurrence of Premium Reach (information indicating an experienced flag that has been turned on) is read from the information transmitted from the mobile communication terminal. turn on the flag.

Thereafter, in step S6408, variation rank determination processing is performed. In this embodiment, a player is ranked according to how many mobile-linked games they have played. or Rank determination is basically performed in the server, and in step S6408, by determining whether or not the number of fluctuations stored in the server-side fluctuation number counter is equal to or greater than a predetermined number of fluctuations, A rank (variation rank) relating to the number of fluctuations is determined. In this embodiment, the variable rank can be updated to the second rank when the variable display is performed 1000 times in the first rank (initial rank). In addition, although it takes 3000 rotations from the second rank to the third rank, after that, 5000 rotations are required to update the rank by one.

In the following step S6409, big hit rank determination processing is performed. In this embodiment, the jackpot rank can be updated to the second rank by executing the jackpot state ten times in the first rank (initial rank). In addition, although it takes 30 times from the 2nd rank to the 3rd rank, and 50 times from the 3rd rank to the 4th rank, after that, 80 times are required to update the rank by one.

In subsequent step S6410, career rank determination processing is performed. In this embodiment, the career ranks are a first rank that has never led a premium reach during a mobile-linked game and can only lead a first premium reach, and a first rank that leads a first premium reach. As a result, it is possible to derive the second premium reach, and the second rank, which increases the probability of deriving the first premium reach, and the second rank, have derived the second premium reach, As a result, it is possible to derive the 3rd premium reach, and the 3rd rank, which increases the probability of deriving the 1st and 2nd premium reach, and the 3rd premium reach in the 3rd rank, have been derived. There is a 4th rank that increases the probability of deriving the 1st to 3rd premium reach.

In the following step S6411, various selection information (both personal and statistical stay stage counters, jackpot stage selection counters, button counters, and information indicating the values of repeated hit counters) are extracted from the information transmitted from the mobile communication terminal. It reads it, performs processing to add it to the corresponding counter, or performs processing to set the corresponding flag. In this embodiment, not only the selection information of the individual player but also the selection information of other players who have played the pachinko machine 10 played by the player is transmitted via the mobile communication terminal. Player's individual selection information is stored in an individual selection information storage area capable of storing player's individual selection information in the server side game information storage area, and selection information including other players is stored in the player who plays the same model. The overall selection information is stored in the overall game information storage area.

In the following step S6412, various customization information is read from the information transmitted from the portable communication terminal and stored in the corresponding storage area of the server-side customization information storage area.

Thereafter, in step S6413, the web page reflecting the rank determined in steps S6408 to S6410, the accumulated data of the selection information added in steps S6411 and S6412, and the customized information is displayed on the display of the mobile communication terminal. After performing the process of displaying , this process ends. The web page includes "spec" that teaches the specifications such as the jackpot probability of the pachinko machine 10, "personal data management" that allows the player to check the game record of the individual player, and the player's personal data regarding customization in the next mobile-linked game. There are operation items such as "Settings" for setting items that can be selected by , and "Password Issuance" for issuing new passwords based on accumulated game information, selection information, and setting information related to customization. .

Next, processing for issuing a password for "server" (password issuing processing) will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S6501, it is determined whether or not a password issuance request has been made. If a negative determination is made in step S6501, this processing ends. If the determination in step S6501 is affirmative, customization information determination processing is performed in step S6502. In this embodiment, it is configured so that customization of the object derived to the specific effect performed in the decorative pattern display device 42 can be performed both in the pachinko machine 10 and the server, and here, the setting on the server is confirmed. I am planning to process it. Although the contents that can be set on the customized pachinko machine 10 side and the contents that can be set on the server side are different, the specific contents will be described later.

In the subsequent step S6503, reference is made to the change rank, jackpot rank, history rank, individual selection information of the player, the value of the server-side remaining variation count storage area, the value of the server-side remaining variation count storage area, and setting information related to customization. to perform password setting processing for setting a password.

The sub-control device 262 of the pachinko machine 10 has a rank storage area for storing the variation rank, the jackpot rank, and the career rank. store the information corresponding to the rank storage area. As a result, it is possible to enjoy the effects corresponding to the rank. In this embodiment, it is possible to select the design of a character that appears in a predetermined presentation, or select a voice pattern to be output at a predetermined timing, according to the variation rank and the jackpot rank. Also, for example, when super reach is performed, the value stored in the rank storage area may be checked, and the corresponding effect table may be selected from among a plurality of effect tables. The contents stored in the rank storage area are erased at the same time when the QR code issued in the code issuing process is erased (see step S6312 in FIG. 42).

In addition, the sub-control device 262 has a preference information storage area capable of storing information (preference information) based on the accumulated selection information of the individual player. The information is stored in the preference information storage area. The preference information of this embodiment includes information indicating the most selected stage in the normal game state, information indicating the most selected stage in the jackpot state, and whether or not there is a tendency to operate the effect button 125 during button effect. There is information indicating

Then, in the password reflection process (see FIG. 41) in step S6212 described above, when the top menu screen display is closed, the process of automatically shifting to the most selected stage in the normal game state and the start of the jackpot state Sometimes, the selection cursor on the stage selection screen is set so that it is aimed at the operation item that selects the most selected stage from the beginning, and the button effect derivation ratio is increased or decreased (change the selected effect table ) processing is performed. The contents stored in the preference information storage area are erased at the same time when the QR code issued in the code issuing process is erased.

After step S6503, in step S6504, the password set in step S6503 is displayed, and then this process ends.

Returning to the description of FIG. 32, in the lamp setting process of step S3911, the lighting pattern of lamps/electrical decorations is set in order to synchronize with the display effect performed by the decorative pattern display device 42. FIG.

In the sound setting process of step S3912, the output pattern of the speaker SP is set in order to synchronize with the display effect performed by the decorative design display device 42. Also, when a command related to sound such as notification of error occurrence is transmitted from the main controller 261, settings for performing these controls are also performed in step S3912.

In step S3913, control setting of customer waiting effect (for example, demo screen display set to be displayed after a predetermined time elapses while variable display of decorative pattern display device 42 is not performed; energy saving mode), etc. process.

In step S3914, an external output process is executed to transmit control signals based on the settings in steps S3905 to S3914 to each device. For example, a display command is transmitted to the display control device 45 when the decorative design display device 42 displays the decorative design in a variable manner.

After the processing of steps S3905 to S3914, which is performed every 2 msec, is executed, or if a negative determination is made in step S3904, the process proceeds to step S3915 to determine whether the RAM 553 stores power-off occurrence information. determine whether Note that the power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 261 .

If the power-off occurrence information is not stored, the process advances to step S3916 to determine whether or not the RAM 553 has been destroyed. If the RAM 553 is not destroyed here, the process returns to step S3901 and the normal process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 553 has been destroyed, the process is looped infinitely to stop execution of subsequent processes.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3915 that power-off occurrence information is stored, power-off processing is executed in step S3917. In the power-off processing, generation of interrupt processing is prohibited, and each output port is turned off. In addition, the memory of information on occurrence of power failure is also erased. After executing the power-off process, the process loops infinitely.

Now, in this embodiment, there is provided a function that allows the player to customize a "car" as a specific object that can be used in a "car effect" as a specific effect, which will be described in detail later. However, in this embodiment, it is configured such that the customization function can be used only when a mobile-linked game is being played.

Here, with reference to FIG. 45 and the like, a mode example of the decorative design display device 42 as the variable display means will be described. 45 shows the decoration symbol display device 42 in a normal game state ("normal stage" in FIG. 45) during the mobile-linked game.

Basically, the range including the central portion in the vertical direction of the decorative pattern display device 42 is composed of three pattern display areas 401, 402, 403 of left, middle, and right in which the decorative pattern (first pattern) can be variably displayed. there is Further, the lower left portion of the decorative design display device 42 is a reservation display area 405 capable of displaying a reservation icon 411 (second design). Furthermore, in the decorative design display device 42, the visibility of the stop display of the decorative design 421 is not hindered (for example, when the decorative design 421 is displayed at the same time as the decorative design 421 at the timing of the stop display of the decorative design 421, the decorative design 421 , etc.), the character object 423 (third pattern) is appropriately displayed in the pattern display areas 401, 402, 403, and the like.

Now, in this embodiment, mainly in the decorative pattern display device 42, there are cases where an effect with a motif of a "car" (hereinafter also referred to as a "car effect") is performed. More specifically, there are "race presentation", "contest presentation", "strength comparison presentation", and "date presentation". In addition, a plurality of types of cars used for such car presentation are prepared. More specifically, "sports car", "family car", "armored car", "4WD car", decorated "decorated car", "truck (decorated truck)", "cart" There is

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when a mobile-linked game is played, the car used in the "car presentation" can be customized. The parts that can be customized for the car used for "car production" are "body front (front half)", "body rear (rear half)", "doors", "tires", "engine & muffler". It is divided into multiple items (customization items). Also, for each item, "parts for sports car", "parts for family car", "parts for armored car", "parts for 4WD car", "parts for decoration car", "parts for truck" "Parts" and "Rear Cart Parts" are available, and it is also possible to create a car that combines parts of different systems. However, as for the cart, there is no distinction between the front and rear in the body, there is no door item, and the cart is moved by human power (pulled by a predetermined character object 423, etc.) instead of by the engine.

In addition, there is also a “coloring” item for car customization, and “sporty”, “white”, “army”, “vivid”, “pastel”, “metallic”, and “classic” are available. . In addition, the coloring of the entire car is changed at once, not for each part of the car. Also, by exchanging the "engine & muffler" parts, the engine sound (running sound, etc.) changes.

Furthermore, when a mobile-linked game is being played, a car that is being customized (hereinafter also referred to as an "unfinished car 431") is displayed in the lower right portion (tuning area 406) of the decorative pattern display device 42. As shown in FIG. 46 and the like, the unfinished vehicle 431 grasps a rough overall image (outer shape) of a vehicle (hereinafter also referred to as a "completed vehicle 441") in a state where all customizations for the unfinished vehicle 431 are completed. A silhouette-shaped base object 432 that can be used, and as shown in FIGS. ', 'Tire', and 'Engine & Muffler' part objects 433 .

In other words, the part where the base object 432 is displayed as it is is a part that has not been customized yet, and the part where the part object 433 is displayed and the base object 432 is not displayed is already customized. It is called a part. In other words, in the unfinished vehicle 431 displayed in the tuning area 406, masking is applied to portions corresponding to items that have not yet been customized (portions to which no part objects 433 are fitted). It looks like it has been applied. With such a configuration, it is possible to grasp at a glance that there are items that have not yet been customized. In addition, FIG. 45 shows an unfinished vehicle 431 in a state in which "doors" and "engine & muffler" have been customized. In addition, regarding "Engine & Muffler", when customization is done, only the part of the muffler that protrudes outside the car is displayed, and the part hidden inside the car is not displayed.

In addition, in this embodiment, in order to clarify where the parts corresponding to each customization item are separated (where the boundary is) for the base object 432, each customization item and each corresponding part , are masked with different patterns. In this embodiment, it is configured to make a difference by "color", "front of body" is "blue", "rear of body" is "red", "door" is "yellow", and "tire". is "yellow-green", and "engine & muffler" is "green". Since each masking item corresponding to each customization item has a different color in this way, the number of items that have not yet been customized can be made clear at a glance.

In addition, the unfinished vehicle 431 is configured to be continuously displayed on the decorative pattern display device 42 during the multiple times of variable display on the special display devices 43L, 43R (decorative pattern display device 42), and customized over the multiple times of variable display. will proceed. Then, when parts are assembled for all items of "front body", "rear body", "doors", "tires", and "engine & muffler" for the unfinished car 431 Customization will be completed at . As for the “coloring”, “white” is set by default, so there is a case where the customization of the car is completed even if the player does not customize the coloring.

In the present embodiment, part objects 433 are displayed for parts of the unfinished vehicle 431 that have already been customized. It is drawn with a line and a light color. On the other hand, with respect to the base object 432, there are only masking outlines that are divided and set for each customization item, and details inside them are not drawn. In addition, each masking is basically a thick line (the border between maskings can be thin or can be eliminated) and a dark color to make a difference from the already customized parts. It is designed to be drawn with

In this embodiment, regarding the unfinished vehicle 431, the masking area for the "engine & muffler" partially overlaps the masking areas for the "body" and "doors", and the masking for the "engine & muffler" is It is a display that takes precedence over masking of "body" and "door". Further, when the “body” and “door” part objects 433 are applied to the incomplete car 431 and the “engine & muffler” customization has not yet been performed, the “engine & The masking of "muffler" is also visible.

In addition, in this embodiment, when all the customizations for the unfinished vehicle 431 are completed, the completed vehicle 441 is moved to the upper right portion (gallery area 407) of the decorative pattern display device 42, where (basically (until the car effect occurs) is displayed continuously. However, in this embodiment, the number of completed cars 441 that can be displayed in the gallery area 407 is two. Therefore, when the third finished car 441 is completed, the player selects the finished car 441 that is not left in the gallery area 407 from among the three finished cars 441, and erases it from the screen. is configured as Note that the finished car 441 is not drawn with relatively thin lines and light colors like the customized part of the unfinished car 431 (part object 433 in the unfinished car 431). Drawn with relatively solid lines and colors.

In addition, although the "car effect" itself is a common effect in both the mobile-linked game and the non-mobile-linked game, in this embodiment, the customization function can be used only when the mobile-linked game is performed. That is, in the non-mobile-linked game state, the unfinished vehicle 431 in the tuning area 406 and the completed vehicle 441 in the gallery area 407 are not displayed. Furthermore, in the non-mobile-linked game, the car used for the "car presentation" is a complete car 441 with a unified car model system, and a lottery (expected winning) is performed when the execution of the "car presentation" is decided. The vehicle type is selected and determined depending on the degree and the type of car presentation. The degree of winning expectation is an indicator of how likely it is that a big win will occur. The more likely you are to be selected. On the contrary, the more difficult it is to be selected in the variable display for teaching the occurrence of the big win state and the more likely it is to be selected in the variable display for teaching the loss, the lower the winning expectation. In this embodiment, the unfinished vehicle 431 (fourth pattern) and the completed vehicle 441 (fifth pattern) constitute the continuous display object. In addition, the unfinished car 431 corresponds to the unfinished object, and the finished car 441 corresponds to the completed object.

Furthermore, the hold icon 411 may take different forms depending on whether the mobile-linked game is being played or not. More specifically, in the mobile-linked gaming state, in the lower left part of the decoration symbol display device 42 (holding display area 405), when the suspended icon 411 is displayed in a manner that is not derived in the non-mobile-linked gaming state. There is That is, as shown in FIG. 45 and the like, the suspended icon 411 includes a normal suspended icon 411 (hereinafter also referred to as a “normal suspended icon 412”) such as a “jewel 414 on a pedestal 413” and the above-described suspended icon 411. There is also a reserved icon 411 (hereinafter also referred to as an "item reserved icon 416") modeled after a "customized car part" used for car presentation.

As shown in FIG. 47, the item pending icon 416 is composed of a "background 417" and a "part object 433" drawn in front of it. The "parts object 433" is drawn to specifically indicate which part (customization item) and which car model system (customization pattern) the part belongs to. corresponding colors.

More specifically, in this embodiment, the color of the “background 417 ” corresponds to the masking color applied to the unfinished vehicle 431 displayed in the tuning area 406 . In other words, "blue" for "front body" parts, "red" for "rear body" parts, "yellow" for "door" parts, and "tire" parts "Yellow-green", "Engine & Muffler" parts are "Green". Therefore, comparing the background 417 of the reserved item icon 416 and the unfinished vehicle 431, it is found that the part object 433 of the reserved item icon 416 corresponds to which part of the unfinished vehicle 431 that has not yet been customized. It is possible to grasp at a glance whether there is.

As will be described later in detail, when a decision is made to reflect the part object 433 displayed by the item reserve icon 416 in the unfinished vehicle 431, the part object 433 is added to the corresponding part of the unfinished vehicle 431. It is displayed so that it can be fitted.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 47, with respect to the item reserve icon 416 corresponding to "coloring", instead of "part object 433", "colored brush" is drawn in the image of coloring. In addition, the “background 417” is “white” in any coloring. Then, when a decision is made to reflect the coloring displayed by the item reserve icon 416 to the unfinished vehicle 431, the coloring of all the part objects 433 of the unfinished vehicle 431 is changed at once. It has become. Incidentally, when the coloring of the unfinished vehicle 431 is the default, the coloring of "white" is selected.

The RAM 553 of the sub-controller 262 has an unfinished customization storage area for storing the setting contents of a plurality of customization items constituting the unfinished vehicle 431 displayed in the tuning area 406 of the decoration design display device 42, and a decoration area. A completion customization storage area is provided for storing setting contents of a plurality of customization items constituting the completed vehicle 441 displayed in the gallery area 407 of the design display device 42 .

The unfinished customization storage area and the completed customization storage area correspond to a storage area corresponding to "front of body", a storage area corresponding to "rear of body", a storage area corresponding to "door", and a storage area corresponding to "tire". There are storage areas associated with each customization item, such as a storage area corresponding to "engine & muffler" and a storage area corresponding to "coloring". Then, for each item, "parts for sports car", "parts for family car", "parts for armored car", "parts for 4WD car", "parts for decoration car", "parts for truck" Parts", "Rear cart parts", and "Coloring", "Sporty", "White", "Army", "Vivid", "Pastel", "Metallic", "Classic" ” is stored. Further, in this embodiment, the number of finished cars 441 displayed in the gallery area 407 is set to two, and the completion customization storage area has a storage area for two finished cars 441 (the first finished car). a customization storage area and a second completed customization storage area).

In addition, each pending area and execution area of the pending information storage area of the sub-controller 262 is provided with a customization information storage area for storing information on customization. The information in the customization information storage area is shifted to the execution area side each time the variable display is performed for the information in the customization information storage area along with other game information. Although details will be described later, the customization information storage area contains information indicating whether or not an opportunity (customization chance) to customize the unfinished vehicle 431 is granted or not, and information indicating customization items. and a pattern area for storing information indicating the customization pattern. Further, in this embodiment, the pending information storage area (customization information storage area) and the incomplete customization storage area of the sub-controller 262 correspond to the customization progress storage means.

Furthermore, the sub-control device 262 as a customization opportunity granting means is a customization lottery random number generation means used in a customization lottery to determine whether or not to grant an opportunity (customization chance) to customize the unfinished vehicle 431 . a "customized lottery random number counter" and a "customized lottery value storage table" as a customized lottery value storage means for storing a predetermined value among the values that can be generated by the customized lottery random number counter as a value for winning the customized lottery. I have.

For example, the customized lottery random number counter is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 199, and after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 199) as the closing value, it returns to 0, which is the lower limit value as the opening value. . The customized lottery random number counter is updated periodically (eg, each normal process), and the value of the customized lottery random number counter is stored in the corresponding counter buffer. Then, based on the reception of the starting command, the customized lottery random number counter value stored in the counter buffer is stored in the success/fail area of the customized information storage area of the reserved information storage area.

In addition, the sub-control device 262 as customization selection means includes an "item random number counter" as an item lottery random number generation means used for an item lottery for determining a customization item, a value that can be generated by the item random number counter, and a customization item. A "corresponding item storage table" as a corresponding item storage means for storing the correspondence relationship between the , a "pattern random number counter" as a pattern random number generating means used in a pattern lottery for determining a customized pattern, and a pattern random number counter. A "corresponding pattern storage table" is provided as corresponding pattern storage means for storing values that can be set and corresponding relationships with customized patterns.

The item random number counter is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 59, for example, and after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 59) as the closing value, returns to 0 as the lower limit value as the opening value. The item random number counter is updated periodically (eg, each normal process), and the value of the item random number counter is stored in the corresponding counter buffer. Then, when winning a customization lottery based on the reception of the starting command, the value of the item random number counter stored in the counter buffer is stored in the item area of the customization information storage area of the pending information storage area. It is designed to be

For example, the pattern random number counter is incremented one by one within the range of 0 to 999, and after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 999) as the final value, returns to 0 as the lower limit value as the starting value. The pattern random number counter is updated periodically (for example, each normal process), and the value of the pattern random number counter is stored in the corresponding counter buffer. Then, when winning the customized lottery based on the reception of the starting command, the value of the pattern random number counter stored in the counter buffer is stored in the pattern area of the customized information storage area of the reserved information storage area. It is designed to be

Here, the pending icon setting process performed in steps S4113 and S4114 of the pending information storing process (see FIG. 35) will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in step S7101, customization lottery processing is performed. More specifically, first, the value of the customized lottery random number counter is acquired from the corresponding counter buffer and stored in the customized information storage area (win/fail region) of the corresponding reserved area among the reserved information storage areas. Further, a customized winning value storage table is referenced to determine whether or not the customized lottery random number counter value stored in the customized information storage area (win/deny area) is a value corresponding to winning in the customized lottery.

As shown in FIG. 52, a plurality of customized winning value storage tables are provided. In this embodiment, the one for the big win/small win selected when the big win state or the small win state occurs, the one for the front-back off selected when the front-back off reach occurs, and the reach other than the front-back off There are those for other than the front and back that are selected when is generated, and those for other than those that are selected in other cases (when reach does not occur), and each is selected in the case of a low ball entry state. There are prepared two each of one that is selected in the case of a high ball entry state and the other that is selected in the case of a high ball entry state. In addition, in the present embodiment, when the customized winning value storage table for front and back wins is referred to, it is easier to win than when the customized winning value storage table for big wins and small wins is referred to. When the customized winning value storage table is referred to, winning is more difficult than when the customized winning value storage table for big wins and small wins is referred to. In addition, when the customized winning value storage table for the rest is referred to, winning is more difficult than when the customized winning value storage table for the non-front and back is referred to.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the customized winning value storage table is referred to in the high pitch state, winning is more difficult than in the case of referring to the customized winning value storage table in the low pitch state.

After step S7101, in step S7102, it is determined whether or not the customization lottery has been won. If the determination in step S7102 is affirmative, it is determined in step S7103 whether or not the mobile-linked game is being played (whether or not the mobile-linked game flag is set to ON). If the determination in step S7103 is affirmative, in step S7104 a customization chance flag indicating that a customization chance is given is set to ON.

Note that the customization chance flag is provided in each pending area and execution area (customization information storage area) of the pending information storage area, and when the change information is shifted, the setting information of the customization chance flag is also shifted. is configured to Further, in the present embodiment, a value indicating that a customization chance is granted is stored (overwritten) in the customization information storage area (win/deny area) in which the value of the customization lottery random number counter is stored. , the customization chance flag is set to ON. Incidentally, it is also possible to provide a customization chance flag separately from the customization information storage area.

In subsequent steps S7105 and S7106, processing for determining the type of the part object 433 to be displayed on the item reserve icon 416 is performed. In other words, it is necessary for the parts object 433 to determine which part of the car (unfinished car 431) and what type (vehicle type) the part is. It is configured to determine whether there is (customization item), and in step S7106, determine what type it is (customization pattern).

First, in the customization item determination processing in step S7105, the value of the item random number counter is obtained from the corresponding counter buffer, and stored in the customization information storage area (item area) of the corresponding reservation area among the reservation information storage areas. . Further, the corresponding item storage table is referenced to determine which customization item the value of the item random number counter stored in the customization information storage area (item area) corresponds to. Then, information indicating the corresponding customization item is stored (overwritten) in the customization information storage area (item area) of the corresponding reserved area.

In this embodiment, only one corresponding item storage table is provided, and when the value of the item random number counter is "0 to 9", it corresponds to "front of body", and the value of the item random number counter is "10 to 9". If the value of the item random number counter is "20 to 29", it corresponds to "door", and if the value of the item random number counter is "30 to 39", it corresponds to " If the item random number counter value is "40-49", it corresponds to "engine & muffler", and if the item random number counter value is "50-59", it corresponds to "coloring". is set to

After step S7105, in the customization pattern determination process in step S7106, first, the value of the pattern random number counter is acquired from the corresponding counter buffer, and the customization information storage area (for pattern use) of the corresponding hold information storage area area). Further, the corresponding pattern storage table is referenced to determine which customization pattern the value of the pattern random number counter stored in the customization information storage area (pattern area) corresponds to. Then, information indicating the corresponding customization pattern is stored (overwritten) in the customization information storage area (pattern area) of the corresponding reserved area.

As shown in FIG. 54, a plurality of corresponding pattern storage tables are provided. In the present embodiment, the one for the high-ball state selected in the case of the high-ball state, the one for the low-ball state selected in cases other than the high-ball state, and the special state from the previous jackpot state For the first rare parts high probability state selected when the variable display of the display devices 43L and 43R exceeds 1000 times, and the variable display of the special display devices 43L and 43R from the previous jackpot state 400 times to 420 times, 600 times to 640 times, and 800 times to 880 times.

Here, the customization pattern determination processing in step S7106 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S7131, it is determined whether or not the value of the sub-side variation counter (see step S4212 in FIG. 36) exceeds 1000, that is, the number of variations performed after the previous jackpot with ball output is 1000. is exceeded. If the determination in step S7131 is affirmative, in step S7132, based on the value of the pattern random number counter, the corresponding pattern storage table for the second rare parts high probability state is referenced to determine the customized pattern.

Regarding the corresponding pattern storage table for the second rare parts high probability state, when the pattern random number counter value is "0 to 99", it corresponds to "sports car system parts", and the pattern random number counter value is "100 to 199", it corresponds to "family car system parts", and when the pattern random number counter value is "200 to 299", it corresponds to "armored car system parts", and the pattern random number counter value is "300 to 379". ", corresponds to "4WD car system parts", and when the pattern random number counter value is "980 to 989", it corresponds to "decoration car system parts", and the pattern random number counter value is "990 to 999 " corresponds to "truck system parts", and when the pattern random number counter value is "400 to 979", it corresponds to "cart parts". After step S7132, this processing ends.

Also, if a negative determination is made in step S7131, in step S7133, the value of the sub-side fluctuation counter is within the ranges of 400 to 420, 600 to 640, and 800 to 880. When it is determined that the number of fluctuations from the jackpot state with balls is within the range of 400 to 420 times, 600 to 640 times, and 800 to 880 times, in step S7134, the value of the pattern random number counter is changed. Based on this, the customized pattern is determined by referring to the corresponding pattern storage table for the first rare parts high probability state.

Regarding the corresponding pattern storage table for the first rare parts high probability state, when the value of the pattern random number counter is "0 to 299", it corresponds to "parts of the decoration car system", and the value of the pattern random number counter is "300 to 899", it corresponds to "truck type parts", and when the pattern random number counter value is "900 to 999", it corresponds to "cart parts", "sports car type parts", "family car type The values of the pattern random number counters corresponding to "parts of armored vehicles", "parts of armored car system", and "parts of 4WD car system" are not set. After step S7134, this processing ends.

Also, if a negative determination is made in step S7133, it is determined in step S7135 whether or not the state is a high ball entry state (whether or not a flag indicating is set to ON). If the determination in step S7135 is affirmative, that is, if the variable probability mode or the time reduction mode is selected, in step S7136, based on the value of the pattern random number counter, the corresponding pattern storage table for high ball entry state is referred to, Decide on a customization pattern.

Regarding the corresponding pattern storage table for the high ball entry state, when the pattern random number counter value is "0 to 99", it corresponds to "sports car system parts", and when the pattern random number counter value is "100 to 399". If the value of the pattern random number counter is "400 to 599", it corresponds to "parts of the armored car system", and if the value of the pattern random number counter is "600 to 999" , the value of the pattern random number counter corresponding to "4WD car system parts", "decoration car system parts", "truck system parts", and "cart parts" is not set. After step S7136, this process ends.

If a negative determination is made in step S7135, that is, if the mode is the normal mode or the latency mode, then in step S7137, based on the value of the pattern random number counter, the corresponding pattern storage table for the low ball entry state is referred to. to determine the customization pattern.

Regarding the corresponding pattern storage table for the low ball entry state, when the pattern random number counter value is "0 to 199", it corresponds to "sports car system parts", and when the pattern random number counter value is "200 to 699" If the value of the pattern random number counter is "700 to 799", it corresponds to "parts of the armored car system", and if the value of the pattern random number counter is "800 to 979" corresponds to "parts for 4WD cars", if the pattern random number counter value is "980-989", it corresponds to "parts for decoration car", and if the pattern random number counter value is "990-999" , the value of the pattern random number counter corresponding to "truck system parts" and "cart parts" is not set. After step S7137, this process ends.

In this embodiment, the "decoration car system parts" and "rear cart parts" correspond to specific customization patterns, and the corresponding pattern storage table for the first and second rare parts high probability states stores the second pattern. means, the corresponding pattern storage tables for the high-increase state and the low-increase state correspond to the first pattern storage means, and the corresponding pattern storage tables for the first and second rare parts high probability states are selected. (a state in which the fluctuation display exceeds 1000 times after the end of the previous jackpot state) corresponds to the second pattern selection state, and other states correspond to the first pattern selection state. In addition, in the present embodiment, each corresponding pattern storage table and its corresponding game state are in one-to-one correspondence. When 1000 times are exceeded, 90% of the corresponding pattern storage table for the first rare parts high probability state is selected, and 10% is selected from other corresponding pattern storage tables, depending on the game state. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the corresponding pattern storage tables that are more likely to be selected are different.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the rare parts high probability state (pattern high probability state) in which the corresponding pattern storage table for the first and second rare parts high probability states is selected, the decorative pattern display device 42 (for example, the display unit ), a display that teaches that the rare parts are in a high probability state, for example, a display such as "rare item high probability" is derived.

Furthermore, in the rare parts high certainty state, in the decorative pattern display device 42, the character object 423 performs only the first rare parts high certainty state (gesture) and the second rare parts high certainty state. Or, when the rare parts high probability state is approaching (for example, when the variable display is performed 30 times, the state moves to the first or second rare parts high probability state). . In addition, various game explanations may be performed on the decorative pattern display device 42 during normal variable display. Maybe" is explained.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the special display devices 43L and 43R (decorative pattern display device 42) are not displayed in a variable display of the identification information, and furthermore, a predetermined time has passed since the variable display is completed. Even in the demonstration screen display derived to the decorative pattern display device 42, the decorative pattern display device 42 displays a display that teaches that the rare parts are in a high probability state, for example, a display such as "rare item high probability" is derived. It is designed to be In this embodiment, the decorative pattern display device 42 corresponds to the rare pattern high probability state teaching means.

It should be noted that, while the demo screen is being displayed, by operating the effect button 125 or the cross button 126, a display that teaches that the rare parts high probability state is in progress may be derived. Also, the demonstration screen display may be configured so that the player cannot know that the player is in the rare parts high probability state.

Returning to the description of FIG. 51, after step S7106, in step S7107, in the customization information storage area of the reservation area of the reservation information storage area, the customization item determined in step S7105 matches the customization item determined in step S7106. It is determined whether or not there is stored information of the same part object 433 as the customized pattern.

In this embodiment, (the value indicating) the customization item determined in step S7105 is stored (overwritten) in the item area of the customization information storage area. 0 to 5" is set, "front of body" corresponds to "0", "rear of body" corresponds to "1", "door" corresponds to "2", and "tire" corresponds to "3", "engine & muffler" corresponds to "4", and "coloring" corresponds to "5".

If a negative determination is made in step S7107, then in step S7109 the parts object 433 is determined based on the customization items and customization patterns determined in steps S7105 and S7106, and the pending information storage area In addition to storing in the reserved icon storage area of the corresponding reserved area, processing for additionally displaying the item reserved icon 416 for the increase this time is performed on the reserved display area 405 at the lower left of the decorative pattern display device 42. . That is, when the information indicating the part object 433 is stored in the reserved icon storage area, the reserved item icon 416 of the corresponding part object 433 is displayed in the reserved display area 405 .

However, in the present embodiment, up to four pending icons 411 are simultaneously displayed in the pending display area 405, and the second variable display (variation based on the ball entering the second start winning device 33b) display) is given priority over the first variable display (variable display based on the ball entering the first start-up winning device 33a), so in step S7109, first, the current pending icon 411 is displayed in the order of variation. If it is within the 4th place, and if it is within the 4th place, it is determined what the order is. Then, if it is within the fourth, the pattern of the pending icon 411 is grasped by referring to the pending icon storage area of the corresponding pending area, and the pending icon 411 drawn based on the pattern is displayed in the pending display area 405. displayed at the corresponding position. After step S7109, this processing ends.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the holding icon 411 displays the first variable display based on the ball entering the first starting prize winning device 33a, and the second fluctuation display based on the ball entering the second starting prize winning device 33b. It is in such a manner that it is not specified which of the two variable displays it corresponds to. However, by checking the variation specific lamp 40 or checking the transition of the lighting state of the holding lamps 46a and 46b, it is possible to determine which of the start winning devices 33a and 33b the variation display is based on the entry of the ball. is configured so that Further, in the present embodiment, the effect of changing the color of the normal hold icon 412 is not performed in the mobile-linked game state, but it may be configured to be performed.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S7107 is affirmative, that is, if the reserved item icon 416 of the same part object 433 is already displayed in the reserved display area 405, then in step S7108, the item region of the customization information storage area is displayed. "1" is added to the value stored in (if adding "1" results in "6", set "0"). As a result, the customization item is changed. After step S7108, the process returns to step S7107. That is, the process of changing the customization item is repeated until a negative determination is made in step S7107. With this configuration, it is possible to avoid a situation in which two or more identical item pending icons 416 (part objects 433 ) are displayed in the pending display area 405 .

If a negative determination is made in step S7103, that is, if the game is not in the mobile-linked gaming state, then in step S7110 processing is performed to set the pending icon 411 (normal pending icon 412) in the non-mobile-linked gaming state. In other words, in the non-mobile-linked gaming state, the reserve icon 411 (item reserve icon 416) having the part object 433 is not displayed, while the normal reserve icon 412 (in this example, the jewel 414 on the pedestal 413) is not displayed. It is configured to change and suggest the degree of expectation for winning such as a big hit (perform a look-ahead pending notice effect).

Specifically, first, the value of the pattern random number counter is acquired from the corresponding counter buffer and stored in the customization information storage area (pattern area) of the corresponding reservation area among the reservation information storage areas. Note that the pattern random number counter and the customization information storage area are also used when setting the item reserve icon 416 (part object 433) when playing a mobile-linked game, and are shared in this embodiment. is planned.

Further, a normal pending pattern storage table as a non-mobile-linked pattern table that stores the correspondence between the value of the pattern random number counter and the pattern of the item pending icon 416 (the color of the jewel 414) is referenced, and the customized information is stored. It is determined whether or not the value of the pattern random number counter stored in the area (pattern area) corresponds to the pattern (color of the jewel 414) of any of the reserved item icons 416. FIG. Then, information indicating the pattern of the corresponding reserved item icon 416 is stored in the customization information storage area (region for pattern) of the corresponding reserved area.

A plurality of normal pending pattern storage tables are provided. In this embodiment, the one for the big win/small win selected when the big win state or the small win state occurs, the one for the front-back off selected when the front-back off reach occurs, and the reach other than the front-back off There are those for other than the front and back that are selected when is generated, and those for other than those that are selected in other cases (when reach does not occur), and each is selected in the case of a low ball entry state. There are prepared two each of one that is selected in the case of a high ball entry state and the other that is selected in the case of a high ball entry state.

In addition, in this embodiment, when referring to the normal reserved pattern storage table for front and back, a color with a high winning expectation is selected as compared to the case of referring to the normal reserved pattern storage table for big wins and small wins. When referring to the normal pending pattern storage table for failures other than front and back, it is harder to win than when the customized winning value storage table for big wins and small wins is referred to. In this embodiment, the default color of the jewel 414 is white, and the colors are associated so that the probability of winning is high, such as blue<yellow<green<red<rainbow. In addition, in this embodiment, even when each normal pending pattern storage table is referred to in step S7110, which is performed when it is determined that the winner is selected in step S7102, it is configured so that white may be selected. there is

In addition, when the customized winning value storage table for other items is referred to, a color with a low winning expectation is more likely to be selected than when the normal reserved pattern storage table for failure other than front and back is referred to. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the normal holding pattern storage table is referred to in the high ball entry state, a color with a higher probability of winning is selected than when the normal holding pattern storage table is referred to in the low ball entry state. it's getting harder.

After that, the determined pattern of the normal suspended icon 412 is stored in the suspended icon storage area. In the present embodiment, when "white" is selected as the pattern of the normal pending icon 412 (no other pattern is selected), no particular storage processing is performed in the pending icon storage area, and the default value It is designed to be left as is.

After step S7110, in step S7111, a holding process for additionally displaying the normal holding icon 412 for the increase this time is performed on the holding display area 405 at the lower left of the decorative pattern display device 42. FIG. That is, when information indicating the normal pending icon 412 is stored in the pending icon storage area, the corresponding normal pending icon 412 is displayed in the pending display area 405 .

However, in the step S7111, first, it is determined that the pending icon 411 of this time is within the fourth place in the change order, and if it is within the fourth place, it is determined what number it is. Then, if it is within the fourth, the pattern of the pending icon 411 is grasped by referring to the pending icon storage area of the corresponding pending area, and the pending icon 411 drawn based on the pattern is displayed in the pending display area 405. displayed at the corresponding position. After step S7111, the process ends.

If a negative determination is made in step S7102, additional display processing of the normal pending icon 412 is performed in step S7112. That is, since the default value is set in the pending icon storage area, based on this value, normal pending icons 412 (white jewel 414) is additionally displayed.

However, even in the step S7112, it is determined that the pending icon 411 of this time is within the 4th in the change order, and if it is within the 4th, the specific number is grasped, and within the 4th , the normal pending icon 412 is displayed at the corresponding position in the pending display area 405 . After step S7112, this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 55, a description will be given of the processing at the time of customization change which is performed when the decorative symbols start to change. First, in step S7201, it is determined whether or not the customization chance flag in the execution area of the pending information storage area is set to ON. If a negative determination is made in step S7201, this processing ends.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S7201 is affirmative, then in step S7202 processing is performed to display a parts selection screen as shown in FIG. Specifically, based on the information of the part object 433 stored in the pending icon storage area of the execution area, The part object 433 is displayed in the center of the screen of the decorative pattern display device 42 (in this example, it is displayed in the same manner as the item reserve icon 416). Furthermore, above the parts object 433 in the center of the screen, an explanation "Do you want to adopt the acquired parts?" are displayed, and selection input is possible by operating the cross button 126 and the production button 125 . In the tuning area 406, a portion of the unfinished vehicle 431 corresponding to the part object 433 in the center of the screen is blinking.

In subsequent step S7203, the display time (input time limit) for displaying the parts selection screen is set in the timing measurement timer. More specifically, in this embodiment, the decorative pattern 421 (in this example, basically, the left pattern display The parts selection screen is displayed in such a way that the image is replaced during the high-speed fluctuation state period (high-speed fluctuation period) until the decoration pattern 421) of the area 401 is stopped and displayed. Therefore, in step S7203, the time of the high-speed fluctuation period of the variable display is grasped, and a value corresponding to that time is set in the timing measurement timer.

After step S7203, in step S7204, the parts selection screen displaying flag indicating that the parts selection screen is being displayed is turned on, and then this processing ends.

Next, parts selection processing, which is processing during display of the parts selection screen, will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S7301, it is determined whether or not the parts selection screen displaying flag is set to ON. If a negative determination is made in step S7301, this processing ends.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S7301 is affirmative, it is determined in step S7302 whether or not "no" has been input on the parts selection screen. If the determination in step S7302 is affirmative, in step S7303 processing is performed to erase the parts selection screen. Subsequently, in step S7304, the part selection screen displaying flag is turned off, and this process ends.

If a negative determination is made in step S7302, it is determined in step S7305 whether or not "yes" has been input on the parts selection screen. If the determination in step S7305 is affirmative, in step S7306, the part object 433 displayed in the center of the parts selection screen is reflected in the corresponding part (corresponding customization item) of the unfinished vehicle 431 in the tuning area 406. Set the reflection flag to ON. After step S7306, the processing of steps S7303 and S7304 is executed, and then this processing ends.

If a negative determination is made in step S7305, it is determined in step S7307 whether or not the timing measurement timer has reached "0". If the determination in step S7307 is negative, the value of the timing measurement timer is decremented by 1 in step S7308, and this process ends.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S7307 is affirmative, that is, if the display (possible) period of the parts selection screen has ended, the reflection flag is turned on in step S7306, and then the processing in steps S7303 and S7304 is executed. After that, this process is terminated. In this embodiment, if no selection input of "yes" or "no" is performed within the display period of the parts selection screen, it is considered that selection input of "yes" has been performed. Although the reflection flag is turned on, it is also possible to employ a configuration in which the reflection flag is not set to on.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the display (possible) period of the parts selection screen corresponds to the high-speed fluctuation period of the variable display of the decorative design in the decorative design display device 42, and during the display period of the parts selection screen, ', 'No' is not performed at all, the parts selection screen is erased and the high-speed variation of the decorative pattern is terminated. In addition, if "Yes" or "No" is selected during the display period of the parts selection screen, the high-speed fluctuation display will be displayed until the high-speed fluctuation period of the decorative pattern fluctuation display ends. The Rukoto.

Next, a reflection process for reflecting the part object 433 to the unfinished vehicle 431 will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, in this embodiment, the number of completed vehicles 441 displayed in the gallery area 407 is up to two. When the unfinished car 431 of 406 is completed, the player is asked to select one of the three completed cars 441 including the just completed car 441 and erase it. At this time, information on the remaining two completed vehicles 441 is stored in the completed customization storage area.

First, in step S7401, it is determined whether or not the reflection flag is set to ON. If a negative determination is made in step S7401, this processing ends. On the other hand, if the determination in step S7401 is affirmative, in step S7402, the part object 433 (the part object displayed in the center of the parts selection screen) stored in the pending icon storage area in the execution area of the pending information storage area 433) is stored in the corresponding storage area of the unfinished customization storage area.

The unfinished vehicle 431 displayed on the decorative pattern display device 42 is drawn based on the information stored in the unfinished customization storage area. Therefore, storing the information of the part object 433 in the unfinished customization storage area results in reflecting the part object 433 on the corresponding part (corresponding customization item) of the unfinished vehicle 431 . Incidentally, the completed vehicle 441 is drawn based on the information stored in the completed customization storage area.

After step S7402, in step S7403, it is determined whether or not the unfinished vehicle 431 in the tuning area 406 has been completed. It is determined whether or not the information of the part object 433 is stored in all of the storage areas (whether or not the default value is lost).

If a negative determination is made in step S7403, that is, if there is a customization item for which the part object 433 has not yet been set for the unfinished vehicle 431, in step S7404, the decoration design display device 42 stores the pending information. Processing for performing a reflection display such that the part object 433 stored in the pending icon storage area of the execution area of the area is attached (customized) to the unfinished vehicle 431 in the tuning area 406 (reflection display when unfinished) process).

By performing the unfinished time reflection display process, the reflection display performed by the decorative design display device 42 is displayed in the center of the screen on the parts selection screen (see FIG. 48), as shown in FIG. The parts object 433 is displayed in the tuning area 406 at the bottom right of the screen, and is fitted to the corresponding part of the unfinished vehicle 431. The fitted part object 433 blinks brightly for a while. will be After step S7404, this process ends.

If the determination in step S7403 is affirmative, that is, if the part object 433 is reflected in all the customization items of the unfinished vehicle 431 in the tuning area 406, and the completed vehicle 441 is obtained, in step S7405, the unfinished vehicle The information stored in the customized storage area is stored (copied) in the completed vehicle accumulation storage area.

In this embodiment, in addition to the completed customization storage area and the unfinished customization storage area, a completed vehicle accumulation storage area is provided as completed object accumulation storage means for storing information on the completed vehicle 441 completed in the current mobile-linked game. ing. When the unfinished vehicle 431 in the tuning area 406 is completed, the information of the completed vehicle 441 (combination of the part objects 433, etc.) is always stored in the completed vehicle accumulation storage area. The stored contents of the completed vehicle accumulation storage area are erased even if the information of the corresponding completed vehicle 441 in the completed customized storage area is deleted (the corresponding completed vehicle 441 is deleted on the screen of the decorative pattern display device 42). The data is stored continuously (for example, data for 50 vehicles can be accumulated and stored). However, when closing the code issue screen after issuing a QR code to end the mobile-linked game, the stored information in the completed vehicle accumulation storage area, completed customization storage area, and unfinished customization storage area may be transferred to other individuals. It will be erased (default value will be set) together with the data (game information of the player who ended the mobile-linked game, etc.).

When the mobile-linked game is finished, the completed vehicle accumulation storage area and the unfinished customization storage area are referred to when the QR code is issued, and the completed vehicle-linked game completed for this mobile-linked game is stored in the QR code. Information on the car 441 and information on the unfinished car 431 at the end of the mobile-linked game are set to be included. Corresponding to each player, the server has a server-side finished car accumulation storage area for accumulating and storing information on the finished car 441 that the player has completed so far, and a server side finished car accumulation storage area for storing information on the unfinished car 431 . and a completed vehicle storage area. When the server receives the information about the customization, the server stores the information of the unfinished car 431 at the end of the game in the unfinished car storage area, and configures the newly completed car 441 in the current game. When the combination of the part objects 433 is new, the information of the completed vehicle 441 is accumulated (additionally) stored in the server-side completed vehicle accumulation storage area. In this embodiment, the server-side completed-vehicle accumulation storage area and the unfinished-vehicle storage area constitute server-side continuous display object information storage means.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the player is configured to be able to make customization settings on the web page of the server. Such setting items include, for example, setting whether or not to take over the contents of the unfinished car 431 at the end of the previous mobile-linked game (if the setting is not made, "take over" is selected); A setting for selecting up to two completed vehicles 441 to be displayed in the gallery area 407 of the decorative pattern display device 42 at the start of the mobile-linked game from the displayed completed vehicle list (if the setting is not made, " None” is selected). The password includes setting information related to such customization.

Then, in the next mobile-linked game, by inputting the password to the pachinko machine 10, the unfinished car 431 at the end of the previous game is displayed in the tuning area 406 of the decoration pattern display device 42, and customization is continued from there. is possible, and a desired completed car 441 can be displayed in the gallery area 407. FIG.

After step S7405, in step S7406, it is determined whether or not the gallery area 407 has space, that is, at least one of the first completed customization storage area and the second completed customization storage area stores the information of the completed vehicle 441. It is determined whether or not the default value is set. More specifically, for example, by referring to the storage area corresponding to the predetermined customization item in the first customization storage area, it is determined whether or not it is the default value. A storage area corresponding to a predetermined customization item in the completed customization storage area may be referenced to determine whether or not it is a default value.

It should be noted that when confirming whether or not information on the completed vehicle 441 is stored in the completed customization storage area in step S7406 or the like, reference is made to storage areas provided corresponding to a plurality of customization items in each completed customization storage area. If the memory area is determined, the memory contents of the referenced memory area can be erased without erasing all the memory contents of the memory areas provided corresponding to the plurality of customization items in each completed customization memory area. It will be determined that the information on the completed vehicle 441 is not stored just by storing it. Therefore, when erasing the memory of each completed customization storage area, by adopting a configuration that erases only the storage area that may be referred to when confirming whether the information of the completed vehicle 441 is stored, the It is possible to simplify the processing related to erasure.

If the determination in step S7406 is affirmative, that is, if there is space in the gallery area 407 (only one completed car 441 is displayed, or none is displayed), in step S7407, The information stored in the unfinished customization storage area is stored (copied) in the empty first completed customization storage area or the second completed customization storage area.

In the subsequent step S7408, the part object 433 stored in the pending icon storage area of the execution area of the pending information storage area in the decoration design display device 42 is attached to the unfinished vehicle 431 in the tuning area 406 (customized). ) and completion display such that the unfinished vehicle 431 displayed in the tuning area 406 is completed and moved to the gallery area 407 (reflection display processing at the time of completion). After step S7408, the stored information in the incomplete customization storage area is reset (set to a default value) in step S7409, and this processing ends.

If a negative determination is made in step S7406, that is, if two finished cars 441 are already displayed in gallery area 407 and unfinished car 431 in tuning area 406 is completed, then in step S7410, A process for displaying a completed vehicle selection screen for allowing the player to select one vehicle to be deleted from among the three completed vehicles 441 is performed.

For example, as shown in FIG. 50, on the finished car selection screen, an explanation such as "The car is full. Please select one finished car to be erased." Horizontally in the center of the display device 42, from the left, a completed vehicle 441 corresponding to the first completed customization storage area, a completed vehicle 441 corresponding to the second completed customization storage area, and a completed vehicle 441 corresponding to the unfinished customization storage area. is displayed, and a selection item such as “delete this” is displayed below each completed vehicle 441 . In addition, on the finished car selection screen, for example, you can check all finished cars (including deleted ones) obtained today by accessing the homepage (server) after finishing the game (linked to mobile). Furthermore, in the next mobile-linked game, you will be able to select the finished car that you have already obtained and use it in the actual machine (pachinko machine), and use it for production etc.” For example, scroll display from right to left below the selection items (not shown in FIG. 50) is performed.

After step S7410, in step S7411, the display time (input time limit) of the finished car selection screen is set in the timing measurement timer. In the present embodiment, the display period of the completed vehicle selection screen is set to end at least until the variable display of the decorative symbols for which the completed vehicle selection screen is displayed ends. For example, in the case of "big win", "minor win", "front-rear out-of-reach reach", and "reach other than front-rear out-of-order reach" in which the reach state occurs, the reach state is started. On the other hand, in the case of "completely out" where the reach state does not occur, it is until just before the end of the variable display. Therefore, in step S7411, the type of variable display and the remaining variable time are grasped, and the corresponding values are set in the timing measurement timer.

After step S7411, in step S7412, the completed vehicle selection screen displaying flag indicating that the completed vehicle selection screen is being displayed is turned on, and then this processing is terminated.

Next, the completed vehicle selection process, which is performed while the completed vehicle selection screen is being displayed, will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S7501, it is determined whether or not the completed vehicle selection screen displaying flag indicating that the completed vehicle selection screen is being displayed is set to ON. If a negative determination is made in step S7501, this processing ends.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S7501 is affirmative, then in step S7502 it is determined whether or not an input to erase the first completed customization storage area has been made, that is, whether the completed vehicle displayed on the left side of the completed vehicle selection screen is displayed. It is determined whether or not the performance button 125 is operated while the cursor is placed on the option positioned below. If the determination in step S7502 is affirmative, in step S7503, the information stored in the incomplete customization storage area is stored (overwritten) in the first completed customization storage area.

After step S7503, in step S7504, the information stored in the unfinished customization storage area is reset (default value is set). In the subsequent step S7505, processing is performed to display the completed car 441 that has not been erased so as to shift to the gallery area 407. FIG. After step S7505, in step S7511, the completed car selection screen displaying flag is turned off, and then this process is terminated.

If a negative determination is made in step S7502, it is checked in step S7506 whether or not an input to erase the second completed customization storage area has been performed. It is determined whether or not the performance button 125 is operated while the cursor is placed on the option positioned below. If the determination in step S7506 is affirmative, in step S7507, the information stored in the incomplete customization storage area is stored (overwritten) in the second completed customization storage area. After step S7507, the processing of steps S7504, S7505, and S7511 is executed, and then this processing ends.

If a negative determination is made in step S7506, it is checked in step S7508 if an input to erase the unfinished customization storage area has been made. It is determined whether or not the performance button 125 is operated while the cursor is placed on the option located at . If the determination in step S7508 is affirmative, the processing in steps S7504, S7505, and S7511 is executed, and then this processing ends.

If the determination in step S7508 is negative, it is determined in step S7509 whether or not the value of the timing measurement timer has become zero. If the determination in step S7509 is negative, the value of the timing measurement timer is decremented by 1 in step S7510, and then this process ends. On the other hand, if the determination in step S7509 is affirmative, the processing in steps S7504, S7505, and S7511 is executed, and then this processing ends. That is, if the player does not perform an erasing input operation while the finished car selection screen is displayed, the unfinished car 431 displayed in the tuning area 406 is returned to a state in which it has not been customized at all, and is displayed in the gallery area 407. The completed car 441 is left as it is.

Now, in this embodiment, when the sub-controller 262 receives a variation pattern command corresponding to "big hit", "small hit", or "front and back reach" from the main control device 261, reach production (super There is a case where "car presentation" is selected as one of reach presentations. For example, when setting the variable display in step S3907, when the variable display that teaches the occurrence of the big win state and the small win state, the "car effect" is selected at a rate of 3/4, and the front and back out reach is derived. "Car effect" is selected at a ratio of 1/2 for the variable display. The sub-control device 262 of the present embodiment is provided with a "car effect flag" indicating that the "car effect" is derived. , the car effect flag is turned on.

Next, referring to FIG. 59, a description will be given of the car effect setting process performed when the "car effect" is determined. Incidentally, the car effect processing is also performed in the display setting processing of step S3907 when setting the variable display of decorative symbols.

First, in step S7601, it is determined whether or not the car effect flag is ON. If a negative determination is made in step S7601, this processing ends. On the other hand, if the determination in step S7601 is affirmative, it is determined in step S7602 whether or not the mobile-linked game is being played.

If the determination in step S7602 is affirmative, it is determined in step S7603 whether it is a "normal stage" or a "precursor stage." As described above, the normal stage is an effect state corresponding to the normal mode, and the sign stage is an effect state suggesting that the player is staying in either the normal mode or the latent probability mode.

If the determination in step S7603 is affirmative, in step S7604, the pending icon storage area (customization chance flag) in the execution area of the pending information storage area is referenced, and a customization chance is given in the variable display (parts selection screen is displayed). If the determination in step S7604 is negative, that is, if the customization chance is not given, normal car effect setting processing is performed in step S7605.

Here, an outline of the car presentation in the normal stage and the precursor stage will be described. The car presentation is divided into a "competition part" and a "preparation part before the competition". First, when the car presentation is started, the type of car presentation is taught, preparation for the competition is started, and the completed car 441 to participate in the competition is selected. Therefore, when two completed cars 441 are displayed in the gallery area 407, a screen is displayed to prompt the player to select one of them. Then, when the selection input is performed, until the start timing of the competition arrives, a display that introduces the selected completed car 441 is performed, and when the start timing of the competition comes, An effect is started in which a predetermined character rides on the selected completed car 441 and a battle with a rival character unfolds in the selected game.

In addition, in the car presentation (regular car presentation) of the normal stage and the omen stage in the present embodiment, it is "success" when it becomes a jackpot with balls (16RS, 8RS, 8RN), and when it becomes a front and back out reach (miss). ``failure'', and in the case of a probability variable jackpot (2RS) or a small hit with no balls, it is ``unsettled (draw)''.

If the selection input is not performed until the start timing of the competition arrives, the finished car 441 (the left finished car 441) corresponding to the first customized finished car storage area is automatically selected. Also, when only one completed vehicle 441 is displayed in the gallery area 407, the completed vehicle 441 is automatically selected. Furthermore, when no completed car 441 is displayed in the gallery area 407, the family car is automatically selected.

Further, in the present embodiment, the combination of the "type of car presentation (competition)" and the "type of the completed car 441 used in the car presentation (participating in the competition)" determines the success of the "car presentation". The degree of expectation, that is, the degree of expectation for the occurrence of a jackpot state with paid balls is suggested. As described above, the types (systems) of the completed vehicle 441 of the present embodiment include sports car system, family car system, armored vehicle system, 4WD car system, decoration car system, truck system, and cart system.

Furthermore, the types of car presentation include "race presentation", "strength comparison presentation", "contest presentation", and "date presentation". "Race effect" is relatively advantageous for "sports car system, family car system" (hereinafter these two systems are collectively referred to as "group A"), and "strength comparison effect" is for "armored car system, 4WD car system". System" (hereinafter collectively referred to as "group B") is advantageous, and "contest production" is "decoration car system, truck system" (hereinafter collectively referred to as "group C"). ) is advantageous. In addition, "Sports Car" has an advantage over "Family Car", "Armored Car" has an advantage over "4WD Car", and "Decoration Car" has an advantage over "Truck". such a correspondence is made. In addition, the “date effect” is set so that there is no superiority or inferiority among “group A” to “group C”. Regarding the "mix system" and "cart system", there is no superiority or inferiority in the type of "car effect".

Here, the normal car effect setting processing in step S7605 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S7701, it is determined whether or not information on the completed vehicle 441 is stored in the first customized completed vehicle storage area. If the determination in step S7701 is affirmative, in step S7702, confirmation processing of the type of completed vehicle 441 stored in the first customized completion storage area is performed. In other words, each customization item in the first completed customization storage area is checked, and in the present embodiment, when three or more customization items are grouped together in the same system, such a system is assigned to the completed vehicle 441. If the number of customization items of the same system is two or less at most, it is determined as other (hereinafter also referred to as "mixed system").

In addition, the sub-control device 262 is provided with system discrimination flags used in the car effect setting process, and the system discrimination flags are sports car system, family car system, armored car system, 4WD car system, decoration car system. , a truck system, a cart system, and a mix system. Then, the system determination flag corresponding to the type (system) of the completed vehicle 441 determined in step S7702 is turned on in step S7703.

After step S7703, or if a negative determination is made in step S7701, it is determined in step S7704 whether or not information on the completed vehicle 441 is stored in the second customized completion storage area. If the determination in step S7704 is affirmative, in step S7705, confirmation processing of the type of completed vehicle 441 stored in the second customized completion storage area is performed. In the subsequent step S7706, the system identification flag corresponding to the type (system) of the completed vehicle 441 determined in step S7705 is set to ON. After step S7706, the process proceeds to step S7709.

If the determination in step S7704 is negative, it is determined in step S7707 whether or not the information on the completed vehicle 441 is stored in the first customization storage area. If a negative determination is made in step S7707, that is, if neither the first customization storage area nor the second customization storage area stores information about the completed vehicle 441 (the completed vehicle 441 is stored in the gallery area 407). If there is not even one), in step S7708, the system discrimination flag corresponding to the family car system is set to ON. After step S7708, or when an affirmative determination is made in step S7707, the process proceeds to step S7709.

In step S7709, the system determination flag is referenced to determine whether the type of the completed vehicle 441 is either the "cart system" or the "mixed car system". In the present embodiment, when determining the type of the completed vehicle 441 by referring to the system determination flag, the following operations are performed: "flag corresponding to cart"→"flag corresponding to decoration car"→"flag corresponding to armored car"→"sports car". "flags corresponding to trucks"→"flags corresponding to trucks"→"flags corresponding to 4WD cars"→"flags corresponding to family cars" (rare order). Then, when it is confirmed that the system discrimination flag is set to ON (even if two system discrimination flags are ON), the process of identifying the type of the completed vehicle 441 ends.

When a negative determination is made in step S7709, it is determined in step S7710 whether or not the current car presentation will succeed, that is, whether or not there will be a jackpot with payout balls. If the determination in step S7710 is affirmative, in step S7711, the type of car effect is determined based on the value of the car effect random number counter by referring to the car effect table for success.

The car effect random number counter is, for example, incremented one by one within the range of 0 to 14, and after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 14) as the closing value, returns to 0 as the lower limit value as the opening value. . The car effect random number counter is updated periodically (for example, each normal process) and the value is stored in the corresponding counter buffer. At step S7711, the value of the car effect random number counter is obtained from the counter buffer. The car effect table is a table that stores the correspondence between the value of the car effect random number counter and the type (type category) of the car effect, and as shown in FIG. , "for draw", "for special success", and "for special failure/tie" are provided.

More specifically, the process of step S7711 will be described in more detail. As shown in FIG. 62(a), when referring to the car effect table for success, when the value of the car effect random number counter is "0 to 5", Then, when the type of car effect is determined as "category 1" and the value of the car effect random number counter is "6 to 9", it is determined as the type of car effect of "category 2" and the value of the car effect random number counter is determined. is "10 to 12", it is determined as a "category 3" car effect type, and when the value of the car effect random number counter is "13, 14", it is determined as a "category 4" car effect type. be done.

Next, referring to the vehicle model correspondence table shown in FIG. 63, which stores the correspondence relationship between the vehicle type (vehicle group) and the vehicle presentation type (category), the vehicle model group of the completed vehicle 441 and the vehicle presentation are stored. The type of car presentation is determined based on the type category. In other words, when the vehicle type group is "group A; sports car series, family car series", if the type category of car presentation is "category 1", "race presentation" is selected, and the type category of car presentation is " In the case of "category 2", "date effect" is selected, when the type category of car effect is "category 3", "contest effect" is selected, and when the type category of car effect is "category 4", , "strength comparison production" is selected.

In addition, when the vehicle type group is "Group B; armored car system, 4WD car system", if the type category of car presentation is "category 1", "strength comparison presentation" is selected, and the type category of car presentation is " In the case of "category 2", "date effect" is selected, when the type category of car effect is "category 3", "race effect" is selected, and when the type category of car effect is "category 4", , "contest production" is selected.

Furthermore, when the vehicle type group is "group C; decoration car system, truck system", if the type category of car presentation is "category 1", "contest presentation" is selected, and the type category of car presentation is "category 2", "Date effect" is selected, when the car effect type category is "Category 3", "Strength comparison effect" is selected, and when the car effect type category is "Category 4", , "Race production" is selected.

After step S7711, this processing ends. If a negative determination is made in step S7710, it is determined in step S7712 whether or not the car presentation fails, that is, whether or not the variable display corresponds to "out (back and forth)". If the determination in step S7712 is affirmative, in step S7713, based on the value of the car effect random number counter, etc., the car effect table for failure (see FIG. 62(b)) is referred to, and the car effect type category is determined. is determined, and the type of car presentation is determined based on the type category of the car presentation and the vehicle type group. After step S7713, this process ends.

If a negative determination is made in step S7712, that is, if it is a big win (2RS) or a small win with no balls released, then in step S7714, based on the value of the car effect random number counter, etc., a car effect table for draw is generated. Referring to FIG. 62(c), the type category of car presentation is determined, and the type of car presentation is determined based on the type category of car presentation and the vehicle type group. After step S7714, this process ends.

If the determination in step S7709 is affirmative, it is determined in step S7715 whether or not the car presentation will succeed. If the determination in step S7715 is affirmative, in step S7716, based on the value of the car effect random number counter, etc., the car effect table for special success (see FIG. 62(d)) is referred to, and the type of car effect is determined. The category is determined, and the type of car presentation is determined based on the type category of the car presentation and the vehicle type group. After step S7716, this process ends.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S7715 is affirmative, in step S7717, based on the value of the car effect random number counter, etc., the car effect table for special failure/tie (see FIG. 62(e)) is referred to. The type category of the car presentation is determined, and the type of the car presentation is determined based on the type category of the car presentation and the vehicle type group. After step S7717, this processing ends.

Returning to the description of FIG. 59, after step S7605, the car effect flag is turned off in step S7606. In the subsequent step S7611, a car performance execution flag indicating that the car performance is set is turned on, and in step S7612, a value corresponding to a car performance timer for measuring the time until the car performance is executed is set. do. After that, this process is terminated.

In addition, if the determination in step S7604 is affirmative, that is, if a customization chance is provided (a parts selection screen is displayed) in the variable display, the vehicle effect is not set in step S7606. After turning off the effect flag and performing the processing of steps S7611 and S7612, this processing ends. That is, as described above, in the car presentation, the type of the finished car 441 and the type of the car presentation are associated with each other in accordance with the degree of expectation for winning such as the occurrence of a jackpot state with balls being paid out. In the stage and the omen stage, the player selects the completed car 441 to be used for the car presentation from among the completed cars 441 displayed in the gallery area 407 . Therefore, in the configuration in which the type of car presentation is determined at the start of the variable display, if the number of completed cars 441 used in the car presentation is increased or changed after the type of car presentation is determined, There is a possibility that a discrepancy may occur between the correspondence relationship between the type of the completed car 441 and the type of car presentation and the winning expectation. Therefore, in order to avoid such a situation, this example is configured not to derive the car presentation in the variable display in which the unfinished car 431 in the tuning area 406 may be completed.

Also, if a negative determination is made in step S7603, it is determined in step S7607 whether or not it is the variable probability stage. When the affirmative determination is made in step S7607, in step S7608, the setting of the car effect in the variable probability stage (the vehicle effect setting process at the time of the variable probability) is performed.

In the "car effect" of the "variable stage", when it becomes a jackpot with balls (16RS, 8RS), that is, when it becomes "continuation of the variable stage after the occurrence of the jackpot state", it becomes "success", ), it becomes "not settled (draw)", and if it becomes a normal jackpot (2RN) or a small hit without balls, that is, if "the variable stage ends", or "the end of the variable stage is pretended "Failure" if the variable stage of "continues (fakes)".

In addition, in the "probability variable stage", the appearance of the background and the like on the decorative pattern display device 42 is different from that in the "normal stage" and the "forecast stage", and basically the completed vehicle 441 is displayed continuously running. In this embodiment, at the end of the jackpot state (the timing of the end of the ending effect) or after the end, it is determined whether or not it is the variable probability mode, and if it is determined to be the variable probability mode, the occurrence of this jackpot state is " When instructed by "car presentation", a display that the completed car 441 used for the car presentation is running is made on the decorative pattern display device 42. - 特許庁On the other hand, in the case of the winning instruction other than the car presentation, there is a display for selecting a completed car 441 to be run at the end of or after the big win from the completed cars displayed in the gallery area 407. done. In addition, even after the start of the probability variable stage, it is possible to replace the running finished car 441 with the finished car 441 in the gallery area by the player's operation, but during the variable display in which the "car effect" is performed. is configured such that the opportunity to change the completed vehicle 441 is not given. In other words, the running completed car 441 is directly derived to the "car presentation". Therefore, in the variable probability car effect setting process of step S7608, since the type of the completed car 441 used for the car effect is specified at the start of the variable display, the normal car effect setting process (see FIG. 60) is performed. The same processing as the processing from S7709 onwards (however, the relationship between the success or failure of the car presentation and the type of winning is different) is performed.

After step S7608, the car effect flag is turned off in step S7606, and after performing the processing of steps S7611 and S7612, this processing ends. In the "probability variable stage" as well, the customization of the unfinished vehicle 431 and the like are performed in the same manner as in the "normal stage" and the "sign stage".

Also, if a negative determination is made in step S7607, that is, if the pull-back stage (either the time reduction mode or the variable probability mode, but no instruction is given as to which one), then in step S7609 , the setting of the car performance in the pullback stage (retraction car performance setting process) is performed.

In the "car effect" of the "pull-back stage", when it becomes a jackpot with balls (16RS, 8RS), that is, when it becomes "shift to a variable stage after the occurrence of a jackpot state", it becomes "success", and the front and rear out reach ( If it becomes a loss), it becomes "failure", and if it becomes a normal jackpot (2RN) with no balls or a small win, it becomes "not settled (draw)".

Furthermore, in the "pull-back stage", similarly to the "probability variable stage", basically the completed vehicle 441 continues to run (the background and the like are different from those of the "probability variable stage"). Then, in step S7609, the type of the running completed car 441 is grasped, and the same processing as the variable probability car effect setting process (however, the correspondence between the success or failure of the car effect and the winning type is different) is performed. It will happen.

After step S7609, the car effect flag is turned off in step S7606, and after performing the processing of steps S7611 and S7612, this processing ends. In the "pull-back stage" as well, the customization of the unfinished vehicle 431 is performed in the same manner as in the "normal stage" and the "precursor stage".

Also, if the determination in step S7602 is negative, in step S7610, a non-mobile interlocking car effect setting process is performed. In the non-mobile-linked game state, the car used in the car presentation cannot be customized, and the sub-control device 262 unilaterally selects the car (completed car 441) to be used in the car presentation. be. Therefore, regarding the non-mobile interlocking car effect setting process, after the process of selecting the completed car 441 to be used for the car effect is performed, the same process as the variable probability car effect setting process (however, the success or failure of the car effect , the corresponding relationship with the hit type is different) will be performed. After step S7610, this process ends.

In the non-mobile-linked game state, the car presentation may be configured such that, for example, only the family car system is used, or a lottery may be performed to determine the vehicle type.

Next, the car presentation execution processing when executing the car presentation will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S7801, it is determined whether or not the car effect execution flag is set to ON. If a negative determination is made in step S7801, this processing ends.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S7801, in step S7802, a used car selection screen is displayed to prompt the player to select the finished car 441 to be used in the car presentation. It is determined whether or not the screen display flag is set to ON. If the determination in step S7802 is negative, it is determined in step S7803 whether or not the value of the car effect timer has become zero. If the determination in step S7803 is negative, in step S7804, the value of the car effect timer is decremented by 1, and this process ends.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S7803, it is determined in step S7805 whether or not the mobile-linked game is in progress. If the determination in step S7805 is affirmative, it is determined in step S7806 whether the current stage is the normal stage or the precursor stage.

If the determination in step S7806 is affirmative, then in step S7807 it is determined whether or not the completed customization storage area has storage for two completed vehicles 441, that is, the first completed customization storage area and the second completed customization storage area. It is determined whether or not the information of the completed vehicle 441 is stored in both of the storage areas. If the determination in step S7807 is affirmative, then in step S7808 processing is performed to display the vehicle selection screen. For example, on the used vehicle selection screen, the completed vehicle 441 of the first completed customization storage area is displayed on the left and the completed vehicle 441 of the second completed customization storage area is displayed on the right in the vertical center of the decorative pattern display device 42 . , for example, a guidance such as "Please select one vehicle to be used in the car presentation" is displayed above it, and a selection item such as "Use this vehicle" is displayed below each completed vehicle 441. be done.

In the following step S7809, the vehicle selection screen display flag is set to ON, and in step S7810, a value corresponding to the display time of the vehicle selection screen is set to the vehicle effect timer, and then this process is terminated. . In addition, when displaying the used vehicle selection screen, it is necessary to secure the display time. For this reason, for example, in the car effect setting process of FIG. 59, if it is determined that the stage is the normal stage or the sign stage, in the car effect timer setting process of step S7612, the time corresponding to the setting process is shorter than in other cases. A value may be set in a car effect timer. In this case, it is possible to unify the display time (time of competition) of the car presentation itself.

If the determination in step S7807 is negative, it is determined in step S7811 whether or not there is storage for one completed vehicle 441 in the completed customization storage area. If the determination in step S7811 is affirmative, then in step S7812, the completed vehicle 441 in the completed customization storage area with memory in the first completed customization storage area or the second completed customization storage area is set as the used vehicle (car The information of the corresponding finished car 441 is stored in the used car storage area referred to when rendering the effect).

In the following step S7813, the corresponding completed customization storage area is reset (default value is set). That is, in the present embodiment, once the completed car 441 is used for the car presentation, after the car presentation is completed, the completed car 441 once used for the car presentation (regardless of the result of the car presentation) is displayed with decorative patterns. It is configured to be erased from the screen of device 42 (gallery area 407). After step S7813, this processing ends.

If a negative determination is made in step S7811, that is, if there is no completed car 441 in the gallery area 407, the "family car" is set as the used car in step S7814. After that, this process is terminated.

In addition, if a negative determination is made in step S7806, that is, if it is a probability variable stage or a pullback stage, in step S7815, the completed vehicle 441 displayed as it is running on the decorative design display device 42 is used as it is for the vehicle effect. set as In subsequent step S7816, the corresponding completed customization storage area is reset. After that, this process is terminated. In addition, when the jackpot state with the ball paid out does not occur after the end of the variable display in which the car presentation is performed, the complete customization memory which stores the information of the completed car 441 which is displayed before the car presentation and used for the car presentation is stored. The information on the completed vehicle 441 in the area is erased. For this reason, after the car presentation (after the car presentation fails), if information on the completed car 441 is stored in the completed customization storage area that has not been erased, the completed car 441 is displayed as a running car. If the information of 441 is not stored, "Family Car" is displayed. Also, in the probability variable stage or the pullback stage, when the unfinished vehicle 431 is completed, the completed vehicle 441 is displayed in the gallery area 407, and if the completed vehicle 441 exists in the gallery area 407, the completed vehicle 441 can be displayed while running.

If a negative determination is made in step S7805, that is, if the non-mobile-linked game is being played, then in step S7817, the car set in the non-mobile-linked car effect setting process (see step S7610 in FIG. 59) is displayed. is set as the vehicle to be used (the information of the completed vehicle 441 is stored in the vehicle to be used storage area), and then this processing is terminated.

If the determination in step S7802 is affirmative, that is, if the used car selection screen is being displayed, in step S7818 it is determined whether the player has performed a selection input operation for the completed car 441 to be used for car presentation. determine. If the determination in step S7818 is affirmative, in step S7819 the selected completed vehicle 441 is set as the used vehicle (the information of the completed vehicle 441 is stored in the used vehicle storage area). In subsequent step S7820, the corresponding completed customization storage area is reset. After that, in step S7821, the used vehicle selection screen display flag is turned off, and then this process ends.

If the determination in step S7818 is negative, it is determined in step S7822 whether or not the value of the car effect timer is zero. If a negative determination is made in step S7822, the car effect timer is decremented by 1 in step S7823, and then this process ends.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S7822 is affirmative, in step S7824 the completed vehicle 441 in the first customized completed vehicle storage area is set as the used vehicle (the information on the completed vehicle 441 is stored in the used vehicle storage area). In other words, in a state in which two finished cars 441 are displayed in the gallery area 407, if the player does not perform a selection input operation at the start of the car presentation, the finished cars 441 ( A complete car 441) placed on the left side of the gallery area is automatically selected. In subsequent step S7825, the first completed customization storage area is reset. After that, in step S7821, the used vehicle selection screen display flag is turned off, and then this process is terminated.

The information of the completed vehicle 441 stored in the used vehicle storage area is erased along with the shift processing of the variation information (the used vehicle storage area may be provided in the execution area of the reserved information storage area). In addition, after the end of the jackpot state, it is determined whether it is the variable probability stage or the pullback stage, and if the determination is affirmative, the completed vehicle 441 information stored in the used vehicle storage area is the variable probability stage and the pullback stage. It will be stored in the traveling vehicle storage area that is referenced when the traveling vehicle is drawn on the stage.

In addition, the decoration pattern 421 has the same aspect in both the mobile-linked game state and the non-mobile-linked game state, and basically has a common aspect regardless of the staying stage. In the car presentation, a predetermined character object 423 rides on the completed car 441 to be used. Further, it may be configured such that the player can select and set the character object 423 by a customization function that can be used by playing a mobile-linked game.

As described in detail above, in the present embodiment, the decorative pattern display device 42 is configured to be able to customize the cars that can be used for a specific effect (car effect), and the customization is performed over a plurality of times of variable display. done. In other words, a plurality of customizable parts (customization items) are set for the car, and by fitting the parts objects 433 prepared in a plurality of patterns corresponding to each customization item to each customization item, customization can be performed. is configured to take place. In the present embodiment, when the variable display of the decorative pattern is retained and stored, a customization lottery is held to determine whether or not to provide an opportunity (customization chance) to apply the part object 433 to the unfinished vehicle 431, and the customization is performed. When the lottery is won, the type of the part object 433 is determined, and when the corresponding variable display is started, a customization chance is provided. In this way, an object (car) that can be changed in a variety of ways according to customization that can be performed as the game progresses is provided, and the customized car can be used for a specific effect (car effect). By doing so, the effects and the like can be diversified, and the monotonous feeling of the game can be suppressed.

In addition, regarding a car that is being customized (unfinished car 431) that has customization items that have not yet been customized (default), in the tuning area 406 in the lower right part of the decorative pattern display device 42, in the variable display a plurality of times displayed continuously. When the unfinished vehicle 431 has been customized for all the customization items and is made into a completed vehicle 441, the completed vehicle 441 is displayed in the upper right gallery area 407 of the decorative pattern display device 42. The gallery area 407 is continuously displayed in a plurality of times of variable display, waiting for an opportunity to be used in the car presentation.

In particular, in this embodiment, the unfinished vehicle 431 displayed in the tuning area 406 is a base object 432 drawn as a silhouette (overall image of the vehicle) imitating the rough external shape of the vehicle (completed vehicle 441). , detailed shapes and colors are drawn, and the “front body”, “rear body”, “doors”, “tires”, and “engine & muffler” are applied to the corresponding parts of the base object 432. , and each part object 433 . In other words, the base object 432 is visually recognized for the part that has not been customized, and the part object 433 is visually recognized for the part that has already been customized. In other words, the part of the unfinished vehicle 431 that has not yet been customized is masked. Therefore, by confirming the unfinished vehicle 431 in the tuning area 406, it is possible to grasp at a glance that there are parts (customization items) that have not been customized yet (that there is room for further customization). Therefore, it is possible to easily and reliably grasp how far the "car" that can be used for car production can be customized. can find out. As a result, it is possible to fully utilize the customization function and to fully enjoy the production using the "customizable car". Furthermore, by increasing interest in the customization function, it is possible to improve the willingness to play the game.

In addition, since the unfinished car 431 with masking can effectively and clearly recognize that there are parts that have not been customized yet, separate explanations of the customization functions will not be carefully and lengthy. Even if it's done. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the situation that the explanation of the customization function slows down the flow of the presentation (in particular, it takes unnecessary time for the player who has already grasped it), and the game progresses relatively smoothly. can be done.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, in order to clarify where the parts corresponding to each customization item are separated (where is the boundary) for the base object 432 of the unfinished car 431, each customization item and Masking with different patterns (masking with different colors in this example) is applied to each corresponding portion. Therefore, even if maskings corresponding to a plurality of customization items are adjacent to each other, it is difficult to determine whether the masking corresponds to one customization item or a plurality of customization items. It is possible to more reliably avoid such a situation. Therefore, it is possible to relatively freely set masking areas corresponding to a plurality of customization items, and by confirming the aspect of the unfinished vehicle 431 (just by looking at the base object 432), it is possible to determine whether the customized vehicle has not yet been customized. It is possible to grasp at a glance how many portions (customization items) that are not present exist (the number of items that have not yet been customized). Therefore, by more effectively deriving more information about the customization function, the player can make decisions about the customization function quickly and reliably, and fully enjoy the customization process while proceeding with the game. can do.

Further, in this embodiment, the player can select and determine whether or not to reflect the part object 433 on the unfinished car 431 by operating the effect button 125 and the cross button 126 . Therefore, the player's individual game history, various settings (preferences), etc. can be reflected in the customization of the unfinished car 431 . Therefore, it is possible to avoid the frustration that the customization does not meet the player's expectations while suppressing the customizing function from becoming one-patterned. As a result, while diversifying the customization functions, it is possible to make the player feel more attached to the "car presentation" and to improve the player's willingness to play the game.

Furthermore, when a plurality of finished cars 441 (up to two in this example) are displayed in the gallery area 407, the player selects the finished car 441 to be used for the car presentation from among the plurality of finished cars 441. can do.

Also, the type of the specific effect is selected according to the type of the finished vehicle 441 (combination of customization patterns of each customization item) and the winning expectation. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the combination of the completed object and the type of the specific effect is greatly different from the winning expectation.

Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 54, a difference is provided in the easiness of selection of the customization pattern of the part object 433, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied (in this example, the number of changes is If the pattern is set), it is configured to facilitate the selection of a rare pattern. For this reason, by providing a state (first rare parts high probability state, second rare parts high probability state) in which rare customization patterns are easily granted, interest in the game can be stimulated in a different dimension from elements related to increase or decrease in game value. can be held and the opportunities for production can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the feeling of monotony during the game, and to improve the willingness to play the game.

In particular, since the number of executions (number of fluctuations) of the variable display of the decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display device 42 is the trigger for the state transition to the first rare parts high probability state and the second rare parts high probability state, the state It is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize when the opportunity for transition comes. Therefore, for the player who wants to play in the first rare parts high probability state and the second rare parts high probability state, it is possible to make it easier to fight with the number of fluctuations as a guide, Make it easier to explain the phenomenon corresponding to the high probability state of parts (the reason why the rare customization pattern was selected, and the special effects for the high probability state of the 1st rare parts and the high probability state of the 2nd rare parts are set. It is possible to make it easier to understand the explanation about such effects etc. when there is. Further, as the game progresses, the state change opportunity is approached with certainty, so an added value can be added to the progress of the game.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when determining the parts object 433 (see steps S7105 to S7109 in FIG. 51), the reserved area of the reserved information storage area is referred to, and is displayed in the reserved display area 405 (currently being displayed). It is configured not to select the same part object 433 as the part object 433 of the item reserve icon 416 . For this reason, for example, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the player feels uncomfortable because the same item reserve icon 416 is selected in quick succession, so that the player can enjoy the customization function more.

In particular, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the part objects 433 are duplicated, the customization item is changed without changing the customization pattern that is likely to be selected depending on the state. . For this reason, for example, despite staying in the first rare parts high certainty state or the second rare parts high certainty state, it is not selected in the first rare parts high certainty state or the second rare parts high certainty state, or , it is possible to avoid the situation of being changed to a customization pattern that is difficult to select (not rare). Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player is given the impression of loss or the impression that an unfavorable operation is being performed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the information of the unfinished car 431 (unfinished customization storage area) and the completed car 441 completed in this mobile-linked game are stored in the QR code issued when the mobile-linked game is finished. information (information on the completed vehicle accumulation storage area). Various information included in the QR code is stored on the server side by accessing the server with the mobile communication terminal that has read the QR code. Furthermore, when accessing the server when performing the next mobile-linked game, setting whether or not to take over the data of the previous unfinished car 431, and the gallery area 407 of the decoration pattern display device 42 at the start of the mobile-linked game By setting two completed vehicles 441 to be displayed on the screen from among the completed vehicles 441 that have been completed so far, a password containing such setting information is issued. By inputting the password into the pachinko machine 10, the unfinished car 431 displayed at the end of the previous game is displayed in the tuning area 406, and the completed car 441 selected by the player is displayed in the gallery area 407. Is displayed.

In this way, information about customization can be handed over to the next game (mobile-linked game), so that if the unfinished car 431 is not completed in one game, an effect using the completed car 441 is displayed. It is possible to increase the enjoyment of the next game while suppressing the situation of overdoing it in the current game, as in the configuration where only viewing is possible. Therefore, it is possible to improve the convenience, and it is possible to make the performance using the customized car object more diverse and profound. In addition, even if you do not overdo it in a single game, you can accumulate customizations over several days and enjoy them.

In addition, since the customization function is effective only when the mobile-linked game is executed, it is possible to increase the willingness to participate in the mobile-linked game.

In addition, regarding pachinko machines that can customize character costumes and various sound effects according to the points obtained by playing mobile-linked games, basically various customizations are made on the web page of the server. It is designed to make settings related to, and various customization settings cannot be made on pachinko machines. For this reason, even if it becomes possible to perform new customization with the points obtained in this mobile-linked game, it is necessary to end this mobile-linked game (display the QR code) in order to reflect the customization. ), and then start the mobile-linked game again (enter the password).

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by adopting a configuration in which the player can make various settings related to customization of "the car used for the car effect" in the pachinko machine 10, the mobile-linked game does not have to be terminated once. can also reflect customization. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the convenience of customization and make it possible to enjoy the customization function more easily (become more accessible).

In addition, in this embodiment, when the finished car 441 that has been customized and is displayed in the gallery area 407 is used for car presentation, the finished car 441 is deleted from the gallery area 407 . there is Furthermore, when two completed vehicles 441 are displayed in the gallery area 407 and an unfinished vehicle 431 is completed, one of them is deleted. However, the information on the completed vehicle 441 completed in this mobile-linked game (information on the combination of the part objects 433 of each customization item that constitutes the completed vehicle) is always stored in the completed vehicle accumulation storage area, At the end of the interlocking game, a QR code containing accumulated memory information in the completed vehicle accumulated memory area is issued. Then, the information on the completed vehicle 441 is sent to the server via the mobile communication terminal, and is stored in the server (if it is the first combination). For this reason, for example, it is possible to suppress the feeling of disappearance caused by the completed car 441, which is finally completed by customizing the unfinished car 431, being erased from the flow of the game. You can add fun like collecting

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, when the completed cars 441 are not erased and are accumulated, for example, the display mode of the decorative pattern display device 42 (gallery area 407) becomes disordered, or the display processing becomes relatively difficult. In addition, it takes time to select the vehicle to be used for the car presentation from among the completed cars 441, and there is concern that the rhythm of the presentation will deteriorate and the storage capacity will increase. However, such concerns can be dispelled by gradually erasing them.

In this embodiment, on the finished car selection screen for allowing the player to select the finished car to be deleted from among the three finished cars 441, for example, "(Mobile-linked) after the game ends, the home page (server) You can check the completed objects you got today by accessing .In addition, in the next mobile-linked game, you can select the completed object to be used on the actual machine (game machine) from among the completed objects you have obtained, You can use it for production etc." etc. is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to clearly recognize how the deleted completed car 441 will be treated, and to avoid a situation in which the player cannot concentrate on the game because of this.

In addition, in this embodiment, since the customization function is exhibited only in the mobile-linked game state, it is possible to improve the willingness to participate in the mobile-linked game. Also, even in the non-mobile-linked game state, a customization lottery will be held in the same way as in the mobile-linked game state, and if you win the customization lottery, the customization will not be performed, but a suggestive effect (forecast pending notice effect) will be performed. It is configured. Furthermore, when determining the suggestive effect pattern (the color of the jewel 414 of the normal hold icon 412), the value of the pattern random number counter used in determining the customized pattern is obtained, and the determination is made based on this value. . Therefore, it is possible to provide a player who is not playing a mobile-linked game with an enjoyment such as a suggestive effect (a look-ahead pending notice effect). Furthermore, by making the random number counter used for the control related to whether or not the suggestive effects and the pattern determination are common with the random number counter used for the control related to the customization during the mobile-linked game and the determination of the customization pattern, the control simplification and reduction of the storage area can be achieved.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the starting winning device 33a, 33b to enter the game ball, the success or failure random number counter C1 and the like related to the success or failure lottery is stored in the special variable holding area, the leading player output from the main control device 261 When the command is received by the sub-controller 262 and the information contained in the starting command is stored in the pending information storage area, a customization lottery is held, and in the case of winning, a customization item and a customization pattern are selected. ing. Therefore, when the variable display is suspended, the contents of the customization, that is, the item suspension icon 416 with the part object 433 drawn is displayed in the suspension display area 405, and the customization chance is given. It is possible to teach the player the contents of the customization at the time. Therefore, for example, when a variable display is already suspended and a new variable display is suspended, the stage before the newly suspended variable display is executed, that is, before the variable display is suspended When the previously suspended variable display is being performed, it is possible to teach the content of the customization to be given based on the newly suspended variable display. In this case, the player can prepare for the contents of the customized customization (preparation, operation, etc.) with plenty of time to spare.

That is, for example, ``Since the item pending icon 416 of the desired part object 433 is displayed, let's perform an operation to reflect the part object 433 in the unfinished car 431 at the customization opportunity in the corresponding variable display.'' Alternatively, "Although the first customization item of the unfinished vehicle 431 has been customized according to pattern A, the first and third customization items have been customized according to pattern B in response to the two suspended variable displays. Now that we know that customization can be done, let's stop the A-pattern system and use the B-pattern system." Therefore, for example, when the player is requested to perform a predetermined operation, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the operation is not completed in time due to the short input period. In addition, with this configuration, it is not necessary to forcibly lengthen the variable time in order to secure an extra operation input period. It is possible to suppress the situation that invites

In this embodiment, the background color of the item reserve icon 416 and the masking color of the portion of the unfinished vehicle 431 corresponding to each customization item correspond to the customization item. As a result, it is possible to easily grasp which part of the unfinished vehicle 431 the part object 433 of the item reservation icon 416 corresponds to.

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the contents described in the above-described embodiment, and may be implemented as follows, for example.

(a; masking pattern) In the above embodiment, the portions corresponding to the customization items of the base object 432 of the unfinished vehicle 431 are color-coded. Masking makes it possible to identify the presence of unfinished parts (parts corresponding to customization items that have not yet been customized) at least in the unfinished vehicle 431, and also to identify where the unfinished parts are. It should be identifiable (how many more unfinished parts are left aside). As a result, by masking the unfinished part, it becomes possible to identify that the unfinished part is not the completed part, and by customizing until there is no unfinished part, the customization is completed (becomes a completed object). can be identified.

Also, for example, as a mode of "masking",
1) for a range that includes part or all of the unfinished portion, or at least a portion of the unfinished portion;
2) Patterns (patterns composed of lines, planes, blanks, etc.) that are not added to the completed part, for example, not only patterns such as wallpaper, but also stamps (patterns such as letters and characters' faces) are stamped. Including aspects such as such, aspects such as hollowing out due to the frame of the unfinished part, etc.),
Aspects of colors that are not derived in the finished part (for example, different hues (e.g., sepia tone), different color usage (less types of hues are used, such as monotone tone, etc.), etc.), or
The touch of the unfinished part that is not derived from the completed part (how to draw lines; thickness, fineness (number of lines), roundness of edges, etc.), or
These combinations
3) Covering, shielding, overlapping (on the front side or back side of the unfinished portion), synthesizing, applying, and reflecting.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, all customization items are configured to have different masking patterns (no masking patterns are overlapped), but at least adjacent masking regions may be configured to have different patterns. In addition, it is also possible to simply perform masking (make the base object 432 a single color and eliminate border lines) without dividing it into each customization item so that it can be seen that there are parts that have not been customized yet. good. However, it is still customized by making the masking patterns of adjacent masking regions different, or alternatively or additionally, by spacing masking regions apart or by drawing lines at the boundaries of masking regions. It is possible to grasp how many more customization items are missing.

Furthermore, as in the above embodiment, by associating each customization item with a color, the color of the reserved item icon 416 displayed in the reserved display area 405 is the color of the background 417 of the reserved item icon 416. It is possible to make it easier to understand which part of the unfinished vehicle 431 the part object 433 corresponds to. Even when adopting a configuration in which the masking areas are separated from each other or lines are drawn at the boundary of the masking areas, by making the masking patterns of the adjacent masking areas different, it is possible to easily and quickly customize the unfinished customization items. can distinguish the number and types of

In the above-described embodiment, each area (masking area) partitioned corresponding to each customization item in the base object 432 of the unfinished vehicle 431 is configured to be identifiable. A part object 433 may be already fitted (displayed) so that the boundary of each part object 433 can be identified. For example, the boundary line of each part object 433 is left, and while each part object 433 is displayed on the unfinished car 431, a pattern similar to the masking of the base object 432 is added (coloring is changed). be configured).

In the above-described embodiment, for example, based on the player's operation of the production button 125 or the cross button 126, in the decorative pattern display device 42, a sample of the appearance of the completed car 441 and the appearance of the completed car 441 are displayed in the car production. It may be configured to be able to display features (development of effects that are likely to be selected, etc.) (in a small window so that it can be compared with the unfinished car 431). Also, a display suggesting that if a predetermined parts object 433 (for example, the parts object 433 of the item pending icon 416 displayed in the pending display area 405) is customized for the current unfinished vehicle 431, it will look like this. may be configured to be derivable. Furthermore, when the part object 433 is customized for the unfinished car 431, the part object 433 is also explained (guidance such as "It is a sports car system" and "I am good at racing") (for example, It may be configured to be displayed in a style like a telop). It should be noted that these sample and descriptive representations constitute representations relating to unfinished objects.

(b; Avoidance of Duplication of Part Objects, Configuration of Customization Storage Area) In the above embodiment, when determining the part object 433 (see steps S7105 to S7109 in FIG. 51), the reservation area of the reservation information storage area is referred to. Although it is configured not to select the same part object 433 as the part object 433 of the item reserve icon 416 displayed in the display area 405, it is not particularly limited to such a configuration. For example, instead of or in addition to such a configuration, it may be configured to refer to the incomplete customization storage area and change the part object 433 when the same part object 433 exists. In this case, it is possible to avoid a situation where the form of the part object 433 does not change regardless of whether it is customized or not. Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the duplication of the part objects 433 is avoided by changing the customization item, but the duplication of the part objects 433 may be avoided by changing the customization pattern. . Note that the part object 433 may be determined without considering duplication or the like.

In the above embodiment, the unfinished customization storage area and the completed customization storage area are configured to have a storage area capable of storing a customization pattern for each customization item. (For example, of the finished car 441, the "front body" and "rear body" are "decoration car system parts", and the "doors", "tires", and "engine & muffler" are "sports car "F12B" may be stored in the corresponding completed customization storage area when "coloring" is "sporty"). However, in view of the ease of inserting and removing information for each customization item, it is desirable to store the information separately for each customization item.

(c; Mobile interlocking, simple pass, etc.) In the above embodiment, the mobile interlocking game cannot be played unless the password issued by the server is entered. It may be configured such that a (temporary) mobile-linked game can be played by performing a (simpler) predetermined operation. That is, although the game information up to the previous time cannot be reflected in the current game by inputting the password, the current game information is accumulated and stored in the pachinko machine 10 without inputting the password, and customization is performed. By enabling the use of functions (the degree of availability is set for each model), the game information for this time is added to the game information accumulated and stored on the server, or the first registration In addition, the game information for this time may be stored in the server. However, in order to reflect the current game information in the next game, issue a QR code when finishing the game, read it with a mobile communication terminal, access the server, and first time registration , and others need to make an additional request for the current game information.

It should be noted that the customization function may be used simply by playing the game normally (without entering a password or performing other special operations). Furthermore, in the non-mobile-linked gaming state, it is not possible to use all of the customization functions that can be performed in the mobile-linked gaming state, but some can be It may be configured such that selection is not possible, there are few selectable customization patterns, etc.), or it may be configured to advertise the customization function. In addition, it is also possible to embody the pachinko machine 10 that does not have the function itself to perform a mobile-linked game.

Also, during the mobile-linked game, the reserved item icon 416 is displayed in the reserved display area 405, and the state in which the part object 433 of the displayed reserved item icon 416 can be reflected to the unfinished vehicle 431 and the reserved item icon 416 are displayed. The state in which the parts objects 433 are not reflected in the incomplete car 431 (the state in which the tuning area 406 and the gallery area 407 are not displayed; the same state as the non-mobile-linked game state) is defined as the state of the game. It may be configured so that switching can be performed by the player's operation (for example, opening the corresponding screen from the main menu screen) on the way. Further, it may be possible to make detailed settings such as "display/not display the item reserve icon 416", "display/not display the unfinished vehicle 431", and "display/not display the completed vehicle 441". .

In addition, regarding the customization function related to the car presentation, the player can perform an input operation to the effect that the parts object 433 is not to be used while the parts selection screen is displayed without opening the menu screen and setting "apply/not apply". A disapproved input counting counter for counting the number of disapproved inputs is provided, and when the disapproved input counting counter exceeds a certain number, the pachinko machine 10 automatically disables the customization function ( It may be configured to switch to a state similar to the non-mobile-linked gaming state). As a matter of course, it is conceivable that the rejection may continue by chance, so the configuration is such that the player's selection input is required at the time of switching the state, or even if the state is once switched to a state in which the customization function is not exhibited, the player's input is not allowed. It is possible to switch to a state in which the customization function is exhibited based on the operation, and to return to the state following the state before switching to the state in which the customization function is not exhibited (the state in which the customization function is exhibited immediately). , it may be configured in the same state as before switching to the state in which the customization function is not exhibited (the state of the reserved display area 405, the tuning area 406, the gallery area 407, etc. is the same).

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the information of the completed car 441 completed in the current mobile-linked game and the information of the unfinished car 431 at the end of the mobile-linked game are sent to the server via the mobile communication terminal. However, among the information related to customization, the information that can be handed over to the next mobile-linked game is appropriately set for each model. In addition, the player may select information on the finished car 441 to be sent to the server and information on the finished car 441 that does not have to be sent (furthermore, the upper limit may be set to 30, etc.). It should be noted that the configuration may be such that the information about customization cannot be handed over. Also, it may be configured so that a game can be played using a completed car completed by a player on the web page of the server.

In addition, in order to enhance the customization function, etc., it is conceivable to increase the amount of information supplied from the server to the pachinko machine 10. , it takes time and effort, and there is concern that the amount of information will not increase so much. In response to this, the server also issues a two-dimensional code (QR code, etc.). The included information may be configured to be reflected in the mobile-linked game. In this case, a large amount of data can be easily input to the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加

It should be noted that the mobile communication terminal may be configured so as to be able to play a game that inherits the customization of the pachinko machine 10 that is playing the mobile-linked game. In other words, upon initial registration of the mobile-linked game, an application dedicated to the pachinko machine 10 is downloaded to the mobile communication terminal, and by opening the application, the server can be easily accessed, and based on the mobile-linked game data. It is also possible to configure so that the game can be played in a different way.

In addition, the main controller 261 (and the sub-controller) along with the game machine identification information for identifying the pachinko machine 10 for the two-dimensional code (QR code, etc.) to be displayed on the decorative pattern display device 42 at the end of the mobile-linked game. 262) management information may also be included. In this case, by transmitting information related to mobile interlocking to a server via the Internet or the like, the gaming machine manufacturer can determine whether or not the Pachinko machine 10 is equipped with a legitimate board based on the identification information included in the information. can be confirmed. That is, without going to the place where the pachinko machine 10 is installed and directly checking the main control device 261 or the like, it is possible to discover fraud such as replacing the main control device 261 or the like with an unauthorized one. Therefore, it is possible to increase the chances of checking fraudulent activity and to detect fraudulent activity at an early stage. Note that the pachinko machine 10 in which mobile-linked games are frequently played is often a popular model, and popular models are generally likely to be targeted for fraud such as replacing the main controller 261 or the like. In this respect, according to the above configuration, the more popular a model is, the more frequently the main control unit 261 and the like are checked, which is very effective as an anti-fraud measure.

(d; Reflection of parts object, display period of parts selection screen) In the above embodiment, the selection of whether or not to reflect the parts object 433 displayed at the customization chance (parts selection screen display) to the unfinished car 431 is It is configured to be performed by input operations using the production button 125 and the cross button 126 by the player. A pattern may be set in advance, and the part objects 433 may be selected based on the setting information at the customization chance. In this case as well, customization can be made to the player's liking, and the player can become more attached to the performance using the customization function (customized car).

In addition, such settings can be made, for example, by opening a setting screen from the main menu of the pachinko machine 10, or can be made on the web page of the server, and the password for the mobile-linked game includes information such as discard information. may be configured to It should be noted that it is possible to switch between an auto state in which the pachinko machine 10 automatically selects the part objects 433 based on pre-registered content and a manual state in which the player selects the part objects 433. good. In addition, it may be configured so that the player cannot make any selections.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, among the variable display of the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display device 42, the high-speed variation period from the start of the variation to the stop display of the decorative symbols in the left symbol display area 401 is displayed on the parts selection screen ( maximum) display period, but it is not particularly limited to such a configuration. For example, at the start of the variable display, if it is determined that a customization chance is given (a parts selection screen is displayed) corresponding to the variable display (variation information), the start of the variable display is waited and the parts The variable display may be started when the selection screen is displayed and "yes" or "no" is entered, or when the maximum display period of the parts selection screen elapses. Also, for example, when starting the variable display, if it is determined that the customization chance is given in the variable display, extra time is secured for displaying the parts selection screen (the variable display time becomes longer). It may be configured as However, when adopting these configurations, if the sub-controller 262 arbitrarily changes the start timing of the variable display and the variable time, the variable display of the special display devices 43L and 43R will be shifted. Based on a predetermined decision of the device 261, it is determined whether or not to grant a customization chance (a lottery as to whether or not to grant a customization chance is performed on the main control device 261 side, and if a winner is selected, the A long fluctuation time may be set). It should be noted that, for example, the configuration may be such that a customization chance occurs only when a longer variable display is selected (a customization chance does not occur if the display is completely off).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the customization chance is provided when the variable display corresponding to the variable information for which the provision of the customization chance has been decided is started. In a state in which the variation information is retained and stored, a customization chance may be granted (in response to the part object 433 being reflected) (for example, in response to the operation of the effect button 125 or the like).

(e; Determination of Part Objects) In the above embodiment, the types (customization items and customization patterns) of the customization chance part objects 433 are arbitrarily determined by the pachinko machine 10 without considering the player's intentions. , the type of the part object 433 may be determined according to the player's setting or operation. For example, as the corresponding pattern storage table for the low ball entry state, "sports car system, family car system, decoration car system" is likely to be selected, and "armored car system, 4WD car system, truck car system" is likely to be selected. When things are prepared and the player sets which type of car he prefers on the pachinko machine 10 or the web page of the server (the setting on the server is the mobile-linked game including such setting information) When a password is entered into the pachinko machine 10), the corresponding pattern storage table may be referred to which includes the car of the preferred system which is likely to be selected.

Further, for example, during the mobile-linked game, it is configured to count which type of part object 433 is reflected in the unfinished car 431 and which type of part object 433 is rejected in the customization chance. At the same time, by sending the count value to the server via the mobile communication terminal, the server can grasp which type of part object 433 is desired and which type of part object 433 is not desired. Alternatively, based on such information, the password issued by the server may include information about which corresponding pattern storage table to refer to when determining the customization pattern.

When these configurations are employed, the game history and various settings (preferences) of the individual player can be reflected in the customization of the unfinished vehicle 431 (selection of customization patterns by the customization selection means). Therefore, it is possible to avoid the frustration that the customization does not meet the player's expectations while suppressing the customizing function from becoming one-patterned. As a result, while diversifying the customization functions, it is possible to make the player more attached to the performance using the completed car 441, and to improve the player's willingness to play.

Furthermore, instead of performing a lottery to determine whether or not to give a customization lottery opportunity, for example, every time a variable display is performed a specified number of times, or when a predetermined condition is cleared in a mobile-linked game, a customization lottery random number The value of the counter may be obtained and based on such value it may be determined whether or not the customization opportunity is granted. In addition, the right for one customization lottery is granted by performing the variable display a specified number of times, and the right for 10 customization lotteries is granted when a predetermined condition is cleared in the mobile-linked game. good too.

In the above-described embodiment, one part object 433 is provided for each variable display, but a plurality of part objects 433 may be provided for one variable display. good too. That is, in the above embodiment, if the customization items are divided into "front body", "rear body", "doors", "tires", "engine & muffler" (and "coloring") and the customer wins the customization lottery. is configured so that any one customization item part object 433 is selected. items) can be selected and reflected all at once (or selectively) at a customization chance. In this case, the progress of customization can be further enhanced, and the performance can be enhanced. As a result, the interest can be improved. As the item pending icon 416 , the item pending icon 416 is displayed with a plurality of part objects 433 attached to one background 417 .

Further, in the above-described embodiment, when the sub-controller 262 receives the starting command from the main controller 261, the customization lottery is performed, and if the lottery is won, the part object 433 (customization item and customization pattern) is determined, and the determined part object 433 is determined. Information about the part object 433 is stored in the corresponding reservation area of the reservation information storage area, but when the variable display is started, not when the starting command is received, the customization lottery is performed and the part object is selected. 433 may be determined, or a customization lottery may be performed at the time of receiving the starting command, and the part object 433 may be determined at the start of the variable display. However, in this case, it becomes impossible to display the item pending icon 416 in the pending display area 405. Therefore, in order to improve the performance and the convenience of customization, the customization lottery is started when the starting command is received. It is desirable to arrange to perform and determine the part object 433 .

It should be noted that, at the time of receiving the starting command, even if the customized lottery is not won, the values of the item random number counter and the pattern random number counter may be acquired together with the value of the customized lottery random number counter. Also, in the pachinko machine 10 or the like in which variable display is not suspended, it is possible to embody the configuration related to the customization of the above-described embodiment as much as possible.

Further, on the pachinko machine 10 side, instead of giving a customization chance or unilaterally selecting a customization item and a customization pattern, selection is made in response to an operation input by the player using the production button 125 or the like (in some cases, Yes) may be configured as follows. For example, when the variable information is reserved and stored in the reserved information storage area, a customization lottery is carried out, and when winning, a pending icon 411 with smoke in the pending display area 405 and a production button 125 near it are displayed. When a display suggesting operation is performed and the effect button 125 is operated, the values of the item random number counter and the pattern random number counter are acquired, and based on these values, the customization item and the customization pattern are determined, The item pending icon 416 to which the corresponding part object 433 is attached may be configured to be displayed in such a way that smoke can be removed.

Further, for example, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a lottery is conducted as to whether or not to grant an opportunity for a customization lottery, and when winning the lottery, the decorative pattern display device 42 prompts the user to operate the production button 125. When the display is performed and the effect button 125 is operated, the value of the customization lottery random number counter is acquired, and based on this value, it may be determined whether or not to grant the customization chance. . Furthermore, the player may operate the effect button 125, the cross button 126, or the like to play a mini-game, and if the player succeeds in the mini-game, the customization chance may be provided. It should be noted that it may be configured such that there are a period during which a lottery is conducted to determine whether or not to give the opportunity for the customization lottery, a period during which the lottery is not conducted, and a period during which the winning probability of the lottery is high.

In addition, a plurality of customization modes with different acquisition methods (customization lottery triggers, customization item and customization pattern determination methods, determination timings, etc.), or a plurality of customization modes with different effects at the time of acquisition are set, and the mode is changed at a predetermined trigger. It may be configured to migrate. For example, one of the customization modes may be selectable by a player's operation. In addition, when selecting a new customization mode, it is necessary to achieve predetermined conditions in the mobile-linked game (customize the specified number of times in the predetermined customization mode, mobile-linked game given according to the game time and the number of fluctuations, etc.) Accumulating specified points, completing target customization, etc.) may be required.

As a method of obtaining the part objects 433, for example, some part objects 433 may be displayed so that the player can select one or more of them. Furthermore, in order to obtain the selected part object 433, it may be configured such that it is necessary to satisfy a condition such as success in a mini-game or the like. Further, for example, as described above, a customization lottery or a lottery for determining customization items and customization patterns is performed based on the operation of the production button 125, or a pattern or the like is selected based on the operation of the production button 125. The part object 433 displayed in a form may be configured to change to a form in which the pattern or the like can be identified.

In addition, when the part object 433 of the item reserve icon 416 displayed in the reserve display area 405 is not desirable for the player, the item reserve icon 416 can be displayed by the player operating the production button 125 and the cross button 126. (A customization re-lottery function may be provided in which at least one of the customization item and the customization pattern is determined again by lottery).

(f; Rare Parts High Probability) In the above embodiment, according to the number of times the variable display is performed, the state is shifted to the first rare parts high probability state or the second rare parts high probability state (second pattern selection state). Although it is configured, instead of or in addition to such a configuration, a lottery (pattern high probability lottery) is performed to determine whether the first rare parts high probability state or the second rare parts high probability state, It may be configured to shift to such a state when winning a prize. In this case, the game can be played while always expecting the state change to the first rare parts high certainty state or the second rare parts high certainty state, and the first rare parts high certainty state or the second rare It is possible to perform an effect related to the state change to the parts high probability state. As a result, it is possible to suppress the feeling of monotony during the game.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the number of fluctuations after the end of the jackpot with balls is counted, and when the number of fluctuations reaches a specified number of times, the rare parts are highly probable state, but the jackpot with balls is generated. Count the number of fluctuations that shift to the first or second rare parts high probability state not only when the ball is played, but also when a big hit (special game state) or a small hit (fake special game state) occurs. The value of the sub-side fluctuation counter may be reset. Furthermore, apart from the sub-side fluctuation counter, a counter only for measuring the transition timing to the first rare parts high probability state and the second rare parts high probability state is provided, and based on a predetermined opportunity, the value of this counter A lottery (a lottery for advancing the transition timing) may be performed to change the value closer to the transition timing.

In addition, the state transition lottery to the 1st rare parts high probability state or the 2nd rare parts high probability state may be performed each time the decorative pattern is changed, or another condition (digestion of the prescribed number of fluctuations , occurrence of a corresponding effect, etc.) may be configured to be performed when the event is established. In addition, the first rare parts high probability state or the second rare parts high probability state may be terminated by digesting the specified number of fluctuations, may be terminated after the specified time has elapsed, or whether to terminate It may end with a lottery. Furthermore, it is also possible to set a plurality of modes in which the winning probability of the pattern high-probability lottery changes.

In addition, a plurality of corresponding pattern storage tables with different distributions are provided, and a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to switch the corresponding pattern storage table to be referred to. Alternatively, the corresponding pattern storage table to be referred to may be switched in order when winning the switching lottery. For example, there are five corresponding pattern storage tables, and a switching lottery is performed based on a predetermined opportunity, and when a lottery is won, the corresponding pattern storage table set one step above is referred to, and the topmost pattern storage table is selected. When a player wins in a switching lottery performed in a state in which the corresponding pattern storage table set in the lowermost position is referred to, the corresponding pattern storage table set in the lowest position is referred to. may

Further, a plurality of switching rotation speed storage tables are provided for storing the number of times of variation display by which the corresponding pattern storage table to be referred to is switched, and when the jackpot state ends, the switching rotation speed storage table to be referred to after the jackpot state is terminated can be selected. may be configured to Furthermore, when a specific condition is established (for example, exceeding a specific number of fluctuations, winning a specific lottery, etc.), the player operates the production button 125 or the cross button 126 to create a plurality of corresponding pattern storage tables. The correspondence pattern storage table referred to from among may be selectable.

Also, for example, triggered by the end of the jackpot state, the small hit state, or the time reduction mode (in a broad sense, based on the result of the predetermined lottery of the main controller 261), the first rare parts high probability state, or It may be configured such that the state transitions to the second rare parts high probability state. In particular, when a player wins a jackpot that is not a probability variable jackpot, when a jackpot with no balls is won, when the time reduction mode ends, when a small win is won, etc., the player's interest is likely to decline In addition, by shifting to the first rare parts high certainty state or the second rare parts high certainty state, it is possible to reduce discouragement, a significant decrease in game motivation, and the like. Further, by newly providing a state with increased value, such as the first rare parts high probability state or the second rare parts high probability state, the period during which the player's willingness to play can be improved can be lengthened. In the case of a rotating game machine (slot machine), after the bonus game, after the assist time, or after the assist replay time, etc., during a predetermined number of games, the rare parts high probability state.

Furthermore, for example, the number of times (one or more times) that a predetermined effect is derived, the game time (for example, the game time is recorded using a real-time clock provided in the pachinko machine 10), the number of jackpots, and mobile interlocking The state may be changed to the first rare parts high probability state or the second rare parts high probability state according to the points accumulated in the game, the completion of a predetermined mission, or the like. In addition, it may be configured to shift to the rare parts high probability state when the super ready-to-win effect, in which the expectation for the occurrence of the jackpot state is particularly high, is missed. The number of corresponding pattern storage tables and their contents (distribution ratio and distribution destination) are not particularly limited, and can be appropriately set for each model. For example, it may be configured such that there is only one corresponding pattern storage table and the selection ratio of customized patterns does not change in any state.

In addition, although not particularly mentioned in the above embodiment, the state change to the first or second rare parts high probability state (second pattern selection state) in a predetermined display means such as the decorative pattern display device 42 It may be configured to display the remaining number of variable display times until the display is completed. Furthermore, like the 2nd rare parts high probability state, if the upper limit of the number of fluctuations is set for that period, the remaining number of fluctuation display times until the 2nd rare parts high probability state ends will be displayed. can be configured to

In addition, in the decorative pattern display device 42, what kind of state is the rare parts high probability state? It is also possible to omit the teaching of being in the high-probability state. However, by performing a guide display for teaching the player the existence of the first rare parts high certainty state and the second rare parts high certainty state, the first rare parts high certainty state and the second rare parts high certainty state The presence can be more positively appealed to the player. In the above embodiment, the function of performing guidance display in the decorative pattern display device 42 for teaching the player the existence of the first rare parts high probability state and the second rare parts high probability state is the pattern high probability teaching means configure.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, while the demo screen is being displayed, by operating the effect button 125 or the cross button 126, a display that teaches that the rare parts are in a high probability state is derived. good too. In this case, it is possible to increase the opportunity to touch the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加Also, the demonstration screen display may be configured so that the player cannot know that the player is in the rare parts high probability state. In this case, the player who is interested in customization can be asked to perform the variable display even once in order to grasp whether or not the rare parts are in the high probability state.

(g; high probability of customization) Further, in the above embodiment, in the customization lottery for whether or not to give a customization chance, it is easier to win in the low ball entry state than in the high ball entry state, and in the variable display, The configuration is such that it is easier to win a prize when a reach occurs than when a reach does not occur, but the configuration is not particularly limited to this. For example, like the first rare parts high probability state or the second rare parts high probability state described above, the state to a state (customization high probability state) in which it is easy to win the customization lottery according to the number of times the decorative pattern changes It may be configured so that the transition is performed, or it may be configured to perform a lottery (customization high-probability lottery) as to whether or not to set the customization high-probability state. In addition, by using the configuration in which the winning probability of the customization lottery differs depending on the state, it is possible to make the player interested in the game in a dimension different from the factors related to the increase or decrease in the game value, suppressing the monotonous feeling during the game, It is possible to improve the desire to play.

As with the rare parts high probability state, the trigger for transitioning to the customization high probability state can be appropriately set for each model. For example, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to shift to the customized high-probability state, and the state is shifted to the customized high-probability state according to the number of times a predetermined effect is derived, the number of big wins, points accumulated in mobile-linked games, etc. Alternatively, after the end of the time reduction mode, after the end of the "2RS" big win state, or after the end of the small win state, the state may be shifted to the customized high-probability state. It should be noted that the customized lottery winning probability may be configured so as not to be changed.

(h; Customization Motif) In the above-described embodiment, a "car" is adopted as a customization motif, and the vehicle production is performed using the customized car. It can be set as appropriate.

(h-1; Puzzle) Next, an example of a specific effect performed using a customizable object will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 and 66. FIG. In the tuning area 406 of the decorative pattern display device 42 shown in FIG. 65, an unfinished object 901 like a puzzle consisting of six pieces 902 is displayed. The unfinished object 901 in the initial state is in a state in which a piece 902 without a pattern is fitted on the mount (or a state in which the piece 902 is not fitted; see the lower part of the unfinished object 901 in FIG. 65). there is However, in the same way as in the above-described embodiment, there are several parts of the unfinished object 901 that have not been customized yet, and in order to make it easier to understand where these parts are, the parts corresponding to the customization items (6 pieces of installation Each area (specifically, upper left area, upper middle area, upper right area, lower left area, lower middle area, lower right area) has a different aspect (color or pattern) Masking is applied. Then, when all the pieces are fitted correctly, the completed object 905 is transitioned to display in the gallery area 407, and a new puzzle mount is displayed in the tuning area 406. FIG.

In this embodiment, the specific effects include a "walking reach effect", a "moving reach effect", etc., and when execution of the specific effect is determined, the player can determine the type of the specific effect. . More specifically, in the tuning area 406, "truck", "dog", etc. are set as the completed form of the unfinished object 901. "Truck" corresponds to "moving reach effect", and "dog" It is configured to correspond to the "walking reach effect". For example, when the unfinished object 901 is completed as a “track”, the track that has become the completed object 905 is transitioned and displayed in the gallery area 407 . Up to two completed objects 905 can be displayed in the gallery area 407, and when the third one is completed, the player selects one completed object 905 to be erased from among the three and erases it. . Furthermore, when execution of a specific effect is determined and completed objects 905 are displayed in the gallery area 407, the player selects one of the displayed completed objects 905. A selection input screen is displayed that allows the user to select (or not select). Then, when the selection input of the completed object 905 is performed, the specific effect of the corresponding type is derived. That is, in this aspect example, the type of specific effect can be customized.

As in the above embodiment, the piece 902 of the unfinished object 901 is indicated by the pending icon 411 corresponding to the case where it is decided to give the customization chance. It is configured to teach whether it is a part and which item corresponds to which specific effect as a customization pattern). In addition, when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, mobile-linked game points reach a specified point), the player may select a preferred board.

In addition, the timing at which the mount of the incomplete object 901 is switched is not particularly limited. It may be configured to switch when a predetermined event occurs (predetermined number of times) or based on the player's operation (having obtained a predetermined right). Further, when the mount of the incomplete object 901 is switched before all the pieces 902 are applied, the display suggesting the type of the piece 902 among the pending icons 411 is also switched correspondingly (the mount is When the "dog" is switched to the "truck", the suggestive display of the piece 902 of the pending icon 411 may be switched from the "part of the dog" to the "part of the truck"). Furthermore, when the mount of the unfinished object 901 is switched, the (number of) pieces 902 that have already been fitted to the unfinished object 901 at that time are taken over even after the switching as the installed pieces ( The pattern may be switched to the corresponding one), or no matter how many pieces 902 are fitted to the unfinished object 901, if the mount changes, they must be collected again from the beginning (mobile interlocking game A function may be added to avoid this as part of the benefits of the above.

In addition, the unfinished object 901 may be derived the same across the jackpot states, may be derived with a change added according to the game mode, or may be derived completely different. good too. For example, the type of mount of the unfinished object 901 that can be selected may be different between the "variable probability stage" and "pull-back stage" and the "normal stage" and "prediction stage".

(h-2; Scratch) In addition, in the above embodiment, the selection ratio of the customization pattern is different depending on the state, and the winning probability of the customization lottery is different. In addition, for example, it may be configured such that how to classify customization items (number, target part, boundary, etc.) changes depending on the state.

Here, examples of modes shown in FIGS. 67 and 68 will be described. A card 911 like an instant lottery is displayed in the tuning area 406. Initially, a masking 913 is applied to hide an object 912 (see FIG. 68) written on the card 911. FIG. The masking area 913 is normally divided into six areas as shown in FIG. , one of the areas of the masking 913 divided into 6 is removed, and a part of the object 912 is exposed. Then, when all are exposed, the object 912 is shifted and displayed in the gallery area 407 (specific effect is the same as (h-1) above). When the player selects to change the card 911 by operating the effect button 125 or the like at the start of the variable display corresponding to the card-shaped pending icon 411 displayed in the pending display area 405, the tuning area A card 911 of 406 is renewed (not a single masking area is removed and the object is unknown).

Further, for example, when the specified condition is established, for example, when the number of fluctuation display performed after the end of the jackpot state with balls is determined to be 200 to 230, 400 to 430, 600 to 630, or 800 or more. 68, the masking area of the tuning area 406 is divided into four. In other words, during this period, the entire object 912 in the tuning area 406 can be exposed relatively quickly. When a predetermined condition is satisfied (e.g., the number of mobile-linked game points reaches a specified point), the masking area can be exposed in the same manner as when the coin-shaped pending icon 411 is displayed in the pending display area 405. may be configured to allow Furthermore, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the masking area to be exposed may be selectable from among the plurality of masking areas.

(i; Make multiple customization motifs) In addition, the customization motif is configured so that there are not only one but a plurality of motifs (base objects of multiple patterns), and based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, It may be configured to shift to a state (customization mode) in which any motif is customized. For example, in addition to the customization mode for completing a car, a customization mode for completing a ship or a customization mode for completing an airplane may be set.

Furthermore, when this configuration is adopted, as in the above embodiment, the variable display (variable information) is suspended, and when the variable display is suspended, the execution of the customization chance and the contents of the customization are determined, and the details are suspended. In the configuration displayed as the item pending icon 416 in the display area 405 , for example, if the customization lottery in the car customization mode is won, the item pending icon 416 having the car parts object 433 (customization object) is displayed in the pending display area 405 . After it is displayed, before the variable display corresponding to the item pending icon 416 is executed, there may be an opportunity to decide whether or not to change the customization mode. In this case, the unfinished object (base object) displayed in the tuning area 406 is changed from the car to another object (ship or It is necessary to avoid a situation such as being replaced by airplanes.

As a method, for example, when the item pending icon 416 is displayed in the pending display area 405, the switching of the customization mode is postponed until such a state is resolved, or when it is decided to switch the customization mode. , the number of pending variable displays is confirmed, and the timing of switching the display of unfinished objects in the tuning area 406 is the timing when the confirmed pending number is consumed. More specifically, the switching of the customization mode (base object) is determined and executed when the preceding command is received from the main controller 261 and the variation information is stored. , and the actual switching of the base object may be performed at the timing when the variation display corresponding to the variation information for which the customization mode switching is determined is performed.

By adopting these configurations, when it is decided to change the base object, until the variable display corresponding to the pending icon 411 (item pending icon 416) as suggestive information that has already been displayed is completed, , the change of the base object is awaited, and the pending icon 411 corresponding to the type of the base object after change is derived. Therefore, in a configuration in which the customization pattern (part object 433) to be customized is displayed in advance, the long-awaited customization pattern is displayed, but the base object is changed immediately before it. It is possible to avoid a situation in which the part object 433 is also changed accordingly.

In addition, regarding the item pending icon 416 corresponding to the change information held after the change of the customization mode is determined, the item pending icon 416 corresponding to the changed base object 432 is displayed. Therefore, the player can perceive the change of the customization mode in advance, and when the change of the customization mode is associated with the degree of expectation for a big win, etc., or when the base object 432 is supposed to be changed, it is not changed. When performing such as, it is possible to improve the performance and the like.

Before the base object is changed, if the part object 433 corresponding to the changed base object is displayed as suggestive information, it is possible to know in advance that the base object will be changed. . Using such a phenomenon, when the change of the base object is associated with the expectation of winning, etc., or when performing a strange effect such that the base object is supposed to be changed but is not changed, the performance can be improved. can be achieved.

(j; Proximity Detection Sensor) In the above-described embodiment, the effect button 125 and the cross button 126 as operating means are used to perform various selection inputs related to customization. Input means may be employed. For example, it is possible to detect the approach or contact of an object to a plurality of locations of the decorative design display device 42 as a variable display means that displays various announcements related to the customization function. It is good also as providing the proximity detection means which carries out. For example, proximity detection means having a light-emitting portion and a light-receiving portion capable of detecting an object (a player's hand, etc.) approaching in front of the decorative pattern display device 42 with respect to the variable display unit 35 or the center frame 47 Three sets of detection sensors (for example, infrared sensors, etc.) may be provided so as to correspond to the left design display area, the middle design display area, and the right design display area, respectively. Further, for example, a touch panel as an approach detection means may be provided on the display surface of the decorative pattern display device 42 .

That is, in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 can be customized, and the player can make various selections and decisions regarding the customization. Furthermore, such a selection decision is configured to be performed only within a part of the period during which the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner, so there is not much time to spare. Therefore, within the time limit, the operation of reading and understanding the explanation displayed on the decorative pattern display device 42, selecting an appropriate option from the options, and operating the production button 125 and the cross button 126 to make a selection decision. is a relatively difficult operation for a player who is not accustomed to various selection and decision operations related to customization.

In this respect, the decorative pattern display device 42, which displays the explanations, options, objects to be customized, etc., is configured so that input operations can be performed by directly touching (intuitively) (for example, , the corresponding input is performed only by touching a portion where a predetermined option is displayed), the operation can be made very easy to understand. Therefore, it is possible to avoid situations such as time running out due to confusion with such an operation, and game tempo becoming worse by setting a relatively long time for such an operation.

In addition, when the decorative pattern display device 42 displays options for requesting a selection related to customization, the player's hand that is close to or in contact with the display location of the option is used to confirm the intention to select each option. is desirably configured to be detectable, and furthermore, when configured so that various operations can be performed on the pending icon 411 in the pending display area 405, each pending icon 411 (in this example, It is desirable that the player's hand approaching or contacting each of the four display locations can be detected. In addition, it is desirable that the hand of the player approaching or contacting the display position of each completed car 441 in the gallery area 407 can be detected.

(k; real-time customization, dog motif) In the above embodiment, in the normal stage and the omen stage, as the game progresses (the variable display is sequentially executed), customization of the unfinished car 431 progresses, and the "car presentation" is performed. is determined and a completed car 441 is displayed in the gallery area 407, the completed car 441 can appear in the car presentation. In other words, the customization work and the specific effect using the customized object (the car effect using the customized car as the result of the customization) are performed separately. configuration is not limited.

An example of a mode (a configuration in which customization progresses in real time while a specific effect using a customizable object is being performed) will be described below with reference to FIGS. 69 and 70. FIG. In this embodiment, in addition to the effect button 125 and the cross button 126, a proximity detection sensor 921 capable of separately detecting the proximity of an object to the left, middle, and right parts of the decorative pattern display device 42 and the effect button A button proximity detection sensor (not shown) for detecting the proximity of an object above 125 is provided.

In this embodiment, the production button 125, the proximity detection sensor 921, the button proximity detection sensor, etc. are used to create a "contact production" that makes it possible to enjoy contact with the "dog" displayed on the decorative design display device 42. " is to be held. In the decorative pattern display device 42 during the interaction effect, "Dog 931" as a main object that performs various actions is mainly displayed in the center of the screen. , a “dog mannequin 932” is displayed as a sub-object that is a simplified version (like a silhouette) of the “dog 931” in the center of the screen. These "dog 931" and "dog mannequin 932" are basically continuously displayed over a plurality of variable displays only during the "interacting effect" period.

Various actions are displayed for "Dog 931", and as shown in the upper right part of FIG. is detected), and a display of performing an action (reacting) in response to an operation such as holding a hand above the effect button 125 (detecting a hand or the like by the button proximity detection sensor) is performed. On the other hand, the "dog mannequin 932" is displayed as it is restrained. The orientation of the “dog mannequin 932” may be changed by operating the cross button 126 .

"Dog 931" starts from the state of not wearing anything (the state in FIG. 69), "head", "face", "neck-upper body", "lower body-tail", and "legs". ” can be added (customized). In addition, items 933 of multiple patterns can be attached to the "head", "face", "neck to upper body", "lower body to tail", and "legs". In this embodiment, the "dog 931" wearing nothing corresponds to the base object of the main object, and the "item 933" worn by the "dog 931" corresponds to the customization object of the main object.

"Dog Mannequin 932", similar to "Dog 931", is prepared from the state of wearing nothing to "head", "face", "neck-upper body", "lower body-tail", and "legs". It is configured so that "item 933" can be added (customized) by pressing. Also, the "dog mannequin 932" with nothing on it corresponds to the base object of the sub-object, and the "item 933" worn by the "dog mannequin 932" corresponds to the customization object of the sub-object. By the way, "Dog 931" is complete even without wearing anything, while "Dog Mannequin 932", which teaches the customization status, is incomplete without wearing anything. It can be said. Thus, for example, "Dog Mannequin 932" with nothing on it is an incomplete object, while "Dog 931" with nothing on it is not an incomplete object. In addition, in this aspect example, "Dog 931" constitutes a display related to the incomplete object.

Regarding "item 933", "item 933" is derived when the sub-controller 162 receives the starting command from the main controller 261 during the "interacting performance" period and stores the variation information in the pending information storage area. If derivation is determined, a lottery is held to determine which part (customization item) and which pattern (customization pattern) of the item 933 is to be derived. "Item 933" is displayed as a pending icon 411 (item pending icon 416) in the lower left portion of the decorative design display device 42 (pending display area 405). Then, when the variable display corresponding to the item pending icon 416 is started, whether or not the "item 933" displayed in the item pending icon 416 is to be reflected in the "dog 931" is displayed in the variable display. , and when the player operates the effect button 125 or the cross button 126 to make a selection decision input to reflect it, the "item 933" is added to both the "dog 931" and the "dog mannequin 932". To reflect.

Further, in this aspect example, regarding the "dog mannequin 932", the "item 933" among the "head", "face", "neck-upper body", "lower body-tail", and "legs" has not yet been worn ( Masking 935 is applied corresponding to (the range including) the part (not customized). The masking 935 of this mode example includes parts to which the "item 933" has not yet been added so as to make the target parts easier to understand, and is applied in a range slightly wider than the parts. Masking 935 set for each part (each customization item) has a different color. On the other hand, the main object "Dog 931" is not masked.

As described above, according to this aspect example, by confirming the "dog mannequin 932" that is customized in the same way (simultaneously) as the "dog 931" in the "contact presentation", the "dog 931" You can clearly see that there are parts that have not been customized yet. On the other hand, masking 935 is not applied to “dog 931”. For this reason, for example, "Dog 931" is displayed even when all parts (customization items) have not yet been customized, and only "Dog 931" is displayed regardless of whether or not "Item 933" has been added. However, in a configuration that can sufficiently entertain players, it is possible to avoid a situation in which masking is applied to "Dog 931", which causes deterioration of design and resulting deterioration of interest. While doing so, the progress of customization of "Dog 931" can be reliably grasped.

The input operation for changing the mode of the "dog 931" and the selection input operation for reflecting the item 933 on the "dog 931" and the "dog mannequin 932" at the time of customization chance are configured to be different. is desirable. For example, to change the mode of "dog 931", press the production button 125, touch the decorative pattern display device 42 (detect the hand etc. with the proximity detection sensor 921), hold the hand above the production button 125 (button The proximity detection sensor detects a hand or the like), whereas the selection input operation related to customization is configured such that first, an input operation to the cross button 126 is performed, and then an input operation to the effect button 125 is performed. do. In this case, in the situation where the operation related to the mode change of "Dog 931" is being performed, when the state switches to the state where the operation input related to customization can be performed, the unintentional selection input operation related to customization is prevented from being performed in a rush. be able to.

Note that the "base object" is not limited to "Dog 931". Tools, vehicles, backgrounds, etc. used by characters may be employed. In addition, as "base objects", vehicles used by predetermined characters, vehicles such as airplanes, bases for objects (cakes, weapons, etc.) produced by characters, backgrounds such as living spaces and zoos are adopted, and "customized objects" are used. As such, configuration parts such as vehicles and weapons, decorations, various objects installed in the background, and the like may be adopted. In addition, if a touch panel is adopted in the decorative pattern display device 42, the operation of the "contact time" can be made easier, easier, and more versatile.

Although the sub-object (dog mannequin 932) in this aspect example has a simplified aspect of the main object (dog 931), it is not limited to such a configuration, and has not yet been customized. All that is required is that the parts (customization items) can be taught. For example, in the tuning area 406, something like a tag associated with each customization item is displayed. The tag corresponding to the may be constructed so as not to have any description. However, by making the form of the sub-object similar to the main object (such as a simplified form of the main object), the correspondence relationship between the sub-object and the main object becomes clearer, and the player's customization is improved. It can help you understand and operate.

In this aspect example and the above-described embodiment, the character to be customized is configured to be displayed on the decorative design display device 42 in which decorative design variations are displayed. It may be configured to display the character (one or both of the main object and the subkey object) on which the is performed.

(l; Definition of Gallery Area, Upper Limit, and Completion) In the above embodiment, once the completed car 441 is used in the car presentation, it is deleted from the gallery area 407, but this configuration is particularly limited. not a thing For example, by increasing the number of completed cars 441 that can be displayed in the gallery area 407 (even if they are not displayed at once, they can be selectively displayed by scrolling display or the like), etc., and used in the car presentation. It may be configured so that it is not erased even if it is used, or the upper limit of the number of times of use may be set to a plurality of times. It should be noted that, in the above-described embodiment, by performing a mobile-linked game, a new combination of completed cars 441 once completed is always accumulated and stored in the server. The completed car 441 selected from the above can be displayed in the gallery area 407 of the decorative pattern display device 42, but a separate condition for returning the completed car 441 to the pachinko machine 10 side may be provided. However, it is also possible to omit the configuration itself in which the completed vehicle 441 can be returned.

Further, in the above embodiment, when all customization items of the unfinished vehicle 431 are customized, it is unconditionally treated as the completed vehicle 441 and displayed in the gallery area 407. , when all the customization items of the unfinished car 431 have been customized, the player operates the effect button 125 and the cross button 126 to make an input indicating that the customization of the unfinished car 431 is to end (the car is The unfinished vehicle 431 may be configured to be displayed in the gallery area 407 as the completed vehicle 441 when an input indicating consent to display in the gallery area 407 is performed.

In this case, it is possible to thoroughly enjoy the customization so that it becomes more to your liking. In addition, when the gallery area 407 is full and the unfinished car 431 is completed, but it is not desired to delete any of them, the transition display to the gallery area 407 can be waited until the car presentation is performed. , convenience can be improved. In the case of adopting this configuration, in the finished vehicle accumulation storage area, the completed unfinished vehicle 431 is not displayed at the stage when the completed vehicle 431 is completed, but at the stage where the completed vehicle 431 is displayed in the gallery area 407. The configuration is such that information about the car 431 is stored.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the finished car 441 displayed in the gallery area 407 is returned to the tuning area 406 (for example, replaced with the unfinished car 431 in the tuning area 406) based on the player's predetermined operation input. ), it may be configured so that it can be customized again. Incidentally, in this case, not only the completed vehicle 441 but also an uncompleted vehicle 431 (a vehicle having customization items that have not been customized) may be displayed in the gallery area 407 . In this case, it is possible to complete a car with more commitment. The timing at which the completed car 441 in the gallery area 407 can be returned to the tuning area 406 is not particularly limited. Convenience and the like can be improved if the completed car 441 in the gallery area 407 can be returned to the tuning area 406 when displayed.

In addition, in the case of a configuration in which complicated operations can be executed, the player can directly touch the selection items displayed on the decorative pattern display device 42 or bring his/her finger close to the operation input. It is desirable to configure the system so that it can be performed. In this case, since the operation input is intuitive, the input is easy to understand, and the time required for input can be shortened. Therefore, it is possible to avoid problems such as deterioration of game performance.

(m; Suspended change) In the above embodiment, basically (except for the case where the second variable display takes precedence over the first variable display and is replaced), it is displayed in the suspended display area 405 of the decorative pattern display device Although the mode of the pending icon 411 as suggested information is configured not to change in the middle, it may be configured to change.

For example, for the pending area of the pending information storage area, based on the result of the customized lottery performed in response to the changed information that has been suspended later, in the variation display corresponding to the already suspended variation information (postscript ) to give a customization chance, or to change the part object 433 of the item reservation icon 416 corresponding to the change information that has already been reserved and to which the customization chance will be given. can be configured to In this case, even after the item pending icon 416 is once displayed in a predetermined mode, the mode may change before the corresponding variable display is executed. It is possible to diversify the production, such as stepping up the degree of expectation for the occurrence of the state.

Further, for example, in addition to the variation information newly stored in the variation information storage area, if variation information is already stored in the variation information storage area (variation display is suspended), the variation The customization chance determined to be executed corresponding to the information may be configured to be executable in the variable display corresponding to the already stored variable information. In other words, in the variable display where the expectation for the occurrence of a big win is high and super reach effects such as "car effects" are performed for a relatively long time, effects related to customization are also derived (parts selection screen display, completion time to display the car selection screen, etc.), the time that can be secured for the production (super reach production, etc.) for teaching whether or not the jackpot state will occur will be shortened, or the variable time is too long, and the performance balance may deteriorate.

In this regard, in the variable display before the variable display after the specific effect such as the super reach effect is performed, the customization opportunity that is executed based on the change information of the variable display after the above By executing the above, it is possible to perform a specific effect (such as a car effect) such as a super ready-to-win effect in the later variable display with a relatively large margin, and furthermore, in the previous variable display, the effect related to customization can be performed. can be done with relative leeway. In addition, by providing the customization chance, it is possible to heighten the expectation that an effect with a high degree of expectation of winning to the big win state will be derived in the later variable display. In particular, in a state in which the time (variation time) of the variable display of the decorative pattern is set relatively short (shortened time state), by applying the above-described configuration, such an effect can be exhibited more remarkably. .

In addition, in general, the first variable display that is performed in a state where four or more first variable displays are held based on the ball entering the first variable winning device 33a has a variable time set short. Therefore, even if it is determined that a customization chance will be performed, the customization chance will not be given (without the parts selection screen being displayed), and the variation will not be displayed. Before or after the display, a variable display may be provided with a corresponding customization chance. Furthermore, if it is decided to give the customization chance even in the variable display to which the customization chance is transferred, either one of the customization chances will disappear, or the customization that was decided to be given in the transition destination change display The chance may be configured to shift to another variable display.

It should be noted that the change of the item reservation icon 416 is not limited to the configuration performed by "retrofitting", and may be determined in advance. That is, for example, when determining the customization items and customization patterns that are performed when the variable information is stored in the pending information storage area, it may also be configured to determine whether or not to change the item pending icon 416. Good (Determine the item reserve icon 416 in the initial form, the item reserve icon 416 in the final form (at the start of the change), or the item reserve icon 416 if an intermediate change is to be made).

Further, whether or not to permit the change of the state of the item pending icon 416 displayed in the pending display area 405 is determined based on the player's operation input to the production button 125, the cross button 126, or the like. may be configured. In other words, for the player who wanted the appearance of the parts object 433 attached to the item pending icon 416 before the mode change, the item pending icon 416 changes its mode (changed to another parts object 433). There is a risk that interest will be lost by putting it away. In this respect, by configuring it so that it is possible to determine whether or not to change the state of the pending icon 411 according to the operation input by the player, the above problem can be avoided, and customization can be advanced while suppressing the occurrence of stress. can continue.

It should be noted that it is possible to change the item holding icon 416 (re-lottery, shift in a predetermined order, or change as the player intends) by operating the production button 125 or the like by the player. good. Furthermore, it may be configured such that the right to change is obtained when a predetermined condition is established.

In the above-described embodiment, when it is decided to grant the customization chance, the part object 433 that has acquired the right to be granted at the time of the customization chance is always displayed in the corresponding pending icon 411 (the item pending icon 416 is However, it is not limited to such a configuration, and it may be configured so that the variable display corresponding to the normal pending icon 412 may also generate a customization chance. Note that the item reserve icon 416 may be configured such that only the provision of the customization chance is taught and the type of the part object 433 is not taught, or the background 417 may be omitted. The item pending icon 416 itself may be omitted (only the normal pending icon 412 may be used).

In addition, the provision of the customization chance may be taught by a method other than the item reserve icon 416 . For example, a display device may be provided separately from the decorative pattern display device 42 to display it there, or it may be expressed by a movable accessory, or it may be expressed by using a lamp or a signboard associated with each customization item. You can do it. However, by displaying the item pending icon 416 in the pending display area 405, it is possible to give a customization chance and teach in advance the type of the part object 433 in an easy-to-understand manner, and to further improve the performance of the customization function. can.

In addition, if it is decided to grant a customization chance in the customization lottery performed when storing in the reservation area of the reservation information storage area, the customization chance for that amount is not displayed as a change in the corresponding change information, but after that may be configured to be given at the time of the variable display of . For example, in the decorative pattern display device 42, apart from the pending icon 411 of the pending display area 405, a customization display area for customization is provided, and information on customization for 8 times of variable display (double the maximum pending number of variable display) (presence or absence of customization opportunities, customization items, and customization patterns) is provided in a customization pending storage area. Furthermore, the customization reserve storage area always stores at least four pieces of information about customization, and in a state where no change information is reserved in the reserve information storage area and no change display is performed, the change Even if the information is stored in the reserved information storage area, the customization chance decided to be given at the time of storing the change information will be given at the time of change display four times later (excluding the change display) It will be done. For this reason, for example, the holding of the game ball in hand and the change display is no longer held, but if the change display is performed two more times, the desired part object 433 can be obtained, so let's continue playing the game a little more. In this way, it is possible to improve the desire to play.

(n; pending continuous notice) Further, it may be configured such that customization chances can be given to a plurality of variable displays based on winning in one customization lottery. Further, the customization pattern of the customization opportunity in the previous variable display may be changed by forcibly matching the customization pattern of the customization chance in the later variable display. By adopting these configurations, it is possible to use the mode of the item pending icon 416 in the pending display area 405 to perform a continuous effect (so-called continuous notice) related to each other over a plurality of variable displays.

For example, when a starting command is received, a holding continuous notice lottery (winning in part of the big hit fluctuation or front and back fluctuation) is performed to determine whether or not to perform a holding continuous notice in the holding display area 405, and such a holding continuous notice lottery , the type of reservation continuous notice is determined, and execution of a customization chance and its contents are stored in correspondence with the change information of the object reservation area. More specifically, for example, in a state in which pending information is stored in the first to third pending areas of the pending information storage area, this is performed when receiving the advance command and storing the variation information in the fourth pending area. If you win the pending continuous notice lottery and select the sports car pending continuous notice, turn on the customization chance flag of the 1st reservation area to the 4th reservation area in the reservation information storage area, and the 1st reservation Store information of "front body parts of sports car" in the reserved icon storage area of the area, store information of "rear body parts of sports car" in the reserved icon storage area of the second reserved area, and reserve the third reserved area. The information of "door parts of sports car" is stored in the icon storage area, and the information of "tires of sports car and engine and muffler of sports car" is stored in the reserved storage area of the fourth reserved area.

As a result, in the reserved display area 405, the information that can complete the sports car series car is displayed, and the parts object 433 is reflected in the unfinished car 431 at the customization chance in all of these variable displays. If the selection is made, a finished vehicle 441 unified with sports car system parts can be obtained. In this case, the mode of the reserved display area 405 can make the game even more lively. In addition, it is possible to make a suggestion at the stage before the corresponding variable display is performed. You can enjoy a new production that is different from the conventional continuous notice that you do not know without it.

In this example, even if the part objects 433 are attached to all the customization items of the unfinished car 431 in the tuning area 406 (the body of the finished car 441 is formed), the effect buttons 125, etc., of the player are displayed. Unless an input to the effect that the transition display to the gallery area 407 is permitted by the operation to is confirmed, the transition display is not performed. In addition, when there are four, three, two, or one suspension of variable display, a random number counter used when determining which suspension is given a customization chance (multiple selections are possible and no selection is possible). and a table, and when the starting command is received, the table may be selected based on the number of reservations and the content of fluctuation (whether it will be a big hit or a small hit, or whether it will be a front-back reach) .

In the case of adopting the above configuration, as an effect to conclude the continuous pending notice, the variable display corresponding to the variable information (stored in the fourth pending area in the above example) decided to perform the continuous pending notice It is desirable to configure so that the car presentation is performed at . In other words, for example, at the time of receiving the starting command from the main controller 261, a lottery is conducted to determine whether or not the "car presentation" is to be executed, and it is determined that both the customization settings and the car presentation are to be performed. In this case, it is determined whether or not there is one or more pending variation information other than the relevant variation information, and if it is determined that there is one or more, a customization chance is granted corresponding to the pending variation information. It may be configured such that it is determined whether or not it is determined, and if a negative determination is made, a customization chance is given to the pending variation information. On the other hand, if there is no suspension or if a customization chance is given in response to the suspended variation information, the post-installation customization may not be set.

Furthermore, it is desirable to configure so that the super ready-to-win effect such as the car effect is not derived in the variable displays other than the final variable display that constitutes the pending continuous advance notice. Also, it is possible to change the mode of the item pending icon 416 when the variable display is performed. As a result, for example, due to the state of the pending continuous notice being displayed in the pending display area 405, the future development can be read completely (unexpectedness etc. are lost), which leads to a decrease in interest. can be avoided.

(O; setting of car effect) In the above embodiment, when it is decided whether or not to perform the car effect at the start of the variable display of the decorative symbols, the normal stage or the sign stage is selected, and the variable display is customized. It is determined whether or not a chance will be granted, and if the determination is affirmative, the car presentation is not performed (step S7604; YES), but the configuration is not limited to this. For example, when the sub-control device 262 receives the starting command, it determines whether or not to perform the car presentation, or determines whether or not the variation information is such that the car presentation is likely to be selected at the start of the variation. Then, if the variation information is such that a car presentation will be performed or is likely to be performed, the customization chance may not be given. In this case as well, the player is allowed to select customization, and furthermore, the combination of the type of car presentation and the type of the completed car 441 suggests the degree of expectation for the occurrence of a big win state, etc. After the type of car presentation is decided by the Pachinko machine 10 at the start of the variable display, when the player changes the completed car 441 in the variable display, the accuracy of the winning expectation is lowered. situation can be prevented.

Further, in the above embodiment, the type of "car presentation" is determined based on the type of the completed car 441 that is (or can be) used in the car presentation and the results of the variable display (car presentation). However, the type of "car effect" is determined first, and if the "car effect" is "successful", the variable display that the "car effect" is performed, or the variable that is suspended before that At the time of display, a part object 433 that is likely to be advantageous to the determined type of "car effect" (increases the expectation of a big win) may be provided. It should be noted that the configuration of suggesting the degree of expectation for occurrence of the big win state by associating the type of the completed car 441 with the type of "car presentation" may be omitted.

(p; priority order of pending variation, pending icon) In the above embodiment, the game ball entering the second starting prize winning device 33b is displayed rather than the variation display based on the game ball entering the first starting prize winning device 33a. However, the variable display based on which of the first start winning device 33a and the second start winning device 33b the ball has won Regardless, it may be configured so that the variable display is completed in the order in which it was reserved. Further, in the above-described embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 42 does not teach which of the first start winning device 33a and the second start winning device 33b the variable display is based on the entry of the ball (only the reserved icon 411 is visually recognized). However, it may be configured so that it can be understood which one the variable display corresponds to.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, even if five or more variable displays are suspended in total on the special display devices 43L and 43R, only up to four suspended icons 411 are displayed on the decorative pattern display device 42. However, the same number of pending icons 411 as the variable display of the special display devices 43L and 43R may be displayed. In addition, in the case where the same number of pending icons 411 as the upper limit of the number of pending in the variable display (eight in the above example) can be displayed, in order to reduce the display space of the pending icons 411 (holding display area 405), It may be configured to be displayed smaller than the four reserved icons 411 to be consumed first and to be displayed smaller than the four reserved icons 411 to be consumed later. In addition, the mode of the four pending icons to be digested later is simplified so that the number of pending can be grasped, or the same hue as the normal pending icon 412 is given. can be configured to

(q) In the above-described embodiment, the jackpot probability, the number of jackpot types, and the opening/closing patterns of the variable winning devices 32a and 32b for various jackpot types are not particularly limited, and can be appropriately set for each model. Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the winning probability in the winning lottery is configured to change, but the winning probability does not change (constant), and the period of the high winning state given after the end of the jackpot state (variable The above configuration may be applied to a pachinko machine in which a plurality of patterns are prepared for the number of times.

Further, in the above embodiment, the number and arrangement of the starting winning devices 33a, 33b, the variable winning devices 32a, 32b, and the through gate 34 are not particularly limited, and can be set for each model. Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the winning lottery performed when a game ball enters the first starting prize winning device 33a and the winning lottery performed when a game ball enters the second starting prize winning device 33b are separate. is referred to, and the allocation of the jackpot type is changed, but it may be the same.

(r) In the above embodiment, after the variation display (first variation display) based on the entry of the game ball into the already suspended first start prize winning device 33a The second variable display is prioritized by changing the reserved order such that the variable display (second variable display) based on the entry of the game ball is digested before the first variable display. However, it may be configured to be consumed in the reserved order regardless of whether it is the first variable display or the second variable display.

(s) In the above embodiment, the main processing (see FIG. 9) and then the normal processing (see FIG. 10) are performed by the main controller 261, but the configuration is particularly limited to such a configuration. isn't it. For example, after step S111 of the main process, processing such as updating the counter value, which is performed in steps S210 to S219 of the normal processing in the above embodiment, is performed. The processing performed in steps S201 to S209 of the normal processing in the embodiment and the processing in step S401 performed as the NMI interrupt processing in the above embodiment may be performed. In addition, as the processing of step S401 in this case, for example, it is determined whether or not the power failure signal SK1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 501, and if the output of the power failure signal SK1 is confirmed, the power failure is performed. A configuration can be mentioned in which a flag indicating the occurrence of is turned on. Further, the processing of step S401 may be performed separately as NMI interrupt processing, as in the above embodiment.

(t) In the above embodiment, the hit/fail random number storage area that stores the value of the hit/fail random number counter C1 is overwritten with information as to whether or not a big win will occur. is not limited to For example, in addition to the winning random number storage area, a storage area for storing information as to whether or not a jackpot state occurs may be provided for the execution area and each of the reservation areas of the special variation reservation area, or the special variation reservation may be provided. Separately from the area, a storage area corresponding to the execution area of the special variable reservation area and each reservation area may be provided, and information as to whether or not a big win state occurs may be stored in the storage area. In addition to the winning type random number storage area for storing the value of the type determination counter C2, a storage area for storing the type of the jackpot may be provided, or a reach random number storage area for storing the value of the variation selection counter C3. Separately, a storage area for storing reach information may be provided. Further, in the above-described embodiment, at the start of the variable display of the special symbols, it is confirmed again whether the value of the success/failure random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to winning, etc., and the processing corresponding to the confirmation processing is performed. can be configured to

(u) You may implement as a pachinko machine of a type different from the said embodiment. For example, movable means ( a variable ball entry means comprising a feather member), a specific ball entry means and a non-specific ball entry means capable of entering a game ball that has entered a specific area, and a game ball that has entered the specific ball entry means is detected. specific ball entry detection means (condition fulfillment detection means), special start means provided outside the specific area and capable of entering a game ball moving in the game area, and detection of a game ball that has entered the special start means and a main control means for controlling the opening and closing of the variable ball entry means, and when a game ball enters a specific area, the game ball enters the specific ball entry means and the non-specific ball entry means. A predetermined number of game values (game balls) are awarded to the player in either case, and the main control means activates the variable ball entry means for the first time based on detection by the special start detection means. or the variable ball entry means is opened for a second time longer than the first time, or the variable winning means is opened for a specified number of A lottery is performed to determine whether or not to generate a big winning state by repeating this process for a specified number of times with one round until a game ball enters the ball, and when a small winning state is won in the winning lottery, a small winning state is generated, It may be applied to a game machine in which a big win state is generated when a big win is won in a winning lottery or when a specific ball-entering detection means detects a big win. In addition, in addition to pachinko machines, there are also arranged ball machines, various types of amusement machines such as majang ball similar to them, slot machines as reel-type amusement machines, and amusement machines that fuse slot machines and pachinko machines. You may

For example, when it is embodied in a slot machine, a plurality (for example, three) of stop button pressing games are set, and a part object 433 is provided when the correct answer is given. If a predetermined car is completed by the time the push-order guessing game ends, the mission may be successful (transition to a special game state in which the completed car is used).

[Appendix]
Technical ideas that can be grasped from the above embodiment will be described below.

A. There is a pachinko machine as a kind of game machine. In a pachinko machine, when a game ball launched by a shooting means enters a starting ball entry means provided on a game board, a lottery is conducted as to whether or not a winning state is generated, and the lottery is determined by the variable display means. A variable display is provided to teach the result (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-271480).

In recent years, by exchanging information between a game machine and a server operated by a game machine manufacturer via a mobile communication terminal carried by a player, it provides a pleasure that cannot be experienced simply by playing a game machine. A game system (mobile-linked game) capable of playing is known. For example, by performing a mobile-linked game, various customizations such as costumes can be executed for continuously displayed objects such as characters that can be continuously displayed in multiple times of variable display on the variable display means. . Furthermore, in order to diversify effects and the like and suppress monotonous feeling during the game, a configuration is provided in which a plurality of items can be customized for continuously displayed objects, and a plurality of patterns are prepared for customization of each item. be.

However, when a plurality of customization items are prepared for continuously displayed objects, it is relatively difficult to grasp and predict the final form of continuously displayed objects (for example, for a player who is playing a game on the gaming machine for the first time). There is a possibility that it will become a thing. In this case, there is a concern that it may be difficult to understand that there are customization items that have not been customized yet, that is, it may be difficult to understand how far the continuously displayed objects can be customized. Therefore, despite the fact that the customization function has been enhanced, the potential of the customization function cannot be fully conveyed, and the customization function hardly contributes to the improvement of the desire to play, and the player cannot use the customization function (performance using the customization function). There is a risk that you will stop playing the game machine before you understand and enjoy it.

In addition, if you try to explain the customization function carefully in sentences using variable display means, etc., the time required for such explanation will be long, and there is a concern that the flow of the production will be deteriorated (especially if the player has already grasped the wasted time for us). Furthermore, such explanations are incomplete. For example, if the player cannot read the displayed explanations, the flow of the production will be slowed down, and the explanations of the customization functions will not be understood. There is also a concern that it will no longer contribute to the smooth progress of the game.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming system that allows players to fully enjoy the customization function.

Means A-1. In a gaming system comprising a gaming machine and a server capable of acquiring information about a game played by a player via a mobile communication terminal carried by the player,
The game machine is
an operation means that can be operated by a player;
player identification information storage means for storing player information input by the player by operating the operation means;
a game information storage means capable of accumulating and storing game information, which is information relating to a lottery to be performed at the time of the game;
an information output means capable of outputting the game information accumulated and stored in the game information storage means in a manner that can be acquired by the mobile communication terminal;
By storing the player information in the player identification information storage means, a process corresponding to the player information is performed, and the game information related to the game is accumulated and stored in the game information storage means. ,
The mobile communication terminal is
information acquisition means capable of acquiring the game information output from the information output means;
mobile-side transmission means for, when the game information is acquired by the information acquisition means, transmitting the game information and mobile identification information capable of identifying the mobile communication terminal to the server;
mobile-side receiving means for receiving information transmitted from the server;
a portable output means capable of outputting the information received by the portable side receiving means;
The server is
server-side receiving means for receiving the game information and the mobile identification information transmitted from the mobile-side transmitting means;
server-side game information storage means for accumulating and storing the game information in association with the mobile identification information;
Accumulation storage for accumulating and storing the game information in the server-side game information storage means corresponding to the mobile-phone identification information when the game information and the mobile-phone identification information are received by the server-side receiving means. a control means;
server-side transmission means for transmitting information related to the game information stored in the server-side game information storage means to the mobile communication terminal;
The game machine is
main control means for performing a lottery for determining whether or not to generate a special game state advantageous to a player based on a predetermined opportunity, and for generating the special game state based on the result of the lottery;
variable display means capable of variably displaying identification information;
Display control means for variably displaying the identification information on the variable display means and for stopping display of the identification information based on the result of the lottery after a predetermined time,
The display control means is configured to be capable of deriving a continuous display object that can be displayed continuously in the plurality of times of the variable display on the variable display means,
Regarding the continuous display object,
Along with setting multiple customizable items,
A plurality of patterns are prepared for the customization pattern of each customization item,
The continuously displayed objects include a completed object in which all of the plurality of customization items have been customized, and an incomplete object in which the customization items that have not yet been customized exist up to the completion object,
The unfinished object is configured so that a part of the completed object is masked in a manner different from the already customized part, corresponding to the customization item that has not yet been customized,
A game system characterized in that, when the game information is output by the information output means, information relating to the continuously displayed object is also output.

According to the means A-1, by confirming the form of the unfinished object, which is the form of the continuously displayed object in which there are customization items that have not yet been customized among the plurality of customization items, the part that has not been customized yet (customization items) exist (there is room for further customization) at a glance. Therefore, it is possible to easily and surely grasp how far the customization of the continuously displayed object can be performed, and furthermore, it is possible to relatively smoothly find out how to enjoy the customization function by seeing the entire contents of the customization function. As a result, it is possible to fully utilize the customization function, and to fully enjoy the performance using the continuously displayed object. Furthermore, by increasing interest in the customization function, it is possible to improve the willingness to play the game.

In addition, it is possible to effectively and clearly recognize that there are parts that have not been customized yet by masking incomplete objects, so separate explanations of customization functions need not be carefully and lengthy. finish. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the situation that the explanation of the customizing function slows down the performance (especially, the player who has already grasped it takes unnecessary time), and the game progresses relatively smoothly. can be done.

Furthermore, information about continuously displayed objects in the gaming machine can be output to the server via the mobile communication terminal. As a result, on the server side, for example, it becomes possible to grasp continuously displayed objects that have been completed so far, or to grasp uncompleted objects at the end of the previous game. Therefore, the information about the continuously displayed objects in the current game can be handed over to the next game (mobile-linked game). As a result, it is possible to overdo the current game, such as a configuration in which unless a continuous display object is completed in one game, the performance using the completed continuous display object can only be seen. It is possible to increase the enjoyment of the next game while suppressing the situation such as being put away. Therefore, it is possible to improve the convenience, and it is possible to make the effect using the continuously displayed object more diverse and profound. In addition, even if you do not overdo it in a single game, you can accumulate customizations over several days and enjoy them.

It should be noted that the configuration may be such that only completed objects can be handed over, or both completed objects and unfinished objects can be handed over. In addition, the function to customize continuously displayed objects (or the function to select customization, etc.) is effective only when mobile-linked games are running. can be enhanced.

It should be noted that "masking" refers to features (characteristic It is to be able to identify the presence of the unfinished portion and also to identify where the unfinished portion is. By masking the unfinished part, it becomes possible to identify that the unfinished part is not the completed part, and by continuing to customize until there is no unfinished part, the customization is completed (becomes a completed object). Identifiable. As a form of "masking",
1) for a range that includes part or all of the unfinished portion, or at least a portion of the unfinished portion;
2) Patterns (patterns composed of lines, planes, blanks, etc.) that are not added to the completed part, for example, not only patterns such as wallpaper, but also stamps (patterns such as letters and characters' faces) are stamped. Including aspects such as such, aspects such as hollowing out due to the frame of the unfinished part, etc.),
Aspects of colors that are not derived in the finished part (for example, different hues (e.g., sepia tone), different color usage (less types of hues are used, such as monotone tone, etc.), etc.), or
The touch of the unfinished part that is not derived from the completed part (how to draw lines; thickness, fineness (number of lines), roundness of edges, etc.), or
These combinations
3) Covering, shielding, overlapping (on the front side or back side of the unfinished portion), synthesizing, applying, and reflecting.

Means A-2. The server is
A server-side continuously displayed object information storage means capable of storing information about the continuously displayed object in association with the mobile identification information;
when information about the continuously displayed object is received from the portable communication terminal storing the game information of the gaming machine, storing the information about the continuously displayed object in the server side continuously displayed object information storage means;
When a request is received from the mobile communication terminal to transmit information relating to the game information stored in the server-side game information storage means to the mobile communication terminal, the server-side continuous display is performed together with the information relating to the game information. The game system according to means A-1, wherein information relating to the continuously displayed object stored in the object information storage means is also transmitted.

According to means A-2, the information about the continuously displayed object can be handed over to the next game (mobile-linked game).

Means A-3. The game machine is
means for displaying the continuously displayed object on the variable display means based on the information regarding the continuously displayed object when information regarding the continuously displayed object is input by an operation of the operating means by the player. A game system according to A-1 or A-2.

According to means A-3, it is possible to reflect the information about the continuously displayed object in the previous game to the current game. The "information about continuously displayed objects input by the player's operation of the operation means" includes information about game information issued by the server and accumulated and stored in the server, various setting information in the server, and the like. A password is a password in a configuration in which information about continuously displayed objects is included in the password. It is input information by means.

B. There is a pachinko machine as a kind of game machine. In a pachinko machine, when a game ball launched by a shooting means enters a starting ball entry means provided on a game board, a lottery is conducted as to whether or not a winning state is generated, and the lottery is determined by the variable display means. A variable display is provided to teach the result (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-271480).

In addition, the game machine is configured to be able to customize a plurality of items with respect to continuously displayed objects that can be continuously displayed in a plurality of times of variable display on the variable display means, and a plurality of patterns are prepared for customizing each item. there is something In this way, by using continuously displayed objects whose modes change in various ways for effects, etc., it is possible to diversify effects, etc., and suppress monotony during games.

However, when a plurality of customization items are prepared for continuously displayed objects, it is relatively difficult (for example, for a player who is playing the game machine for the first time) to grasp and predict the final form of continuously displayed objects. There is a possibility that it will become a thing. In this case, there is a concern that it may be difficult to understand that there are customization items that have not been customized yet, that is, it may be difficult to understand how far the continuously displayed objects can be customized. Therefore, even though the customization function has been enhanced, the potential of the customization function cannot be fully conveyed, and the customization function hardly contributes to the improvement of the desire to play, and the player cannot use the customization function (performance using the customization function). There is a risk that you will stop playing the game machine before you understand and enjoy it.

In addition, if you try to explain the customization function carefully in sentences using variable display means, etc., the time required for such explanation will be long, and there is a concern that the flow of the production will be deteriorated (especially if the player has already grasped the wasted time for us). Furthermore, such explanations are incomplete. For example, if the player cannot read the displayed explanations, the flow of the production will be slowed down, and the explanations of the customization functions will not be understood. There is also a concern that it will no longer contribute to the smooth progress of the game.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and its object is to provide a gaming machine that allows players to fully enjoy the customization function.

Means B-1-a. main control means for performing a lottery for determining whether or not to generate a special game state advantageous to a player based on a predetermined opportunity, and for generating the special game state based on the result of the lottery;
variable display means capable of variably displaying identification information;
A gaming machine comprising display control means for causing the variable display means to variably display the identification information and, after a predetermined period of time, stopping and displaying the identification information based on the result of the lottery,
The display control means is configured to be capable of deriving a continuous display object that can be displayed continuously in the plurality of times of the variable display on the variable display means,
Regarding the continuous display object,
Along with setting multiple customizable items,
A plurality of patterns are prepared for the customization pattern of each customization item,
The continuously displayed objects include a completed object in which all of the plurality of customization items have been customized, and an incomplete object in which the customization items that have not yet been customized exist up to the completion object,
The unfinished object is configured such that a portion of the completed object is masked in a manner different from the already customized portion corresponding to the customization item that has not yet been customized. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the means B-1-a, by confirming the aspect of the unfinished object, which is the form of the continuous display object in which there are customization items that have not yet been customized among the plurality of customization items, the portion that has not yet been customized is confirmed. It is possible to grasp at a glance that (customization item) exists (that there is room for further customization). Therefore, it is possible to easily and surely grasp how far the customization of the continuously displayed object can be performed, and furthermore, it is possible to relatively smoothly find out how to enjoy the customization function by seeing the entire contents of the customization function. As a result, it is possible to fully utilize the customization function, and to fully enjoy the performance using the continuously displayed object. Furthermore, by increasing interest in the customization function, it is possible to improve the willingness to play the game.

In addition, it is possible to effectively and clearly recognize that there are parts that have not been customized yet by masking incomplete objects, so separate explanations of customization functions need not be carefully and lengthy. finish. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the situation that the explanation of the customization function slows down the flow of the presentation (in particular, it takes unnecessary time for the player who has already grasped it), and the game progresses relatively smoothly. can be done.

Means B-1-b. main control means for performing a lottery for determining whether or not to generate a special game state advantageous to a player based on a predetermined opportunity, and for generating the special game state based on the result of the lottery;
variable display means capable of variably displaying identification information;
A gaming machine comprising display control means for causing the variable display means to variably display the identification information and, after a predetermined period of time, stopping and displaying the identification information based on the result of the lottery,
The display control means is configured to be capable of deriving a continuous display object that can be displayed continuously in the plurality of times of the variable display on the variable display means,
Regarding the continuous display object,
Along with setting multiple customizable items,
A plurality of patterns are prepared for the customization pattern of each customization item,
The continuously displayed objects include a completed object in which all of the plurality of customization items have been customized, and an incomplete object in which the customization items that have not yet been customized exist up to the completion object,
The unfinished object is configured so that a part of the completed object is masked in a manner different from the already customized part, corresponding to the customization item that has not yet been customized,
The gaming machine, wherein the display control means is configured to be able to derive a display related to the unfinished object while the unfinished object is being displayed.

According to the means B-1-b, basically the same effects as those of the above means B-1-a can be obtained. Further, according to means B-1-b, a display related to the incomplete object can be derived while the incomplete object is being displayed. Therefore, it is possible to help the player's understanding of the incomplete object, or to allow the player to visually recognize the unmasked state. Therefore, it is possible to get more interest in customization.

Means B-2. The game according to means B-1, wherein the masking applied to the incomplete object corresponding to each customization item is configured to have a pattern different from at least the adjacent masking. machine.

According to means B-2, when masking corresponding to a plurality of customizing items may be connected (continued) or close to each other, the masking corresponds to one customizing item. This makes it possible to more reliably avoid situations in which it is difficult to determine whether a customizable item corresponds to a customizable item or whether a plurality of customizable items are supported. Therefore, masking areas corresponding to a plurality of customization items can be set relatively freely, and by checking the state of the unfinished object, it is possible to find out how many uncustomized parts (customization items) remain. It is possible to grasp at a glance whether Therefore, by more effectively deriving more information about the customization function, the player can make decisions about the customization function quickly and reliably, and fully enjoy the customization process while proceeding with the game. can do.

Note that the “different patterns” of masking include those with different colors, patterns, or combinations thereof. Also, even if the masking areas are separated or lines are drawn at the borders of the masking areas, by making the masking patterns of the adjacent masking areas different, it is easier and faster to change the customization items that have not yet been customized. Able to distinguish between numbers and types.

Means B-3. customization progress storage means for storing information relating to customization of the unfinished object displayed on the variable display means;
customization selection means for selecting the customization item and the customization pattern;
customization reflection means for reflecting the customization pattern selected by the customization selection means on the incomplete object;
The customization selection means refers to the customization progress storage means when selecting the customization item and the customization pattern (avoids customization that duplicates the contents stored in the customization progress storage means). The gaming machine according to means B-1 or B-2.

According to means B-3, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the player feels uncomfortable because the customization of the same content is selected in quick succession, so that the player can enjoy the customization function more.

Means B-4. an operation means that can be operated by a player;
customization opportunity granting means for determining whether to grant a customization opportunity to the unfinished object;
customization selection means for selecting the customization item and the customization pattern;
said customization reflection means for reflecting the customization pattern selected by said customization selection means on said incomplete object;
a configuration in which the customization pattern selected by the customization selection means is reflected in the unfinished object when the customization opportunity giving means determines to give the unfinished object an opportunity to customize,
The customization reflecting means is configured to be able to determine whether or not to reflect the customization pattern selected by the customization selecting means on the unfinished object, based on information input by operating the operation means. A game machine according to any one of means B-1 to B-3 characterized by the above.

According to means B-4, although a customization pattern is selected on the gaming machine side, the gaming machine side does not unilaterally customize continuously displayed objects (unfinished objects), but customizes the customization patterns to unfinished objects. It is up to the player to decide whether or not to reflect the It is possible to reflect the player's individual tastes and the like in the customization of continuously displayed objects (not to reflect unfavorable customization patterns). Therefore, it is possible to avoid the frustration that the customization does not meet the player's expectations while suppressing the customizing function from becoming one-patterned. As a result, while diversifying the customization functions, it is possible to make the player more attached to the effect using the continuously displayed object, and to improve the desire to play the game.

In addition, as "input information by operating the operation means", information such as passwords that are input in advance to the game machine, including information such as the player's individual game history and various settings, and opportunities for customization were obtained. information that selects whether or not to execute customization in a case. In addition, when an opportunity for customization is provided, an announcement is made one by one to ask the player whether or not to reflect the selected customization pattern, and each time, the input information by operating the operation means is displayed. Alternatively, the player inputs the player's personal information to the gaming machine at the start of the game, and the customization reflecting means selects and discards the personal information according to the personal information. It may be configured to make a selection. In addition, when reflecting the selected customization pattern or selecting whether or not to reflect the customization pattern on the continuously displayed object, masking corresponding to the customization item to which the customization pattern belongs is different from normal. A different mode (blinking, etc.) may be used.

Means B-5. an operation means that can be operated by a player;
customization selection means for selecting the customization item and the customization pattern;
customization reflection means for reflecting the customization pattern selected by the customization selection means on the incomplete object;
The customization selection means includes:
Pattern random number generating means used for pattern lottery for determining the customization pattern;
Corresponding pattern storage means for storing a correspondence relationship between a value that can be generated by the pattern random number generation means and the customization pattern,
A plurality of the corresponding pattern storage means are provided,
Means B-1 to B-B, wherein the customization selection means is configured to be able to determine the corresponding pattern storage means to be referred to when selecting a customization pattern based on input information by operating the operation means. -4 the gaming machine according to any one of the above.

According to the means B-5, the player's individual game history, various settings (preferences), etc. can be reflected in the customization of the continuously displayed object (selection of the customization pattern by the customization selection means). Therefore, it is possible to avoid the frustration that the customization does not meet the player's expectations while suppressing the customizing function from becoming one-patterned. As a result, while diversifying the customization functions, it is possible to make the player more attached to the effect using the continuously displayed object, and to increase the desire to play the game.

Means B-6. customization selection means for selecting the customization item and the customization pattern;
customization reflection means for reflecting the customization pattern selected by the customization selection means on the incomplete object;
The customization selection means includes:
Pattern random number generating means used for pattern lottery for determining the customization pattern;
A configuration comprising a value that can be generated by the pattern random number generation means and a corresponding pattern storage means for storing a correspondence relationship with the customization pattern,
The corresponding pattern storage means includes first pattern storage means in which a specific customized pattern is not selected or is difficult to be selected, and second pattern storage means in which the specific customized pattern is more likely to be selected than the first pattern storage means. and
When selecting a customization pattern by the customization selection means,
a first pattern selection state in which the first pattern storage means is referenced and the second pattern storage means is not referenced;
Means B characterized by comprising customization pattern selection state switching means for changing the state to a second pattern selection state in which the second pattern storage means is referenced and the first pattern storage means is not referenced. The gaming machine according to any one of -1 to B-5.

According to the means B-6, by providing a state in which a specific customization pattern is likely to be provided (for example, a rare pattern high probability state in which a rare customization pattern is provided with a high probability as a specific customization pattern), the game value is increased. It is possible to arouse interest in the game in a dimension different from the factor related to the increase or decrease of the game, and to increase opportunities for presentation. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the feeling of monotony during the game, and to improve the willingness to play the game. Note that the conditions for the state change between the first pattern selection state and the second pattern selection state can be appropriately set for each model.

In addition, corresponding to means B-3, "the customization selection means refers to the customization progress storage means after selecting the customization item and the customization pattern, and determines that the content of the customization selected this time is the If it is determined that the customization overlaps with the contents stored in the customization progress storage means, the customization item may be selected again. That is, in means B-6, there is a state in which a specific customization pattern is likely to be given, and if the specific customization pattern is a rare customization pattern, the content of customization selected in the rare pattern high probability state overlaps. So, if a specific customization pattern is changed to another customization pattern (a general customization pattern that is difficult to select or not selected in the rare pattern high probability state), why is it a rare pattern high probability state but a general customization pattern? There is a concern that it will lead to a decline in interest as to whether the will be selected. On the other hand, in this example, by changing the customization item without changing the customization pattern, duplication can be avoided, so that such a situation can be avoided.

Means B-7. According to means B-6, the customization pattern selection state switching means executes the state change to the second pattern selection state based on the number of execution times of the variable display of the identification information in the variable display means. game machine.

According to the means B-7, since the number of executions of the variable display (the number of fluctuations) is the trigger for the state change to the second pattern selection state, the player is more aware of when the trigger for the state change will come. can be made easier. Therefore, for a player who wants to play a game in the second pattern selection state, the number of fluctuations can be used as a guideline, and the phenomenon corresponding to the second pattern selection state can be easily explained (specific customization pattern is selected, and the description of the effect when the effect dedicated to the second pattern selection state is set can be made easier to understand. Further, as the game progresses, the state change opportunity is approached with certainty, so an added value can be added to the progress of the game.

Means B-8. The pattern selection state switching means is
Means B-6 or B characterized by executing the state change to the second pattern selection state when winning in a pattern high-probability lottery for determining whether to change the state to the second pattern selection state. - The gaming machine according to 7.

According to the means B-8, winning in the pattern high-probability lottery triggers the state change to the second pattern selection state, so the game is played while always expecting the state change to the second pattern selection state. can be performed, and an effect related to the state change to the second pattern selection state can be performed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the feeling of monotony during the game.

Means B-9. The game according to any one of means B-6 to B-8, wherein the pattern selection state switching means executes the state change to the second pattern selection state based on the end of the special game state. machine.

According to the means B-9, even if the special game state is over, by shifting to the second pattern selection state, the disappointment and the marked decrease in motivation to play due to the end of the special game state are alleviated. can do. As the special game state, the game value can be expected to increase, or the game can be played while the game value owned by the player remains almost the same, or the probability of occurrence of such a state is increased. and the like.

Means B-10. customization opportunity granting means for determining whether to grant a customization opportunity to the unfinished object;
customization selection means for selecting the customization item and the customization pattern;
customization reflection means for reflecting the customization pattern selected by the customization selection means on the incomplete object;
a configuration in which the customization pattern selected by the customization selection means is reflected in the unfinished object when the customization opportunity giving means determines to give the unfinished object an opportunity to customize,
The customization opportunity granting means includes:
customization lottery random number generating means used for a customization lottery to decide whether or not to customize the unfinished object;
customized winning value storage means for storing a predetermined value among values that can be generated by the customized lottery random number generating means as a value for winning in the customized lottery;
The customized winning value storage means includes first customized winning value storage means and second customized winning value storage means having a larger number of winning values in the customized lottery than the first customized winning value storage means. ,
At the time of the customization lottery by the customization opportunity granting means,
a first winning value storage selection state in which the first customized winning value storage means is referred to;
Any one of means B-1 to B-9, further comprising customized winning state switching means for changing the state between the second customized winning value storage means and a second winning value storage selection state to which the second customized winning value storage means is referred. The game machine described.

According to the means B-10, by providing the second winning value storage selection state (customization high probability state) in which the chance of customizing the unfinished object is likely to come, the game can be played in a different dimension from the factors related to the increase/decrease of the game value. can arouse the interest of Therefore, it is possible to suppress the feeling of monotony during the game, and to improve the willingness to play the game. Incidentally, the conditions for changing the state between the first winning value storage selection state and the second winning value storage selection state can be appropriately set for each model.

Means B-11. The customized winning state switching means executes the state change to the second winning value storage selection state based on the number of execution times of variable display of the identification information in the variable display means. The game machine described.

According to the means B-11, since the number of executions of the variable display (the number of fluctuations) triggers the state change to the second winning value storage selection state, it is easy to recognize when the opportunity for the state change will come. can do. Therefore, it is possible for a player who desires to play a game in the second winning value storage selection state to use the number of times of variation as a guideline and to make it easier to play. Further, as the game progresses, the state change opportunity is approached with certainty, so an added value can be added to the progress of the game.

Means B-12. The customized winning state switching means includes:
Customized high-probability lottery random number generation means used for customized high-probability lottery for determining whether to change the state to the second winning value storage selection state;
customized high-probability lottery value storage means for storing a predetermined value among values that can be generated by the customized high-probability lottery random number generation means as a value for winning in the customized high-probability lottery,
The gaming machine according to means B-10 or B-11, characterized in that the state change to the second winning value storage selection state is executed based on winning in the customized high-probability lottery.

According to the means B-12, winning in the customized high-probability lottery triggers the state change to the second winning value storage selection state, so it is difficult to recognize when the state change will occur. can do. Therefore, it is possible to play the game while always expecting the state change to the second winning value storage selection state, and to perform an effect related to the state change to the second winning value storage selection state. As a result, it is possible to suppress the feeling of monotony during the game.

It should be noted that the customizing high-accuracy lottery may be performed each time the identification information is variably displayed on the variable display means.

Means B-13. According to any one of means B-10 to B-12, the customized winning state switching means executes the state change to the second winning value storage selection state based on the end of the special game state. game machine.

According to the means B-13, even if the special game state is over, by shifting to the second winning value storage selection state, disappointment due to the end of the special game state, significant decrease in motivation to play, etc. can be reduced. As the special game state, the game value can be expected to increase, or the game can be played while the game value owned by the player remains almost the same, or the probability of occurrence of such a state is increased. and the like.

Means B-14. The continuous display object includes a main object and a sub-object (a simplified form of the main object),
The main object and the sub-object are
a base object that enables identification of an overview of the completed object;
a customization object that is set corresponding to each of the customization items and that is displayed in a portion of the base object that corresponds to the customization item when the customization is performed;
when the customized object is reflected in the continuously displayed object, it is reflected in both the main object and the sub-object;
The gaming machine according to any one of means B-1 to B-13, wherein the masking is applied only to (the base object of the unfinished object of) the sub-object.

According to the means B-14, since the main object is not masked, for example, even if the main object is displayed in a state in which not all customization items have been customized yet (incomplete object stage), masking is not required. will no longer be taken. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which masking is applied to an unfinished main object, which may lead to a deterioration in design and a decrease in interest due to it, and regardless of the progress of customization, can be fully entertained in the manner of the main object.

On the other hand, sub-objects that are customized in the same manner as the main object will be masked corresponding to the parts that have not been customized. Therefore, even if the main object is not masked, the progress of customization of the main object can be reliably grasped by visually recognizing the sub-object.

It is also possible to say that "the base object of the sub-object is silhouetted, and the details of the inside of the base object of the main object are drawn". Furthermore, since there are multiple customization patterns, the ``base object of the sub-object'' may be a ``simplified form of the completed object''. Examples include a deformed one, a reduced one, or a combination of these. A character such as a person, animal, or anthropomorphic object may be adopted as the "base object", and a costume of the character, a tool used by the character, a vehicle, a background, etc. may be adopted as the "customized object". . In addition, as "base objects", vehicles used by predetermined characters, vehicles such as airplanes, bases for objects (cakes, weapons, etc.) produced by characters, backgrounds such as living spaces and zoos are adopted, and "customized objects" are used. As such, configuration parts such as vehicles and weapons, decorations, various objects installed in the background, and the like may be adopted.

In addition, both the main object and the sub-objects may be displayed at the same time, and a configuration may be adopted in which the progress of customization can be checked with the sub-objects while enjoying the aspect of the main object. A configuration in which only one of the objects is displayed, customization is progressed while only the sub-objects are displayed, and customization is reflected when the main object is displayed. A configuration may be adopted in which the player enjoys a performance using the main object.

Means B-15. In a gaming machine capable of executing a mobile-linked game in which information is exchanged with a server via a mobile communication terminal carried by a player,
an operation means that can be operated by a player;
player identification information storage means for storing player information input by a player's operation of the operation means when starting a mobile-linked game;
a game information storage means capable of accumulating and storing game information, which is information relating to a lottery to be performed at the time of the game;
an information output means capable of outputting the game information accumulated and stored in the game information storage means in a manner that can be acquired or identified by the portable communication terminal when the mobile-linked game is terminated;
By storing the player information in the player identification information storage means, a process corresponding to the player information is performed, and the game information related to the current game is accumulated and stored in the game information storage means. There is
Means B-1 to B-14, wherein when the information output means outputs the game information accumulated and stored in the game information storage means, the information relating to the continuously displayed object is also output. The gaming machine according to any one of

According to means B-15, the information about the continuously displayed object in the current game can be handed over to the next game (mobile-linked game). As a result, it is possible to overdo the current game, such as a configuration in which unless a continuous display object is completed in one game, the performance using the completed continuous display object can only be seen. It is possible to increase the enjoyment of the next game while suppressing the situation such as being put away. Therefore, it is possible to improve the convenience, and it is possible to make the effect using the continuously displayed object more diverse and profound. In addition, even if you do not overdo it in a single game, you can accumulate customizations over several days and enjoy them.

It should be noted that the configuration may be such that only completed objects can be handed over, or both completed objects and unfinished objects can be handed over. Also, the function of customizing the continuously displayed object (or the function of selecting customization, etc.) may be enabled only when the mobile-linked game is being executed. In this case, it is possible to increase the willingness to participate in the mobile-linked game.

In addition, regarding game machines that can customize character costumes and various sound effects according to the points obtained by playing mobile-linked games, basically various customizations are made on the web page of the server. It is designed to make settings related to, and various customization settings cannot be made on gaming machines. For this reason, even if it becomes possible to perform new customizations with the points obtained in this mobile-linked game, in order to reflect such customizations, it is necessary to end the current mobile-linked game and restart the mobile-linked game. A series of operations such as starting a game are required.

On the other hand, as in the means B-4 and B-5, by adopting a configuration in which the player can make various settings related to the customization of continuously displayed objects in the gaming machine, the mobile-linked game does not have to be terminated once. can also reflect customization. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the convenience of customization and make it possible to enjoy the customization function more easily (become more accessible).

Means B-16. unfinished customization storage means for storing customization contents of each of the customization items of the unfinished object;
Completed customization storage means for storing the contents of customization of each of the customization items of the completed object for which customization has been completed;
completed object accumulation storage means for accumulating and storing customized contents of each customization item of the completed object for which customization has been completed;
When all the customization items of the incomplete object are customized, the contents of the customization of each customization item can be stored in the completed customization storage means, and
at least when the storage contents of the incomplete customization storage means are erased, the customization contents of each customization item of the incomplete object are stored in the completed object accumulation storage means;
The information stored in the completed object accumulation storage means is not erased even if the stored contents of the completed customization storage means are erased,
Means B- characterized in that, when the game information accumulated and stored in the game information storage means is output by the information output means, the information stored in the completed object accumulation and storage means is also output. 15. The gaming machine according to 15.

According to the means B-16, even if a completed object that is finally completed (with the first combination) by customizing the unfinished object bit by bit is erased in the flow of the game, the completed object can be completed. Information about what has been done remains in the memory (completed object storage means) and is sent to the server via the portable communication terminal carried by the player. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the feeling of disappearance caused by easily erasing a completed object that has been completed with much effort.

In addition, in the case where completed objects are accumulated in a game machine without being erased, for example, the display mode of the completed objects may become disordered, the display processing may become relatively difficult, or the completed objects may There are concerns that it will take time to select the one to use for the production from among them, the rhythm of the production will deteriorate, and the storage capacity will increase, but by erasing it moderately , can dispel such concerns. Naturally, since the completion of the completed object remains in memory, it is possible to erase the completed object without hesitation.

It should be noted that an announcement may be displayed to explain the content of this means to the player. For example, you can check the completed objects you got today by accessing the homepage (server) after finishing the (mobile-linked) game. You can select a completed object to be used on the actual machine (gaming machine) and use it for effects, etc." or the like may be displayed. Also, the announcement display is preferably displayed when the completed object is erased. In this case, the player can clearly recognize how the erased completed object will be treated, and can avoid a situation in which he or she cannot concentrate on the game because of this.

The stored contents of the completed object may be erased when an effect using the completed object is executed, or when an input indicating erasure is performed by the player's operation.

Means B-17. a customization lottery random number generation means used for a customization lottery to decide whether or not to grant an opportunity to customize a predetermined customization item of the unfinished object;
customized winning value storage means for storing a value to be won in the customized lottery among the values that can be generated by the customized random number counter;
an item lottery random number generation means used in an item lottery for determining a customization item to be customized from among the plurality of customization items;
Corresponding item storage means for storing a correspondence relationship between a value that can be generated by the item lottery random number generation means and the customization item;
Pattern random number generating means used for pattern lottery for determining the customization pattern;
Corresponding pattern storage means for storing a correspondence relationship between a value that can be generated by the pattern random number generation means and the customization pattern;
a non-mobile interlocking pattern table that stores a correspondence relationship between a value that can be generated by the pattern random number generating means and a pattern of suggestive effect suggesting the degree of expectation of winning,
In the mobile-linked game state in which the player information is stored in the player identification information storage means, if the customization lottery is won, the value of the item lottery random number generation means and the pattern random number acquiring the value of the generating means, determining the customization item by referring to the corresponding item storage means, and determining the customization pattern by referring to the corresponding pattern storage means, thereby determining the content of the customization;
In a non-mobile-linked game state in which the player information is not stored in the player identification information storage means, if the customization lottery wins, the value of the pattern random number generation means is obtained, The gaming machine according to means B-15 or B-16, wherein the pattern of the suggestive effect is determined by referring to a mobile interlocking pattern table.

According to the means B-17, since the customization function is exhibited only in the mobile-linked game state, it is possible to improve the willingness to participate in the mobile-linked game. In addition, even in the non-mobile-linked game state, a customization lottery is performed in the same manner as in the mobile-linked game state, and when the customization lottery is won, the customization is not performed, but a suggestive effect is performed. Furthermore, when determining the pattern of the suggestive effect, the value of the pattern random number generation means that was also used when determining the customized pattern is obtained, and the pattern is determined based on this value. Therefore, it is possible to provide a player who is not playing a mobile-linked game with a suggestive effect. Furthermore, by making the random number generation means used for control and pattern determination related to whether or not such suggestive effects are common with the random number generation means used for control and customization pattern determination related to customization during mobile-linked games, , simplification of control, reduction of storage area, and the like can be achieved.

Means B-18. The variable display means is configured to be capable of executing a specific effect in which the completed object customized by the player is displayed in a specific manner,
There are a plurality of types of the specific effect, and depending on the combination of the type of the specific effect and the completed object displayed during the specific effect, the winning expectation for the occurrence of the special game state is different. configured,
When the specific effect is performed, the type of the specific effect is determined based on the customization pattern of the completed car displayed in the specific effect and the winning expectation for the occurrence of the special game state. The gaming machine according to either means B-1 or B-17, characterized by:

According to the means B-18, by storing the player information in the player specifying information storage means and playing a mobile-linked game, the continuously displayed object customized by the player himself is used as the specified object for the specified effect (appearance ). Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance. Further, in the specific effect, the type of the specific effect is selected according to the completed object selected by the player and the winning expectation. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the combination of the completed object and the type of the specific effect is greatly different from the winning expectation.

Means B-19. Provided with condition establishment detection means for detecting that a predetermined condition is established,
The main control means is
Win/No random number generation means used for lottery to determine whether or not to generate the special game state;
Winning value storage means for storing a predetermined value among the values that can be generated by the success/failure random number generation means as a value for winning the lottery;
a reserved storage area having a plurality of reserved areas capable of storing variable information used for determining the content of the variable display in the variable display means;
a determination value extraction process for extracting the value of the success/failure random number generation means based on the detection of the condition satisfaction detection means;
a discrimination value storage process of storing the value of the success/failure random number generation means extracted in the discrimination value extraction process in one of the reserved storage areas;
a first success/failure determination process for determining whether or not the value of the success/failure random number generation means extracted in the determination value extraction process matches the value stored in the winning value storage means;
a result storage process for storing the result of the first propriety determination process;
(A specific effect determination process for determining whether or not to execute a continuous effect with a plurality of variable displays based on the result of the first propriety determination process)
Prior to execution of the variable display by the variable display means, it is determined whether or not the value of the win/fail random number generation means as the variable information corresponding to the variable display matches the value stored in the winning value storage means. a second right/wrong determination process for determining whether or not to generate a special game state based on the information;
A configuration capable of executing a variable display setting process for setting a variable display based on the result of the second propriety determination process,
customization selection means capable of selecting the customization item and the customization pattern when the first propriety determination process is performed;
the customization reflection means for reflecting the contents of the customization selected by the customization selection means on the incomplete object;
a selected customization display means capable of displaying the contents of the customization selected by the customization selection means;
The selection customization display means performs the first right/wrong determination processing corresponding to the change information newly stored in the empty reservation area in a state where the change information is stored in the reservation area of the reservation storage area. at a stage before starting the variable display corresponding to the variable information newly reserved in the reserve area, suggesting information indicating the contents of the customization selected by the customization selection means when According to any one of means B-1 to B-18, it is configured so as to be able to be displayed in association with the change display corresponding to the change information newly reserved in the reserve area. game machine.

According to the means B-19, the holding storage area has a plurality of holding areas, and can store the values of the success/failure random number generation means and the like related to the setting of the variable display for a plurality of times. It will be done. Further, in this means, when the value of the success/failure random number generating means is stored in the reserved storage area, the success or failure of the lottery can be grasped, and the customization selection means can select the customization item and the customization pattern. Therefore, at the stage where the variable display is suspended, it is possible to give an opportunity for customization and to teach the player the details of the customization. Therefore, for example, when a variable display is already suspended and a new variable display is suspended, the stage before the newly suspended variable display is executed, that is, before the variable display is suspended When the previously suspended variable display is being performed, it is possible to teach the content of the customization to be given based on the newly suspended variable display. In this case, the player can prepare for the contents of the customized customization (preparation, operation, etc.) with plenty of time to spare. Therefore, for example, when the player is requested to perform a predetermined operation, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the operation is not completed in time due to the short input period. In addition, with this configuration, it is not necessary to forcibly lengthen the variable time in order to secure an extra operation input period. It is possible to suppress the situation that invites

The selection customization display means may be configured by variable display means, or may be configured by other predetermined display means. Further, corresponding to the above means B-2, "the mode of the suggested information displayed in the selected customization display means is the incomplete object corresponding to the customization item to which the customization pattern indicated by the suggested information belongs. (the background of the suggestive information has the same pattern) with the masking pattern applied to the ". For example, if customization items a to d are associated with blue, b with red, c with green, and d with yellow, the masking of an unfinished object is performed with the colors associated with the corresponding customization items. and at least a part of the suggestive information (for example, the shape of the customization item displayed on the front side of the background) is composed of the color associated with the corresponding customization item. good.

Further, in correspondence with B-3 above, "reserved pattern for storing the customized pattern selected by the customization selection means in correspondence with the variation information stored in the reserved area of the reserved storage area storage means, wherein, when selecting a customization pattern, the customization selection means refers to the customization progress storage means and the pending pattern storage means, and selects the customization progress storage means and the pending pattern storage means; selection of a customized pattern different from the stored contents". That is, according to this means B-19, the right to customize is reserved as well as the change information. Therefore, in order to prevent the same customization pattern from being selected continuously, it is necessary to refer to both the customization progress storage means and the pending pattern storage means.

Means B-20. The display control means is configured to change the form of the suggestive information displayed by the selective customization display means between when the corresponding variable information is stored in the holding area and when it is displayed as a variable display. is,
Equipped with operation means that can be operated by the player,
The gaming machine according to means B-19, wherein the display control means determines whether or not to change the mode of the suggestive information based on information input by operating the operation means.

According to means B-20, even after the suggestive information displayed by the selective customization display means is once displayed in a predetermined form, the form may change before the corresponding variable display is executed. For this reason, it is possible to diversify the effects, such as stepping up the degree of expectation for the occurrence of the special game state suggested by the change in the mode of the suggestion information.

In addition, there is a possibility that the suggestive information may change its form while it is being displayed by the selected customization display means until the corresponding variable information is displayed in a variable manner. For this reason, the change in the suggestive information may cause a loss of interest for the player who desires the appearance of the customization of the content indicated by the suggestive information before the mode change. In this regard, this means B-20 is configured to be able to determine whether or not to change the mode of suggestive information based on an operation input by the player. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the above problems, and to proceed with customization while suppressing the occurrence of stress.

Incidentally, the aspect of the suggestive information may be determined by sorting based on the result of the first right/wrong determination process. In other words, by visually recognizing the mode of the suggestive information, it is possible to enjoy guessing, for example, how much the player can expect the occurrence of the special game state in the variable display of that round. In addition, the type of suggestive information and the presence or absence of a change in mode are determined at the time when the variation information is withheld. (Once a pattern different from the determined pattern is derived, and later changed to the determined pattern), or based on the fluctuation information retained later, It may be configured to change the mode of suggestive information corresponding to the already reserved variable information.

Means B-21. a customization opportunity granting means for determining whether to grant a customization opportunity to the unfinished object;
The customization opportunity provision means determines whether or not to provide the customization opportunity according to the result of the first propriety determination process,
The customization selection means is configured to determine the type of customization according to the result of the first propriety determination process,
Based on the latest result of the first right/wrong determination process performed in a state where the variation information including the result of the first right/wrong determination process is stored in the reserved area of the reserved storage area, the customization opportunity providing means When it is decided to grant the customization opportunity, at the stage when the latest first propriety determination process is performed, the latest first 1. The gaming machine according to means B-20, wherein the customization determined by the customization selection means can be executed based on the result of the judgment process.

According to the means B-21, when it is decided to execute customization corresponding to the change information that has been reserved later for the reserved area of the reserved storage area, the change display corresponding to the already reserved change information is displayed. It is configured so that customization can be performed (in retrofit) in In this case, it is possible to diversify effects related to customization (for example, it is possible to perform continuous advance notice such as a step-up effect related to customization over a plurality of continuous variable displays), improve convenience, and the like. Concretely explaining the point of convenience, the execution of customization and the type of customization are determined based on the result of the first success/failure determination process, in other words, according to the expected degree of occurrence of the special game state. It will happen. Therefore, in the variable display for teaching the occurrence of the special game state, if the effect related to customization is also derived, the time spent on the effect for teaching whether the special game state will occur will be shortened, or the variable time will be shortened. is too long and the production balance is deteriorated.

In this respect, in the variable display that is performed before the variable display that teaches the occurrence of the special game state, customization that is to be performed based on the occurrence of the special game state is performed. The effects and customization for teaching the occurrence of the special game state can be derived with a relatively sufficient margin. Further, by associating the degree of expectation for the occurrence of the special game state with the type of customization, when the predetermined customization is derived, the special game state is generated in the subsequent suspended variable display. So, you can raise your expectations. In particular, by applying the above configuration in a state in which the time (variation time) for the variable display of the identification information is set relatively short (shortened time state), such an effect can be exhibited more remarkably. .

Means B-22. the unfinished object is composed of a base object and a customized object that is displayed incidentally to the base object as a result of the customization;
The masking is applied to a part of the base object of the sub-object that has not yet been customized by the customization object,
a plurality of types of the base object exist, and the customization object is changed according to the change of the base object;
When it is decided to change the base object, the change of the base object is awaited until the variable display corresponding to the suggestive information that has already been displayed is completed, and with regard to the suggestive information, The gaming machine according to any one of means B-19 to B-21, wherein one corresponding to the type of the base object after change is derived.

According to means B-22, in a configuration in which a customization pattern (customization object) to be customized is displayed in advance, the base object is changed immediately before the long-awaited customization pattern is displayed. It is possible to avoid a situation in which the customization object is also changed accordingly.

According to this means, when the customized object corresponding to the post-change base object is displayed as the suggestive information before the base object is changed, it is possible to predict in advance that the base object will be changed. can grasp. Using such a phenomenon, when the change of the base object is associated with the expectation of winning, etc., or when performing a strange effect such that the base object is supposed to be changed but is not changed, the performance can be improved. can be achieved.

Means B-23. a proximity detection means capable of detecting the proximity or contact of an object to a plurality of locations of the variable display means (displaying various information related to the selection of the customization function) as different information;
The gaming machine according to any one of means B-1 to B-22, wherein selection information related to the customization can be inputted by the player based on the detection information of the proximity detection means.

According to the means B-23, for example, when selecting one of the plurality of completed objects, the selection operation is performed by touching one of the plurality of completed objects displayed on the variable display means. can make the operation very easy to understand. Therefore, it is possible to avoid situations such as time running out due to confusion with such an operation, and game tempo becoming worse by setting a relatively long time for such an operation.

C. There is a pachinko machine as a kind of game machine. In a pachinko machine, when a game ball launched by a shooting means enters a starting ball entry means provided on a game board, a lottery is conducted as to whether or not a winning state is generated, and the lottery is determined by the variable display means. A variable display is provided to teach the results (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-271480).

In addition, it is known that in a pachinko machine, the winning probability in a lottery for whether or not to generate a jackpot state is changed, or the ease with which a ball is entered into the starting ball entry means is changed to add excitement to the game. It is

However, there are cases where the opportunity to change the winning probability or change the ease of entering the starting ball entry means does not come easily, and in that case, there is a concern that the game will become monotonous. be.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing monotony.

Means C-1. Main control means for performing a lottery for whether or not to generate a special game state advantageous to the player based on a predetermined opportunity, and for generating the special game state based on the result of the lottery;
variable display means capable of variably displaying identification information;
A gaming machine comprising display control means for variably displaying the identification information on the variable display means, and for stopping display of the identification information after a predetermined period of time based on the result of the lottery,
The display control means is configured to be capable of deriving a continuous display object that can be displayed continuously in the plurality of times of the variable display on the variable display means,
Regarding the continuous display object,
Along with setting multiple customizable items,
A plurality of patterns are prepared for the customization pattern of each customization item,
The continuously displayed objects include a completed object in which all of the plurality of customization items have been customized, and an incomplete object in which the customization items that have not yet been customized exist up to the completion object. hand,
customization selection means for selecting the customization item and the customization pattern;
customization reflection means for reflecting the customization pattern selected by the customization selection means on the incomplete object;
The customization selection means includes:
Pattern random number generating means used for pattern lottery for determining the customization pattern;
Corresponding pattern storage means for storing a correspondence relationship between a value that can be generated by the pattern random number generation means and the customization pattern,
The corresponding pattern storage means is
a first pattern storage means in which a specific customized pattern is not selected or is difficult to be selected;
a second pattern storage means in which the specific customized pattern is more likely to be selected than in the first pattern storage means;
When selecting a customization pattern by the customization selection means,
a first pattern selection state in which the first pattern storage means is referenced (or is likely to be referenced) and the second pattern storage means is not referenced (or is difficult to be referenced);
Customized pattern selection that causes a state change to a second pattern selection state in which the second pattern storage means is referred (or is easily referred to) and the first pattern storage means is not referred (or is difficult to be referred to). A gaming machine comprising state switching means.

According to the means C-1, by providing a state in which a specific customization pattern is likely to be provided (for example, a pattern high probability state in which a rare customization pattern is provided with a high probability as a specific customization pattern, etc.), the game value is increased. It is possible to arouse interest in the game in a dimension different from the factors related to increase and decrease, and to increase opportunities for presentation. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the feeling of monotony during the game, and to improve the willingness to play the game.

Note that the conditions for the state change between the first pattern selection state and the second pattern selection state can be appropriately set for each model. Also, a pattern accuracy teaching means for teaching the existence of the second pattern selection state to the player may be provided. By the pattern accuracy teaching means, for example, what kind of state the second pattern selection state is, what kind of conditions must be satisfied to shift to the second pattern selection state, etc. Teaching that the 2-pattern selection state is in progress or the like may be performed. In this case, the existence of the second pattern selection state can be actively appealed to the player.

Means C-2. There is a first probability state in which the special game state is won in the win-or-fail lottery with a predetermined probability, and a second probability state in which the special game state is won in the win-fail lottery with a higher probability than the first probability state. ,
The gaming machine according to means C-1, wherein the state change between the first pattern selection state and the second pattern selection state can occur at least in the first probability state.

In general, the player does not finish the game in the second probability state where it is easy to win the special game state, but finishes the game in the first probability state. That is, the player who intends to start a game selects a gaming machine to play from among the gaming machines in the first probability state.

Therefore, according to this means C-2, at least in the first probability state, the transition is made to the second pattern selection state in which a specific customization pattern is likely to be given. For this reason, it is possible to provide a player who is interested in customization with an opportunity to start a game, assuming that a particular customization pattern is likely to be provided or may be in such a state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to play, and to improve the operation rate of the gaming machine.

Means C-3-a. The gaming machine according to means C-2, further comprising a rare pattern high-probability state teaching means for teaching that the second pattern is selected.

According to the means C-3-a, the player can confirm whether or not the second pattern is selected by confirming the rare pattern high-probability state teaching means. The action and effect of are exhibited more reliably.

Means C-3-b. The rare pattern high-probability state teaching means is configured to be able to teach that the second pattern is selected even in a state where the variable display means does not display the identification information. The gaming machine according to means C-3-a.

If the player is not playing a game, the variable display means does not variably display the identification state. In other words, a player who is going to start a game selects a game machine to play from among the game machines that are not displaying the identification information.

Therefore, according to this means C-3-b, even in a state in which the variable display means does not variably display the identification information, the player is notified that the second pattern selection state is such that a specific customization pattern is likely to be given. is configured to be recognizable. Therefore, it is possible to more reliably give a player who is interested in customization an opportunity to start a game, assuming that a particular customization pattern is likely to be given. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's desire to play the game, and the effect of improving the operating rate of the gaming machine can be further achieved.

Means C-3-c. In a configuration in which a specific display (for example, a demonstration screen display as an energy-saving mode) is derived on the variable display means when a predetermined time has elapsed since the variable display of the identification information on the variable display means ceased,
The rare pattern high probability state teaching means can teach that the second pattern selection state is at least during the variable display of the identification information on the variable display means,
The gaming machine according to means C-3-a is configured not to teach the second pattern selection state during the specific display.

According to the means C-3-c, it is not possible to confirm whether or not the second pattern is selected after the predetermined time has elapsed after the end of the variable display. Therefore, it is possible to increase the possibility that a player who is interested in customization executes the variable display at least once.

Means C-4. The means C-1 to C-C, wherein the customized pattern selection state switching means executes the state change to the second pattern selection state based on the number of times the variable display means performs the variable display of the identification information. -3 the game machine according to any one of

According to the means C-4, since the number of executions of the variable display (the number of variations) is the trigger for the state change to the second pattern selection state, the player is more aware of when the trigger for the state change will come. can be made easier. Therefore, a player who wants to play a game in the second pattern selection state can use the number of fluctuations as a guideline, and as a result, an effect of promoting the operation of the gaming machine can be expected. It also makes it easier to explain the phenomenon corresponding to the second pattern selection state (the reason why the specific customization pattern was selected, and the effect when the effect is set exclusively for the second pattern selection state). make the explanation easier to understand). Further, as the game progresses, the state change opportunity is approached with certainty, so an added value can be added to the progress of the game. It should be noted that the number of executions of the variable display that triggers the state change to the second pattern selection state can be appropriately set for each model of the game machine.

It should be noted that a predetermined display means (variable display means may also be used) may be configured to display the remaining number of times of variable display until the state changes to the second pattern selection state. Furthermore, if an upper limit is set for the number of times of variation for the period of the second pattern selection state, the number of remaining variation display times until the second pattern selection state ends may be displayed.

Means C-5. The pattern selection state switching means executes the state change to the second pattern selection state based on the end of the special game state or the end of the fake state of the special game state. C- The gaming machine according to any one of 1 to C-4.

According to the means C-5, even if the special game state is over, by shifting to the second pattern selection state, the disappointment and significant decrease in the motivation to play due to the special game state being over are reduced. can do. As the special game state, the game value can be expected to increase, or the game can be played while the game value owned by the player remains almost the same, or the probability of occurrence of such a state is increased. and the like, and one or more of these may be set as the trigger for transition to the second pattern selection state. Further, for example, "the pattern selection state switching means executes the state change to the second pattern selection state based on the end of the special game state or the end of the fake state of the special game state". good too.

Means C-6. The pattern selection state switching means is
Means C-1 to C characterized by executing the state change to the second pattern selection state when winning a pattern high-probability lottery for determining whether to change the state to the second pattern selection state. -5 the gaming machine according to any one of the above.

According to the means C-6, winning the pattern high-probability lottery triggers the state change to the second pattern selection state, so the game is played while always expecting the state change to the second pattern selection state. can be performed, and an effect related to the state change to the second pattern selection state can be performed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the feeling of monotony during the game.

Means C-7. a customization opportunity granting means for determining whether to grant a customization opportunity to the unfinished object;
a configuration in which the customization pattern selected by the customization selection means is reflected in the unfinished object when the customization opportunity giving means determines to give the unfinished object an opportunity to customize,
The customization opportunity granting means includes:
a customization lottery random number generation means used for a customization lottery to determine whether or not to give the opportunity to customize the unfinished object;
customized winning value storage means for storing a predetermined value among values that can be generated by the customized lottery random number generating means as a value for winning in the customized lottery;
The customized winning value storage means includes first customized winning value storage means and second customized winning value storage means having a larger number of winning values in the customized lottery than the first customized winning value storage means. ,
At the time of the customization lottery by the customization opportunity granting means,
a first winning value storage selection state in which the first customized winning value storage means is referred to;
Any one of means C-1 to C-6, further comprising customized winning state switching means for changing the state between the second customized winning value storage means and a second winning value storage selection state to which the second customized winning value storage means is referred. The game machine described.

According to the means C-7, by providing the second winning value storage selection state (customization high probability state) in which the chance of customizing the unfinished object is likely to come, the game can be played in a different dimension from the factors related to the increase or decrease of the game value. can arouse the interest of Therefore, it is possible to suppress the feeling of monotony during the game, and to improve the willingness to play the game. Incidentally, the conditions for changing the state between the first winning value storage selection state and the second winning value storage selection state can be appropriately set for each model.

Means C-8. The customized winning state switching means executes the state change to the second winning value storage selection state based on the number of execution times of the variable display of the identification information in the variable display means. The game machine described.

According to the means C-8, since the number of executions of the variable display (the number of fluctuations) triggers the state change to the second winning value storage selection state, it is easy to recognize when the opportunity for the state change will come. can do. Therefore, it is possible for a player who desires to play a game in the second winning value storage selection state to use the number of times of variation as a guideline and to make it easier to play. Further, as the game progresses, the state change opportunity is approached with certainty, so an added value can be added to the progress of the game.

Means C-9. The gaming machine according to means C-7 or C-8, wherein the customized winning state switching means executes the state change to the second winning value storage selection state based on the end of the special game state. .

According to the means C-9, even if the special game state is over, by shifting to the second winning value storage selection state, disappointment due to the end of the special game state, significant decrease in motivation to play, etc. can be reduced. As the special game state, the game value can be expected to increase, or the game can be played while the game value owned by the player remains almost the same, or the probability of occurrence of such a state is increased. and the like.

Means C-10. The customized winning state switching means includes:
Customized high-probability lottery random number generation means used for customized high-probability lottery for determining whether to change the state to the second winning value storage selection state;
customized high-probability lottery value storage means for storing a predetermined value among values that can be generated by the customized high-probability lottery random number generation means as a value for winning in the customized high-probability lottery,
The gaming machine according to any one of means C-7 to C-9, wherein the state change to the second winning value storage selection state is executed based on winning in the customized high-probability lottery.

According to the means C-10, winning in the customized high-probability lottery triggers the state change to the second winning value storage selection state, so it is difficult to recognize when the state change will occur. can do. Therefore, it is possible to play the game while always expecting the state change to the second winning value storage selection state, and to perform an effect related to the state change to the second winning value storage selection state. As a result, it is possible to suppress the feeling of monotony during the game. It should be noted that the customizing high-accuracy lottery may be performed each time the identification information is variably displayed on the variable display means.

Means C-11. The unfinished object is configured such that a portion of the completed object is masked in a manner different from the already customized portion corresponding to the customization item that has not yet been customized. The gaming machine according to any one of means C-1 to C-10, characterized by:

According to means C-11, by confirming the form of the unfinished object, which is the form of a continuous display object in which customization items that have not yet been customized exist among the plurality of customization items, the part that has not yet been customized (customization items) exist (there is room for further customization) at a glance. Therefore, it is possible to easily and surely grasp how far the customization of the continuously displayed object can be performed, and furthermore, it is possible to relatively smoothly find out how to enjoy the customization function by seeing the entire contents of the customization function. As a result, it is possible to fully utilize the customization function, and to fully enjoy the performance using the continuously displayed object. Furthermore, by increasing interest in the customization function, it is possible to improve the willingness to play the game.

In addition, it is possible to effectively and clearly recognize that there are parts that have not been customized yet by masking incomplete objects, so separate explanations of customization functions need not be carefully and lengthy. finish. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the situation that the explanation of the customization function slows down the flow of the presentation (in particular, it takes unnecessary time for the player who has already grasped it), and the game progresses relatively smoothly. can be done.

Means C-12. The game according to means C-11, wherein the masking applied to the unfinished object corresponding to each customization item is configured to have a pattern different from at least the adjacent masking. machine.

According to means C-12, when there is a possibility that masking corresponding to a plurality of customizing items are connected (continuously) or close to each other, the masking corresponds to one customizing item. This makes it possible to more reliably avoid situations in which it is difficult to determine whether a customizable item corresponds to a customizable item or whether a plurality of customizable items are supported. Therefore, masking areas corresponding to a plurality of customization items can be set relatively freely, and by checking the state of the unfinished object, it is possible to find out how many uncustomized parts (customization items) remain. It is possible to grasp at a glance whether Therefore, by more effectively deriving more information about the customization function, the player can make decisions about the customization function quickly and reliably, and fully enjoy the customization process while proceeding with the game. can do.

Note that the “different patterns” of masking include those with different colors, patterns, or combinations thereof. Also, even if the masking areas are separated or lines are drawn at the borders of the masking areas, by making the masking patterns of the adjacent masking areas different, it is easier and faster to change the customization items that have not yet been customized. Able to distinguish between numbers and types.

Means C-13. The continuous display object includes a main object and a sub-object (a simplified form of the main object),
The main object and the sub-object are
a base object that enables identification of an overview of the completed object;
a customization object that is set corresponding to each of the customization items and that is displayed in a portion of the base object that corresponds to the customization item when the customization is performed;
when the customized object is reflected in the continuously displayed object, it is reflected in both the main object and the sub-object;
The gaming machine according to means C-11 or C-12, wherein the masking is applied only to (the base object of) the incomplete object of the sub-object.

According to the means C-13, since the main object is not masked, for example, even if the main object is displayed in a state in which not all customization items have been customized yet (incomplete object stage), masking is not required. will no longer be taken. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which masking is applied to an unfinished main object, which may lead to a deterioration in design and a decrease in interest due to it, and regardless of the progress of customization, can be fully entertained in the manner of the main object.

On the other hand, sub-objects that are customized in the same manner as the main object will be masked corresponding to the parts that have not been customized. Therefore, even if the main object is not masked, the progress of customization of the main object can be reliably grasped by visually recognizing the sub-object.

Means C-14. customization progress storage means for storing information relating to customization of the unfinished object displayed on the variable display means;
customization selection means for selecting the customization item and the customization pattern;
customization reflection means for reflecting the customization pattern selected by the customization selection means on the incomplete object;
The customization selection means refers to the customization progress storage means when selecting the customization item and the customization pattern (avoids customization that duplicates the contents stored in the customization progress storage means). The gaming machine according to any one of means C-11 to C-13.

According to the means C-14, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the player feels uncomfortable due to the same customization contents being selected in quick succession, so that the player can enjoy the customization function more.

In addition, after selecting the customization item and the customization pattern, the customization selection means refers to the customization progress storage means so that the content of the customization selected this time overlaps with the storage content of the customization progress storage means. re-selection of the customization item when it is determined that the customization will be performed. That is, assuming that the specific customization pattern of means C-1 is a rare customization pattern, even if the content of customization selected in the rare pattern high probability state overlaps, the specific customization pattern may be replaced by another customization pattern. If it is changed to a pattern (a general customization pattern that is difficult to select or not selected in the rare pattern high probability state), it will cause a decrease in interest as to why a general customization pattern is selected even though it is a rare pattern high probability state. There is concern that On the other hand, in this example, by changing the customization item without changing the customization pattern, duplication can be avoided, so that such a situation can be avoided.

Means C-15. an operation means that can be operated by a player;
customization opportunity granting means for determining whether to grant a customization opportunity to the unfinished object;
customization selection means for selecting the customization item and the customization pattern;
customization reflection means for reflecting the customization pattern selected by the customization selection means on the incomplete object;
When the customization opportunity granting means determines to grant the customization opportunity to the unfinished object, the part of the unfinished object corresponding to the customization item selected by the customization selection means is given the A configuration in which the customization pattern selected by the customization selection means is reflected,
The customization reflection means is configured to be able to determine whether or not to reflect the customization pattern of the customization item selected by the customization selection means on the unfinished object, based on the information input by operating the operation means. The gaming machine according to any one of means C-1 to C-14, characterized in that

According to the means C-15, although the gaming machine side selects the customization item and the customization pattern, the gaming machine side does not unilaterally customize the continuously displayed object (unfinished object), but rather selects the customization pattern. The player can decide whether or not to reflect it on the incomplete object. It is possible to reflect the player's individual tastes and the like in the customization of continuously displayed objects (not to reflect unfavorable customization patterns). Therefore, it is possible to avoid the frustration that the customization does not meet the player's expectations while suppressing the customizing function from becoming one-patterned. As a result, while diversifying the customization functions, it is possible to make the player more attached to the effect using the continuously displayed object, and to improve the desire to play the game.

In addition, as "input information by operating the operation means", information such as passwords that are input in advance to the game machine, including information such as the player's individual game history and various settings, and opportunities for customization were obtained. information that selects whether or not to execute customization in a case. In addition, when an opportunity for customization is given, an announcement is made one by one to ask the player whether or not to reflect the selected customization pattern, and each time the information input by the operation to the operation means is displayed. Alternatively, the player inputs the player's personal information to the gaming machine at the start of the game, and the customization reflection means selects and discards the personal information according to the personal information. It may be configured to make a selection. In addition, when reflecting the selected customization pattern or selecting whether or not to reflect the customization pattern on the continuously displayed object, masking corresponding to the customization item to which the customization pattern belongs is different from normal. A different mode (blinking, etc.) may be used.

Means C-16. an operation means that can be operated by a player;
customization selection means for selecting the customization item and the customization pattern;
customization reflection means for reflecting the customization pattern selected by the customization selection means on the incomplete object;
The customization selection means includes:
Pattern random number generating means used for pattern lottery for determining the customization pattern;
Corresponding pattern storage means for storing a correspondence relationship between a value that can be generated by the pattern random number generation means and the customization pattern,
A plurality of the corresponding pattern storage means are provided,
Means C-1 to C-C, wherein the customization selection means is configured to be able to determine the corresponding pattern storage means to be referred to when selecting a customization pattern based on input information by operating the operation means. -15.

According to the means C-16, the player's individual game history, various settings (preferences), etc. can be reflected in the customization of the continuously displayed object (selection of the customization pattern by the customization selection means). Therefore, it is possible to avoid the frustration that the customization does not meet the player's expectations while suppressing the customizing function from becoming one-patterned. As a result, while diversifying the customization functions, it is possible to make the player more attached to the effect using the continuously displayed object, and to improve the desire to play the game.

Means C-17. In a gaming machine capable of executing a mobile-linked game in which information is exchanged with a server via a mobile communication terminal carried by a player,
an operation means that can be operated by a player;
player identification information storage means for storing player information input by a player's operation of the operation means when starting a mobile-linked game;
a game information storage means capable of accumulating and storing game information, which is information relating to a lottery to be performed at the time of the game;
an information output means capable of outputting the game information accumulated and stored in the game information storage means in a manner that can be acquired or identified by the portable communication terminal when the mobile-linked game is terminated;
By storing the player information in the player identification information storage means, a process corresponding to the player information is performed, and the game information related to the current game is accumulated and stored in the game information storage means. There is
Means C-1 to C-16, wherein when the information output means outputs the game information accumulated and stored in the game information storage means, the information relating to the continuously displayed object is also output. The gaming machine according to any one of

According to the means C-17, the information about the continuously displayed objects in the current game can be handed over to the next game (mobile-linked game). As a result, it is possible to overdo the current game, such as a configuration in which unless a continuous display object is completed in one game, the performance using the completed continuous display object can only be seen. It is possible to increase the enjoyment of the next game while suppressing the situation such as being put away. Therefore, it is possible to improve the convenience, and it is possible to make the effect using the continuously displayed object more diverse and profound. In addition, even if you do not overdo it in a single game, you can accumulate customizations over several days and enjoy them.

It should be noted that the configuration may be such that only completed objects can be handed over, or both completed objects and unfinished objects can be handed over. Also, the function of customizing the continuously displayed object (or the function of selecting customization, etc.) may be enabled only when the mobile-linked game is being executed. In this case, it is possible to increase the willingness to participate in the mobile-linked game.

In addition, regarding game machines that can customize character costumes and various sound effects according to the points obtained by playing mobile-linked games, basically various customizations are made on the web page of the server. It is designed to make settings related to, and various customization settings cannot be made on gaming machines. For this reason, even if it becomes possible to perform new customizations with the points obtained in this mobile-linked game, in order to reflect such customizations, it is necessary to end the current mobile-linked game and restart the mobile-linked game. A series of operations such as starting a game are required.

On the other hand, as in the means C-15 and C-16, by adopting a configuration in which the player can make various settings related to the customization of continuously displayed objects on the gaming machine, the mobile-linked game does not need to be terminated once. can also reflect customization. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the convenience of customization and make it possible to enjoy the customization function more easily (become more accessible).

Means C-18. unfinished customization storage means for storing customization contents of each of the customization items of the unfinished object;
Completed customization storage means for storing the contents of customization of each of the customization items of the completed object for which customization has been completed;
completed object accumulation storage means for accumulating and storing customized contents of each customization item of the completed object for which customization has been completed;
When all the customization items of the incomplete object are customized, the contents of the customization of each customization item can be stored in the completed customization storage means, and
at least when the storage contents of the incomplete customization storage means are erased, the customization contents of each customization item of the incomplete object are stored in the completed object accumulation storage means;
The information stored in the completed object accumulation storage means is not erased even if the stored contents of the completed customization storage means are erased,
Means C- characterized in that, when the game information accumulated and stored in the game information storage means is output by the information output means, the information stored in the completed object accumulation and storage means is also output. 17. The gaming machine according to 17.

According to the means C-18, even if a completed object that is finally completed (with the first combination) by customizing the unfinished object bit by bit is erased due to the flow of the game, the completed object is completed. Information about what has been done remains in the memory (completed object storage means) and is sent to the server via the portable communication terminal carried by the player. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the feeling of disappearance caused by easily erasing a completed object that has been completed with much effort.

In addition, in the case where completed objects are accumulated in a game machine without being erased, for example, the display mode of the completed objects may become disordered, the display processing may become relatively difficult, or the completed objects may There are concerns that it will take time to select the one to use for the production from among them, the rhythm of the production will deteriorate, and the storage capacity will increase, but by erasing it moderately , can dispel such concerns. Naturally, since the completion of the completed object remains in memory, it is possible to erase the completed object without hesitation.

It should be noted that an announcement may be displayed to explain the content of this means to the player. For example, you can check the completed objects you got today by accessing the homepage (server) after finishing the (mobile-linked) game. You can select a completed object to be used on the actual machine (gaming machine) and use it for effects, etc." or the like may be displayed. Also, the announcement display is preferably displayed when the completed object is erased. In this case, the player can clearly recognize how the erased completed object will be treated, and can avoid a situation in which he or she cannot concentrate on the game because of this.

The stored contents of the completed object may be erased when an effect using the completed object is executed, or when an input indicating erasure is performed by the player's operation.

Means C-19. a customization lottery random number generation means used for a customization lottery to decide whether or not to grant an opportunity to customize a predetermined customization item of the unfinished object;
customized winning value storage means for storing a value to be won in the customized lottery among the values that can be generated by the customized random number counter;
an item lottery random number generation means used in an item lottery for determining a customization item to be customized from among the plurality of customization items;
Corresponding item storage means for storing a correspondence relationship between a value that can be generated by the item lottery random number generation means and the customization item;
Pattern random number generating means used for pattern lottery for determining the customization pattern;
Corresponding pattern storage means for storing a correspondence relationship between a value that can be generated by the pattern random number generation means and the customization pattern;
a non-mobile interlocking pattern table that stores a correspondence relationship between a value that can be generated by the pattern random number generating means and a pattern of suggestive effect suggesting the degree of expectation of winning,
In the mobile-linked game state in which the player information is stored in the player identification information storage means, if the customization lottery is won, the value of the item lottery random number generation means and the pattern random number acquiring the value of the generating means, determining the customization item by referring to the corresponding item storage means, and determining the customization pattern by referring to the corresponding pattern storage means, thereby determining the content of the customization;
In a non-mobile-linked game state in which the player information is not stored in the player identification information storage means, if the customization lottery wins, the value of the pattern random number generation means is obtained, The gaming machine according to means C-17 or C-18, wherein the pattern of the suggestive effect is determined by referring to a mobile interlocking pattern table.

According to the means C-19, since the customization function is exhibited only in the mobile-linked game state, it is possible to improve the willingness to participate in the mobile-linked game. In addition, even in the non-mobile-linked game state, a customization lottery is performed in the same manner as in the mobile-linked game state, and when the customization lottery is won, the customization is not performed, but a suggestive effect is performed. Furthermore, when determining the pattern of the suggestive effect, the value of the pattern random number generation means that was also used when determining the customized pattern is obtained, and the pattern is determined based on this value. Therefore, it is possible to provide a player who is not playing a mobile-linked game with a suggestive effect. Furthermore, by making the random number generation means used for control and pattern determination related to whether or not such suggestive effects are common with the random number generation means used for control and customization pattern determination related to customization during mobile-linked games, , simplification of control, reduction of storage area, and the like can be achieved.

Means C-20. The variable display means is configured to be capable of executing a specific effect in which the completed object customized by the player is displayed in a specific manner,
There are a plurality of types of the specific effect, and depending on the combination of the type of the specific effect and the completed object displayed during the specific effect, the winning expectation for the occurrence of the special game state is different. configured,
When the specific effect is performed, the type of the specific effect is determined based on the customization pattern of the completed car displayed in the specific effect and the winning expectation for the occurrence of the special game state. The gaming machine according to either means C-1 or C-19, characterized by:

According to the means C-20, by storing player information in the player specifying information storage means and playing a mobile-linked game, the continuously displayed object customized by the player himself is used as a specified object for a specified effect (appearance ). Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance. Further, in the specific effect, the type of the specific effect is selected according to the completed object selected by the player and the winning expectation. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the combination of the completed object and the type of the specific effect is greatly different from the winning expectation.

Means C-21. Provided with condition establishment detection means for detecting that a predetermined condition is established,
The main control means is
Win/No random number generation means used for lottery to determine whether or not to generate the special game state;
Winning value storage means for storing a predetermined value among the values that can be generated by the success/failure random number generation means as a value for winning the lottery;
a reserved storage area having a plurality of reserved areas capable of storing variable information used for determining the content of the variable display in the variable display means;
a determination value extraction process for extracting the value of the success/failure random number generation means based on the detection of the condition satisfaction detection means;
a discrimination value storage process of storing the value of the success/failure random number generation means extracted in the discrimination value extraction process in one of the reserved storage areas;
a first success/failure determination process for determining whether or not the value of the success/failure random number generation means extracted in the determination value extraction process matches the value stored in the winning value storage means;
a result storage process for storing the result of the first propriety determination process;
(A specific effect determination process for determining whether or not to execute a continuous effect with a plurality of variable displays based on the result of the first propriety determination process)
Prior to execution of the variable display by the variable display means, it is determined whether or not the value of the win/fail random number generation means as the variable information corresponding to the variable display matches the value stored in the winning value storage means. a second right/wrong determination process for determining whether or not to generate a special game state based on the information;
A configuration capable of executing a variable display setting process for setting a variable display based on the result of the second propriety determination process,
customization selection means capable of selecting the customization item and the customization pattern when the first propriety determination process is performed;
the customization reflection means for reflecting the contents of the customization selected by the customization selection means on the incomplete object;
a selected customization display means capable of displaying the contents of the customization selected by the customization selection means;
The selection customization display means performs the first right/wrong determination processing corresponding to the change information newly stored in the empty reservation area in a state where the change information is stored in the reservation area of the reservation storage area. at a stage before starting the variable display corresponding to the variable information newly reserved in the reserve area, suggesting information indicating the contents of the customization selected by the customization selection means when Any one of means C-1 to C-20, characterized in that it is configured to be able to display in association with the change display corresponding to the change information newly reserved in the reserve area. game machine.

According to the means C-21, the pending storage area has a plurality of pending areas, and can store the values of the success/failure random number generating means and the like related to the setting of the variable display for a plurality of times, resulting in the variable display being pending. It will be done. Further, in this means, when the value of the success/failure random number generating means is stored in the reserved storage area, the success or failure of the lottery can be grasped, and the customization selection means can select the customization item and the customization pattern. Therefore, at the stage where the variable display is suspended, it is possible to give an opportunity for customization and to teach the player the details of the customization. Therefore, for example, when a variable display is already suspended and a new variable display is suspended, the stage before the newly suspended variable display is executed, that is, before the variable display is suspended When the previously suspended variable display is being performed, it is possible to teach the content of the customization to be given based on the newly suspended variable display. In this case, the player can prepare for the contents of the customized customization (preparation, operation, etc.) with plenty of time to spare. Therefore, for example, when the player is requested to perform a predetermined operation, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the operation is not completed in time due to the short input period. In addition, with this configuration, it is not necessary to forcibly lengthen the variable time in order to secure an extra operation input period. It is possible to suppress the situation that invites

The selection customization display means may be configured by variable display means, or may be configured by other predetermined display means. Further, corresponding to the above means B-2, "the mode of the suggested information displayed in the selected customization display means is the incomplete object corresponding to the customization item to which the customization pattern indicated by the suggested information belongs. (the background of the suggestive information has the same pattern) with the masking pattern applied to the ". For example, if customization items a to d are associated with blue, b with red, c with green, and d with yellow, the masking of an unfinished object is performed with the colors associated with the corresponding customization items. and at least a part of the suggestive information (for example, the shape of the customization item displayed on the front side of the background) is composed of the color associated with the corresponding customization item. good.

Further, in correspondence with the above C-14, "reserved pattern for storing the customized pattern selected by the customization selection means in correspondence with the variation information stored in the reserved area of the reserved storage area storage means, wherein, when selecting a customization pattern, the customization selection means refers to the customization progress storage means and the pending pattern storage means, and selects the customization progress storage means and the pending pattern storage means; selection of a customized pattern different from the stored contents". That is, according to this means C-21, the right to customize is also reserved along with the change information. Therefore, in order to prevent the same customization pattern from being selected continuously, it is necessary to refer to both the customization progress storage means and the pending pattern storage means.

Means C-22. The display control means is configured to change the form of the suggestive information displayed by the selective customization display means between when the corresponding variable information is stored in the holding area and when it is displayed as a variable display. is,
Equipped with operation means that can be operated by the player,
The gaming machine according to means C-21, wherein the display control means determines whether or not to change the mode of the suggestive information based on the information input by operating the operation means.

According to the means C-22, even after the suggestive information displayed by the selective customization display means is once displayed in a predetermined form, the form may change before the corresponding variable display is executed. For this reason, it is possible to diversify the effects, such as stepping up the degree of expectation for the occurrence of the special game state suggested by the change in the mode of the suggestion information.

In addition, there is a possibility that the suggestive information may change its form while it is being displayed by the selected customization display means until the corresponding variable information is displayed in a variable manner. For this reason, the change in the suggestive information may cause a loss of interest for the player who desires the appearance of the customization of the content indicated by the suggestive information before the mode change. In this regard, this means C-22 is configured to be able to determine whether or not to change the mode of the suggestive information based on an operation input by the player. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the above problems, and to proceed with customization while suppressing the occurrence of stress.

Incidentally, the aspect of the suggestive information may be determined by sorting based on the result of the first right/wrong determination process. In other words, by visually recognizing the mode of the suggestive information, it is possible to enjoy guessing, for example, how much the player can expect the occurrence of the special game state in the variable display of that round. In addition, the type of suggestive information and the presence or absence of a change in mode are determined at the time when the variation information is withheld. (Once a pattern different from the determined pattern is derived, and later changed to the determined pattern), or based on the fluctuation information retained later, It may be configured to change the mode of suggestive information corresponding to the already reserved variable information.

Means C-23. a customization opportunity granting means for determining whether to grant a customization opportunity to the unfinished object;
The customization opportunity provision means determines whether or not to provide the customization opportunity according to the result of the first propriety determination process,
The customization selection means is configured to determine the type of customization according to the result of the first propriety determination process,
Based on the latest result of the first right/wrong determination process performed in a state where the variation information including the result of the first right/wrong determination process is stored in the reserved area of the reserved storage area, the customization opportunity providing means When it is decided to grant the customization opportunity, at the stage when the latest first propriety determination process is performed, the latest first 1. The gaming machine according to means C-22, wherein the customization determined by the customization selection means can be executed based on the result of the judgment process.

According to the means C-23, when it is determined to execute customization corresponding to the change information that has been reserved later for the reserved area of the reserved storage area, the change display corresponding to the already reserved change information is displayed. It is configured so that customization can be performed (in retrofit) in In this case, it is possible to diversify effects related to customization (for example, it is possible to perform continuous advance notice such as a step-up effect related to customization over a plurality of continuous variable displays), improve convenience, and the like. Concretely explaining the point of convenience, the execution of customization and the type of customization are determined based on the result of the first success/failure determination process, in other words, according to the expected degree of occurrence of the special game state. It will happen. Therefore, in the variable display for teaching the occurrence of the special game state, if the effect related to customization is also derived, the time spent on the effect for teaching whether the special game state will occur will be shortened, or the variable time will be shortened. is too long and the production balance is deteriorated.

In this respect, in the variable display that is performed before the variable display that teaches the occurrence of the special game state, customization that is to be performed based on the occurrence of the special game state is performed. The effects and customization for teaching the occurrence of the special game state can be derived with a relatively sufficient margin. Further, by associating the degree of expectation for the occurrence of the special game state with the type of customization, when the predetermined customization is derived, the special game state is generated in the subsequent suspended variable display. So, you can raise your expectations. In particular, by applying the above configuration in a state in which the time (variation time) for the variable display of the identification information is set relatively short (shortened time state), such an effect can be exhibited more remarkably. .

Means C-24. the unfinished object is composed of a base object and a customized object that is displayed incidentally to the base object as a result of the customization;
The masking is applied to a part of the base object of the sub-object that has not yet been customized by the customization object,
a plurality of types of the base object exist, and the customization object is changed according to the change of the base object;
When it is decided to change the base object, the change of the base object is awaited until the variable display corresponding to the suggestive information that has already been displayed is completed, and with regard to the suggestive information, The gaming machine according to any one of means C-21 to C-23, wherein one corresponding to the type of the base object after change is derived.

According to means C-24, in a configuration in which a customization pattern (customization object) to be customized is displayed in advance, the base object is changed immediately before the long-awaited customization pattern is displayed. It is possible to avoid a situation in which the customization object is also changed accordingly.

According to this means, when the customized object corresponding to the post-change base object is displayed as the suggestive information before the base object is changed, it is possible to predict in advance that the base object will be changed. can grasp. Using such a phenomenon, when the change of the base object is associated with the expectation of winning, etc., or when performing a strange effect such that the base object is supposed to be changed but is not changed, the performance can be improved. can be achieved.

Means C-25. a proximity detection means capable of detecting the proximity or contact of an object to a plurality of locations of the variable display means (displaying various information related to the selection of the customization function) as different information;
The gaming machine according to any one of means C-1 to C-24, wherein selection information related to the customization can be inputted by the player based on the detection information of the proximity detection means.

According to means C-25, for example, when selecting one of a plurality of completed objects, the selection operation is performed by touching one of the plurality of completed objects displayed on the variable display means. can make the operation very easy to understand. Therefore, it is possible to avoid situations such as time running out due to confusion with such an operation, and game tempo becoming worse by setting a relatively long time for such an operation.

D. There is a pachinko machine as a kind of game machine. In a pachinko machine, when a game ball launched by a shooting means enters a starting ball entry means provided on a game board, a lottery is conducted as to whether or not a winning state is generated, and the lottery is determined by the variable display means. A variable display is provided to teach the results (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-271480).

In addition, for example, in order to diversify effects and the like and suppress monotonous feeling during the game, continuous display objects such as characters that can be continuously displayed in multiple times of variable display on the variable display means are added according to the progress of the game. Depending on the situation, some of them are configured so that their costumes and the like can be changed.

By the way, since the details of the change of the continuously displayed object are determined on the gaming machine side, the continuously displayed object may not suit the taste of the player, or conversely, it may become more and more different from the taste of the player. It is feared that

Also, in recent years, by exchanging data between a game machine and a server operated by a game machine manufacturer or the like via a mobile communication terminal carried by a player, it is possible to enjoy the experience that cannot be experienced simply by playing a game machine. A gaming system (mobile-linked game) capable of providing enjoyment is known, and by performing a mobile-linked game, a player selects (customizes) the change content of the continuously displayed object. Some are configured so that

However, such settings are executable on the web page of the server, and in order to change such settings, it is necessary to temporarily stop the game and access the server.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and its object is to provide a gaming machine that allows players to fully enjoy the customization function.

Means D-1. main control means for performing a lottery for determining whether or not to generate a special game state advantageous to a player based on a predetermined opportunity, and for generating the special game state based on the result of the lottery;
variable display means capable of variably displaying identification information;
A gaming machine comprising display control means for causing the variable display means to variably display the identification information and, after a predetermined period of time, stopping and displaying the identification information based on the result of the lottery,
The display control means is configured to be capable of deriving a continuous display object that can be displayed continuously in the plurality of times of the variable display on the variable display means,
Regarding the continuous display object,
Along with setting multiple customizable items,
A plurality of patterns are prepared for the customization pattern of each customization item,
The continuously displayed objects include a completed object in which all of the plurality of customization items have been customized, and an incomplete object in which the customization items that have not yet been customized exist up to the completion object,
an operation means that can be operated by a player;
customization opportunity granting means for determining whether to grant a customization opportunity to the unfinished object;
customization selection means for selecting the customization item and the customization pattern;
customization reflection means for reflecting the customization pattern selected by the customization selection means on the incomplete object;
When the customization opportunity granting means determines to grant the customization opportunity to the unfinished object, the part of the unfinished object corresponding to the customization item selected by the customization selection means is given the A configuration in which the customization pattern selected by the customization selection means is reflected,
The customization reflection means is configured to be able to determine whether or not to reflect the customization pattern of the customization item selected by the customization selection means on the unfinished object, based on the information input by operating the operation means. A game machine characterized by

According to the means D-1, although the gaming machine side selects the customization item and the customization pattern, the gaming machine side does not unilaterally customize the continuously displayed object (unfinished object), but rather selects the customization pattern. The player can decide whether or not to reflect it on the incomplete object. It is possible to reflect the player's individual tastes and the like in the customization of continuously displayed objects (not to reflect unfavorable customization patterns). Therefore, it is possible to avoid the frustration that the customization does not meet the player's expectations while suppressing the customizing function from becoming one-patterned. As a result, while diversifying the customization functions, it is possible to make the player more attached to the effect using the continuously displayed object, and to improve the desire to play the game.

In addition, customization is configured to be performed sequentially when playing a game. For this reason, for example, in order to reflect customization to an incomplete object (to update a continuously displayed object), compared to a configuration in which it is necessary to temporarily end a game and access a server, etc., there is convenience in terms of customization. It is possible to enhance the functionality and make the customization function easier to enjoy (make it easier to get into).

In addition, as "input information by operating the operation means", information such as passwords that are input in advance to the game machine, including information such as the player's individual game history and various settings, and opportunities for customization were obtained. information that selects whether or not to execute customization in a case. In addition, when an opportunity for customization is given, an announcement is made one by one to ask the player whether or not to reflect the selected customization pattern, and each time the information input by the operation to the operation means is displayed. Alternatively, the player inputs the player's personal information to the gaming machine at the start of the game, and the customization reflection means selects and discards the personal information according to the personal information. It may be configured to make a selection.

Means D-2. The customization selection means includes:
Pattern random number generating means used for pattern lottery for determining the customization pattern;
Corresponding pattern storage means for storing a correspondence relationship between a value that can be generated by the pattern random number generation means and the customization pattern,
A plurality of the corresponding pattern storage means are provided,
According to means D-1, the customization selection means is configured to be able to determine the corresponding pattern storage means to be referred to when selecting a customization pattern, based on information input by operating the operation means. game machine.

According to the means D-2, the player's individual game history, various settings (preferences), etc. can be reflected in the customization of the continuously displayed object (selection of the customization pattern by the customization selection means). Therefore, it is possible to avoid the frustration that the customization does not meet the player's expectations while suppressing the customizing function from becoming one-patterned. As a result, while diversifying the customization functions, it is possible to make the player more attached to the effect using the continuously displayed object, and to improve the desire to play the game.

Means D-3. The method according to means D-1 or D-2, further comprising operable state teaching means for teaching that the operation means is in a customization operation input state in which an operation input related to selection of a customization function is possible. game machine.

According to the means D-3, it is possible to make the player recognize more reliably that the customization operation input state has been entered.

Means D-4. In the configuration in which the customization operation input state occurs while the identification information is being variably displayed on the variable display means,
determining whether or not a specific effect that can be derived while the identification information is being variably displayed on the variable display means is being performed when a condition for transition to the customizing operation input state is satisfied;
When it is determined that the specific effect is not being performed, the state is shifted to the customization operation input state, and teaching is performed by the operable state teaching means,
When it is determined that the specific effect is being performed, restricting the transition to the customization operation input state, or not teaching by the operable state teaching means even though the state is transitioned to the customization operation input state. The gaming machine according to means D-3, characterized by:

According to the means D-4, it is possible to prevent a specific effect from being hindered by the teaching by the operable state teaching means. Therefore, when the specific effect indicates that the special game state is expected to occur, for example, teaching by the operable state teaching means is performed at the same time as the specific effect. It is possible to prevent a situation in which a decrease in the In particular, as will be described later in detail, the variable display is retained and stored, and setting operations relating to customization performed corresponding to the variable display in the retained state can be performed (at the stage of suspension). When configured, there is a high possibility that the derivation period of the customization operation input state and the specific effect will overlap, so that this effect will be more pronounced. Incidentally, in a specific effect, in the case of a configuration in which an effect using the operation of the operating means is performed, it is desirable to restrict the transition to the customization operation input state when it is determined that the specific effect is being performed.

Means D-5. Provided with condition establishment detection means for detecting that a predetermined condition is established,
The main control means is
Win/No random number generation means used for lottery to determine whether or not to generate the special game state;
Winning value storage means for storing a predetermined value among the values that can be generated by the success/failure random number generation means as a value for winning the lottery;
a reserved storage area having a plurality of reserved areas capable of storing variable information used for determining the content of the variable display in the variable display means;
a determination value extraction process for extracting the value of the success/failure random number generation means based on the detection of the condition satisfaction detection means;
a discrimination value storage process of storing the value of the success/failure random number generation means extracted in the discrimination value extraction process in one of the reserved storage areas;
a first success/failure determination process for determining whether or not the value of the success/failure random number generation means extracted in the determination value extraction process matches the value stored in the winning value storage means;
a result storage process for storing the result of the first propriety determination process;
(A specific effect determination process for determining whether or not to execute a continuous effect with a plurality of variable displays based on the result of the first propriety determination process)
Prior to execution of the variable display by the variable display means, it is determined whether or not the value of the win/fail random number generation means as the variable information corresponding to the variable display matches the value stored in the winning value storage means. a second right/wrong determination process for determining whether or not to generate a special game state based on the information;
A configuration capable of executing a variable display setting process for setting a variable display based on the result of the second propriety determination process,
a selected customization display means capable of displaying the contents of the customization selected by the customization selection means when the first propriety determination process is performed;
The selection customization display means performs the first right/wrong determination processing corresponding to the change information newly stored in the empty reservation area in a state where the change information is stored in the reservation area of the reservation storage area. at a stage before starting the variable display corresponding to the variable information newly reserved in the reserve area, suggesting information indicating the contents of the customization selected by the customization selection means when Any one of means D-1 to D-4, characterized in that it is configured to be able to display in association with the change display corresponding to the change information newly reserved in the reserve area. game machine.

According to the means D-5, the holding storage area has a plurality of holding areas, and can store the values of the success/failure random number generation means and the like related to the setting of the variable display for a plurality of times. As a result, the variable display is held. It will be done. Further, in this means, when the value of the success/failure random number generating means is stored in the reserved storage area, the success or failure of the lottery can be grasped, and the customization selection means can select the customization item and the customization pattern. Therefore, at the stage where the variable display is suspended, it is possible to give an opportunity for customization and to teach the player the details of the customization. Therefore, for example, when a variable display is already suspended and a new variable display is suspended, the stage before the newly suspended variable display is executed, that is, before the variable display is suspended When the previously suspended variable display is being performed, it is possible to teach the content of the customization to be given based on the newly suspended variable display. In this case, the player can prepare for the contents of the customized customization (preparation, operation, etc.) with plenty of time to spare.

That is, for example, "Since the variable display that can be customized as desired has been suspended, when an opportunity for customization corresponding to such variable display comes, an operation is performed to reflect such customization in the unfinished object." or "Although the customization of pattern A has been performed on the first customization item of the unfinished object, the first and third customization items are changed to B Now that we know that the patterns can be customized, let's stop the A pattern system and use the B pattern system." Therefore, for example, when the player is requested to perform a predetermined operation, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the operation is not completed in time due to the short input period. In addition, with this configuration, it is not necessary to forcibly lengthen the variable time in order to secure an extra operation input period. It is possible to suppress the situation that invites The selection customization display means may be configured by variable display means, or may be configured by other predetermined display means.

Means D-6. The display control means is configured to be able to change the form of the suggestive information displayed by the selective customization display means between when the corresponding variable information is stored in the holding area and when the corresponding variable information is displayed as a variable display. ,
The gaming machine according to means D-5, wherein the display control means determines whether or not to change the mode of the suggestive information based on the information input by operating the operation means.

According to means D-6, even after the suggestive information displayed by the selective customization display means is once displayed in a predetermined form, the form may change before the corresponding variable display is executed. For this reason, it is possible to diversify the effects, such as stepping up the degree of expectation for the occurrence of the special game state suggested by the change in the mode of the suggestion information.

In addition, there is a possibility that the suggestive information may change its form while it is being displayed by the selected customization display means until the corresponding variable information is displayed in a variable manner. For this reason, the change in the suggestive information may cause a loss of interest for the player who desires the appearance of the customization of the content indicated by the suggestive information before the mode change. In this regard, the present means is configured to be able to determine whether or not to change the mode of suggestive information based on an operation input by the player. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the above problems, and to proceed with customization while suppressing the occurrence of stress.

Incidentally, the aspect of the suggestive information may be determined by sorting based on the result of the first right/wrong determination process. In other words, by visually recognizing the mode of the suggestive information, it is possible to enjoy guessing, for example, how much the player can expect the occurrence of the special game state in the variable display of that round. In addition, the type of suggestive information and the presence or absence of a change in mode are determined at the time when the variation information is withheld. (Once a pattern different from the determined pattern is derived, and later changed to the determined pattern), or based on the fluctuation information retained later, It may be configured to change the mode of suggestive information corresponding to the already reserved variable information.

Means D-7. The customization opportunity provision means determines whether or not to provide the customization opportunity according to the result of the first propriety determination process,
The customization selection means is configured to determine the type of customization according to the result of the first propriety determination process,
Based on the latest result of the first right/wrong determination process performed in a state where the variation information including the result of the first right/wrong determination process is stored in the reserved area of the reserved storage area, the customization opportunity providing means When it is decided to grant the customization opportunity, at the stage when the latest first propriety determination process is performed, the latest first 1. The gaming machine according to means D-6, wherein the customization determined by the customization selection means can be executed based on the result of the judgment process.

According to the means D-7, when it is decided to execute customization corresponding to the change information that has been reserved later for the reserved area of the reserved storage area, the change display corresponding to the already reserved change information is displayed. It is configured so that customization can be performed (in retrofit) in In this case, it is possible to diversify effects related to customization (for example, it is possible to perform continuous advance notice such as a step-up effect related to customization over a plurality of continuous variable displays), improve convenience, and the like. Concretely explaining the point of convenience, the execution of customization and the type of customization are determined based on the result of the first success/failure determination process, in other words, according to the expected degree of occurrence of the special game state. It will happen. Therefore, in the variable display for teaching the occurrence of the special game state, if the effect related to customization is also derived, the time spent on the effect for teaching whether the special game state will occur will be shortened, or the variable time will be shortened. is too long and the production balance is deteriorated.

In this respect, in the variable display that is performed before the variable display that teaches the occurrence of the special game state, customization that is to be performed based on the occurrence of the special game state is performed. The effects and customization for teaching the occurrence of the special game state can be derived with a relatively sufficient margin. Further, by associating the degree of expectation for the occurrence of the special game state with the type of customization, when the predetermined customization is derived, the special game state is generated in the subsequent suspended variable display. So, you can raise your expectations. In particular, by applying the above configuration in a state in which the time (variation time) for the variable display of the identification information is set relatively short (shortened time state), such an effect can be exhibited more remarkably. .

Means D-8. Proximity detection means capable of detecting proximity or contact of an object to a plurality of locations of the variable display means displaying various information related to selection of a customizing function as different information,
The gaming machine according to any one of means D-1 to D-7, wherein selection information related to the customization can be inputted by the player based on the detection information of the proximity detection means.

According to means D-8, for example, when selecting one of a plurality of completed objects, the selection operation is performed by touching one of the plurality of completed objects displayed on the variable display means. can make the operation very easy to understand. Therefore, it is possible to avoid situations such as time running out due to confusion with such an operation, and game tempo becoming worse by setting a relatively long time for such an operation.

Means D-9. The unfinished object is configured such that a portion of the completed object is masked in a manner different from the already customized portion corresponding to the customization item that has not yet been customized. The gaming machine according to any one of means D-1 to D-8, characterized by:

According to means D-9, by confirming the form of the unfinished object, which is the form of a continuously displayed object in which there are customization items that have not yet been customized among the plurality of customization items, a part that has not yet been customized (customization items) exist (there is room for further customization) at a glance. Therefore, it is possible to easily and surely grasp how far the customization of the continuously displayed object can be performed, and furthermore, it is possible to relatively smoothly find out how to enjoy the customization function by seeing the entire contents of the customization function. As a result, it is possible to fully utilize the customization function, and to fully enjoy the performance using the continuously displayed object. Furthermore, by increasing interest in the customization function, it is possible to improve the willingness to play the game.

In addition, it is possible to effectively and clearly recognize that there are parts that have not been customized yet by masking incomplete objects, so separate explanations of customization functions need not be carefully and lengthy. finish. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the situation that the explanation of the customization function slows down the flow of the presentation (in particular, it takes unnecessary time for the player who has already grasped it), and the game progresses relatively smoothly. can be done.

Means D-10. The game according to means D-9, wherein the masking applied to the incomplete object corresponding to each customization item is configured to have a pattern different from at least the adjacent masking. machine.

According to means D-10, when there is a possibility that masking corresponding to a plurality of customizing items are connected (continuously) or close to each other, the masking corresponds to one customizing item. This makes it possible to more reliably avoid situations in which it is difficult to determine whether a customizable item corresponds to a customizable item or whether a plurality of customizable items are supported. Therefore, masking areas corresponding to a plurality of customization items can be set relatively freely, and by checking the state of the unfinished object, it is possible to find out how many uncustomized parts (customization items) remain. It is possible to grasp at a glance whether Therefore, by more effectively deriving more information about the customization function, the player can make decisions about the customization function quickly and reliably, and fully enjoy the customization process while proceeding with the game. can do.

Note that the “different patterns” of masking include those with different colors, patterns, or combinations thereof. Also, even if the masking areas are separated or lines are drawn at the borders of the masking areas, by making the masking patterns of the adjacent masking areas different, it is easier and faster to change the customization items that have not yet been customized. Able to distinguish between numbers and types.

In addition, corresponding to the above means D-5, "the masking pattern of the incomplete object is associated with the corresponding customization item, and the suggestive information is a part object indicating the customization item and the customization pattern." , and a background, and the pattern of the background of the suggestive information is associated with the masking pattern of the part of the incomplete object corresponding to the part object of the suggestive information. Further, "the unfinished object is configured in such a manner that the boundary of the part corresponding to each of the customization items can be identified, and when the opportunity to customize the unfinished object is given, the A part corresponding to a customization item of customization changes in a manner different from other parts." When adopting these configurations, when the player determines whether or not to reflect the customization, it is possible to relatively smoothly confirm which part the customization corresponds to.

Means D-11. customization progress storage means for storing information relating to customization of the unfinished object displayed on the variable display means;
The customization selection means refers to the customization progress storage means when selecting the customization item and the customization pattern (avoids customization that duplicates the contents stored in the customization progress storage means). The gaming machine according to means D-9 or D-10.

According to the means D-11, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the player feels uncomfortable because the customization of the same content is selected in quick succession, so that the player can enjoy the customization function more.

Means D-12. The continuous display object includes a main object and a sub-object (a simplified form of the main object),
The main object and the sub-object are
a base object that enables identification of an overview of the completed object;
a customization object that is set corresponding to each of the customization items and that is displayed in a portion of the base object that corresponds to the customization item when the customization is performed;
when the customized object is reflected in the continuously displayed object, it is reflected in both the main object and the sub-object;
The masking is applied only to (the base object of) the incomplete object of the sub-object,
the main object is configured to be able to change its mode based on the operation of the operation means;
A game according to any one of means D-9 to D-11, wherein a selection input operation method for reflecting the customization object on the continuously displayed object and an input operation method for changing the form of the main object are different. machine.

According to the means D-12, since the main object is not masked, for example, even if the main object is displayed in a state in which not all customization items have been customized yet (unfinished object stage), masking is not required. will no longer be taken. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which masking is applied to an unfinished main object, which may lead to a deterioration in design and a decrease in interest due to it, and regardless of the progress of customization, can be fully entertained in the manner of the main object.

On the other hand, sub-objects that are customized in the same manner as the main object will be masked corresponding to the parts that have not been customized. Therefore, even if the main object is not masked, the progress of customization of the main object can be reliably grasped by visually recognizing the sub-object.

Further, by configuring the main object so that the mode can be changed based on the operation of the operating means, it is possible to suppress the feeling of monotony during the game. Furthermore, when the player has been operating the operation means to change the mode of the main object, and then shifts to a state of performing selection input related to customization, the player may unintentionally perform selection input that is different from what was intended. is concerned. This problem can be avoided by making the operation method for changing the mode of the main object different from the operation method for selecting and inputting customization, as in the present means.

It is also possible to say that "the base object of the sub-object is silhouetted, and the details of the inside of the base object of the main object are drawn". Furthermore, since there are multiple customization patterns, the ``base object of the sub-object'' may be a ``simplified form of the completed object''. Examples include a deformed one, a reduced one, or a combination of these. A character such as a person, animal, or anthropomorphic object may be adopted as the "base object", and a costume of the character, a tool used by the character, a vehicle, a background, etc. may be adopted as the "customized object". . In addition, as "base objects", vehicles used by predetermined characters, vehicles such as airplanes, bases for objects (cakes, weapons, etc.) produced by characters, backgrounds such as living spaces and zoos are adopted, and "customized objects" are used. As such, configuration parts such as vehicles and weapons, decorations, various objects installed in the background, and the like may be adopted.

In addition, both the main object and the sub-objects may be displayed at the same time, and a configuration may be adopted in which the progress of customization can be checked with the sub-objects while enjoying the aspect of the main object. A configuration in which only one of the objects is displayed, customization is progressed while only the sub-objects are displayed, and customization is reflected when the main object is displayed. A configuration may be adopted in which the player enjoys a performance using the main object.

Means D-13. The customization selection means includes:
Pattern random number generating means used for pattern lottery for determining the customization pattern;
A configuration comprising a value that can be generated by the pattern random number generation means and a corresponding pattern storage means for storing a correspondence relationship with the customization pattern,
The corresponding pattern storage means includes first pattern storage means in which a specific customized pattern is not selected or is difficult to be selected, and second pattern storage means in which the specific customized pattern is more likely to be selected than the first pattern storage means. and
When selecting a customization pattern by the customization selection means,
a first pattern selection state in which the first pattern storage means is referenced and the second pattern storage means is not referenced;
Means D characterized by comprising customized pattern selection state switching means for changing the state to a second pattern selection state in which the second pattern storage means is referenced and the first pattern storage means is not referenced. -1 to D-12.

According to the means D-13, by providing a state in which a specific customization pattern is likely to be provided (for example, a rare pattern high probability state in which a rare customization pattern is provided with a high probability as a specific customization pattern), the gaming value is increased. It is possible to arouse interest in the game in a dimension different from the factor related to the increase or decrease of the game, and to increase opportunities for presentation. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the feeling of monotony during the game, and to improve the willingness to play the game. Note that the conditions for the state change between the first pattern selection state and the second pattern selection state can be appropriately set for each model.

In addition, corresponding to means D-11, "the customization selection means refers to the customization progress storage means after selecting the customization item and the customization pattern, and determines that the content of the customization selected this time is the If it is determined that the customization overlaps with the contents stored in the customization progress storage means, the customization item may be selected again. That is, in means D-13, there is a state in which a specific customization pattern is likely to be given, and if the specific customization pattern is a rare customization pattern, the content of customization selected in the rare pattern high probability state overlaps. So, if a specific customization pattern is changed to another customization pattern (a general customization pattern that is difficult to select or not selected in the rare pattern high probability state), why is it a rare pattern high probability state but a general customization pattern? There is a concern that it will lead to a decline in interest as to whether the will be selected. On the other hand, in this example, by changing the customization item without changing the customization pattern, duplication can be avoided, so that such a situation can be avoided.

Means D-14. In a gaming machine capable of executing a mobile-linked game in which information is exchanged with a server via a mobile communication terminal carried by a player,
an operation means that can be operated by a player;
player identification information storage means for storing player information input by a player's operation of the operation means when starting a mobile-linked game;
a game information storage means capable of accumulating and storing game information, which is information relating to a lottery to be performed at the time of the game;
an information output means capable of outputting the game information accumulated and stored in the game information storage means in a manner that can be acquired or identified by the portable communication terminal when the mobile-linked game is terminated;
By storing the player information in the player identification information storage means, a process corresponding to the player information is performed, and the game information related to the current game is accumulated and stored in the game information storage means. There is
Means D-1 to D-13, wherein when the information output means outputs the game information accumulated and stored in the game information storage means, the information relating to the continuously displayed object is also output. The gaming machine according to any one of

According to the means D-14, it is possible to carry over the information on the continuously displayed objects in the current game to the next game (mobile-linked game). As a result, it is possible to overdo the current game, such as a configuration in which unless a continuous display object is completed in one game, the performance using the completed continuous display object can only be seen. It is possible to increase the enjoyment of the next game while suppressing the situation such as being put away. Therefore, it is possible to improve the convenience, and it is possible to make the effect using the continuously displayed object more diverse and profound. In addition, even if you do not overdo it in a single game, you can accumulate customizations over several days and enjoy them.

It should be noted that the configuration may be such that only completed objects can be handed over, or both completed objects and unfinished objects can be handed over. Also, the function of customizing the continuously displayed object (or the function of selecting customization, etc.) may be enabled only when the mobile-linked game is being executed. In this case, it is possible to increase the willingness to participate in the mobile-linked game.

Means D-15. unfinished customization storage means for storing customization contents of each of the customization items of the unfinished object;
Completed customization storage means for storing the contents of customization of each of the customization items of the completed object for which customization has been completed;
completed object accumulation storage means for accumulating and storing customized contents of each customization item of the completed object for which customization has been completed;
When all the customization items of the incomplete object are customized, the contents of the customization of each customization item can be stored in the completed customization storage means, and
at least when the storage contents of the incomplete customization storage means are erased, the customization contents of each customization item of the incomplete object are stored in the completed object accumulation storage means;
The information stored in the completed object accumulation storage means is not erased even if the stored contents of the completed customization storage means are erased,
Means D- characterized in that, when the information output means outputs the game information stored in the game information storage means, the information stored in the completed object storage means is also output. 14. The gaming machine according to 14.

According to the means D-15, even if a completed object that is finally completed (with the first combination) by customizing the incomplete object is erased due to the flow of the game, the completed object can be completed. Information about what has been done remains in the memory (completed object storage means) and is sent to the server via the portable communication terminal carried by the player. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the feeling of disappearance caused by easily erasing a completed object that has been completed with much effort.

In addition, in the case where completed objects are accumulated in a game machine without being erased, for example, the display mode of the completed objects may become disordered, the display processing may become relatively difficult, or the completed objects may There are concerns that it will take time to select the one to use for the production from among them, the rhythm of the production will deteriorate, and the storage capacity will increase, but by erasing it moderately , can dispel such concerns. Naturally, since the completion of the completed object remains in memory, it is possible to erase the completed object without hesitation.

It should be noted that an announcement may be displayed to explain the content of this means to the player. For example, you can check the completed objects you got today by accessing the homepage (server) after finishing the (mobile-linked) game. You can select a completed object to be used on the actual machine (gaming machine) and use it for effects, etc." or the like may be displayed. Also, the announcement display is preferably displayed when the completed object is erased. In this case, the player can clearly recognize how the erased completed object will be treated, and can avoid a situation in which he or she cannot concentrate on the game because of this.

The stored contents of the completed object may be erased when an effect using the completed object is executed, or when an input indicating erasure is performed by the player's operation.

Means D-16. The variable display means is configured to be capable of executing a specific effect in which the completed object customized by the player is displayed in a specific manner,
There are a plurality of types of the specific effect, and depending on the combination of the type of the specific effect and the completed object displayed during the specific effect, the winning expectation for the occurrence of the special game state is different. configured,
When the specific effect is performed, the type of the specific effect is determined based on the customization pattern of the completed car displayed in the specific effect and the winning expectation for the occurrence of the special game state. a configuration that
Determining whether or not to execute the specific effect when starting the variable display of the identification information,
means for avoiding execution of the specific effect when it is determined that an opportunity for customization is given in the variable display when determining whether to execute the specific effect; or The gaming machine according to any one of D-15.

According to the means D-16, by storing player information in the player specifying information storage means and performing a mobile-linked game, the continuously displayed object customized by the player himself is used as a specified object for a specified effect (appearance ). Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance. Further, in the specific effect, the type of the specific effect is selected according to the completed object selected by the player and the winning expectation. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the combination of the completed object and the type of the specific effect is greatly different from the winning expectation.

In addition, the type of specific effect is determined because the expectation of winning for the occurrence of the special game state is different depending on the combination of the type of specific effect and the pattern of the completed object displayed in the specific effect. If the pattern of finished cars is changed later, there is concern that the reliability of the winning expectation will be lowered. In this regard, in this means, by avoiding a situation in which the pattern of the completed car is changed after the type of the specific effect is determined, the reliability of the winning expectation can be maintained, and the customization is reflected to the player. It is possible to make it so that the degree of expectation is not affected even if it is made to choose whether or not to allow it.

Means D-17. The customization selection means includes:
an item lottery random number generation means used in an item lottery for determining a customization item to be customized from among the plurality of customization items;
Corresponding item storage means for storing a correspondence relationship between a value that can be generated by the item lottery random number generation means and the customization item;
Pattern random number generating means used for pattern lottery for determining the customization pattern;
Corresponding pattern storage means for storing a correspondence relationship between a value that can be generated by the pattern random number generation means and the customization pattern,
When it is determined by the customization opportunity granting means that the opportunity for customization is granted, the value of the item lottery random number generation means and the value of the pattern random number generation means are based on the operation input by the operation means. is acquired, and the corresponding item storage means and the corresponding pattern storage means are referenced based on the acquired value of the item lottery random number generation means and the acquired value of the pattern random number generation means, The gaming machine according to any one of means D-1 to D-16, wherein customization items and said customization patterns are determined.

According to the means D-17, the contents of customization (customization items and customization patterns) are determined by the player's operation (lottery is held), so that the player can become familiar with customization.

Means D-18. The customization opportunity granting means includes:
customization lottery random number generating means used for a customization lottery to decide whether or not to customize the unfinished object;
customized winning value storage means for storing a predetermined value among values that can be generated by the customized lottery random number generating means as a value for winning in the customized lottery;
When a predetermined condition is satisfied, the value of the customized lottery random number generating means is obtained based on the operation input by the operating means, and the customized winning value is obtained based on the obtained value of the customized lottery random number generating means. The gaming machine according to any one of means D-1 to D-17, wherein it is determined whether or not to grant the customization opportunity by referring to the storage means.

According to the means D-18, it is determined by the operation of the player whether or not the opportunity for customization is given (lottery is held), so that the player can be interested in customization.

The basic configuration of various gaming machines to which the above means are applied is shown below.

a. The game machine in each of the above means is a pinball game machine. As a more detailed example of the aspect, "an operating means (game ball shooting handle) operated by a player, a shooting means (shooting motor, etc.) for flipping and shooting a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, and the shooting means. A pinball game machine provided with a game area in which a game ball is guided and each ball entry means (general winning opening, variable winning device, operation opening, etc.) arranged in the game area.

b. The game machine in each of the above means is a pinball game machine having a game area extending in a substantially vertical direction. As a more detailed example of the aspect, "an operating means (game ball shooting handle) operated by a player, a shooting means (shooting motor, etc.) for flipping and shooting a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, and the shooting means. A predetermined game area (for example, the game area is composed of a game board surface, etc.) that guides the game balls and extends along a substantially vertical direction, and each ball entry means (general winning opening, variable winning device, operation port, etc.), and configured to enable visual recognition of the behavior of the game ball flowing down the game area.

c. The game machine or each pinball game machine in each of the above means is a pachinko machine or a game machine conforming to a pachinko machine.

d. The gaming machine in each of the above means is a reel-type gaming machine such as a slot machine. As a more detailed example, "an identification information string (design string; specifically, a rotating body such as a reel or belt with a design) consisting of a plurality of identification information (designs) is variably displayed (specifically, a reel (e.g., rotation), a variable display means (specifically, a rotating body unit such as a reel unit) that stops and displays the identification information string, The identification information (design) starts to change, the identification information (design) is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (specifically, the stop button), and the identification aligned on the effective line at the time of the stop A reel-type gaming machine constructed so that game values are given on the condition that the information is specific identification information".

e. The gaming machine in each of the above means is a gaming machine of a type that combines a slot machine and a pachinko machine (particularly, a gaming machine of slot machine specifications using game balls as game media). As a more detailed example, "an identification information string (design string; specifically, a rotating body such as a reel or belt with a design) consisting of a plurality of identification information (designs) is variably displayed (specifically, a reel (e.g., rotation), a variable display means (specifically, a rotating body unit such as a reel unit) that stops and displays the identification information string, The identification information (design) starts to change, the identification information (design) is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (specifically, the stop button), and the identification aligned on the effective line at the time of the stop A game value is given on the condition that the information is specific identification information, and a ball receiving tray (upper tray or the like) is provided to take in a game ball from the ball receiving tray; A game machine comprising a payout means for paying out game balls, and constructed so that a game start condition is satisfied when the game balls are taken in by the take-in means.

10 Pachinko machine 32a First variable winning device 32b Second variable winning device 33a First starting winning device 33b Second starting winning device 34 Through gate 42 Decoration pattern display device 43L ... first special display device, 43R ... second special display device, 261 ... main control device, 262 ... sub-control device.

Claims (1)

a first control means for performing a lottery as to whether or not to generate a special game state advantageous to a player based on a predetermined opportunity, and generating the special game state based on the result of the lottery;
result display means for variably displaying the identification information based on the predetermined opportunity and statically displaying the identification information based on the result of the lottery;
effect display means capable of deriving a effect display that starts when the identification information starts to fluctuate and ends when the identification information stops displaying;
a second control means for controlling the effect display means based on information from the first control means;
The second control means is
production means for generating a specific state in which the probability of occurrence of the specific production in the production display means is increased;
Pattern random number generation means used for pattern lottery for determining the pattern of the specific effect;
pattern storage means for storing a correspondence relationship between a value that can be generated by the pattern random number generation means and the pattern of the specific effect;
The pattern storage means is
a first pattern storage means in which the pattern of the predetermined specific effect is not selected or is difficult to be selected;
a second pattern storage means in which the pattern of the predetermined specific effect is more likely to be selected than the first pattern storage means ;
In the specific state,
a first pattern selection state in which the first pattern storage means is referred to or is likely to be referred to, and the second pattern storage means is not referred to or is difficult to be referred to;
a second pattern selection state in which the second pattern storage means is referenced or is easily referenced and the first pattern storage means is not referenced or is difficult to be referenced;
There is a first probability state in which the special game state is won in the lottery with a predetermined probability, and a second probability state in which the special game state is won in the lottery with a higher probability than the first probability state,
The first pattern selection state is shifted to the first pattern selection state when the variable display is performed a predetermined first plurality of times without interposing the special game state at least in the first probability state. When the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times in , or when the special game state occurs, the configuration includes a state that ends,
means for executing display corresponding to the number of times of variation of said variable display until said first pattern selection state is started; and display corresponding to said number of times of variation of said variable display until said first pattern selection state is terminated. and means capable of
means for executing a lottery as to whether or not the first pattern selection state should be set based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
Means for determining whether or not to enter the first pattern selection state after the end of the special game state according to the type of the special game state
A gaming machine comprising at least one of

Images